JP2016019791A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of accurately suggesting to a player a possibility of transferring to a game state advantageous to the player.SOLUTION: When receiving a winning information command during execution of a continuous chance symbol performance, a voice lamp control device 113 temporarily stores the winning information command in an acquisition standby command memory 223k. This configuration can prevent continuous chance symbol determination processing (refer to Figure 22) from being executed during the execution of the continuous chance symbol performance so as to prevent a value of a continuous chance symbol counter 223b from being overwritten, thereby accurately executing the currently-executing continuous chance symbol performance to the last. Accordingly, the game machine further accurately suggests to the player a game state that the game machine is to be transferred to after termination of the continuous chance symbol performance, by the number of continuations of the variable performance with a stop symbol defined as "the chance symbol".SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 21

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, pachinko machines have been known in which a display effect such as a liquid crystal display device or the like is used to produce a fluctuating effect (dynamic display) or the like to improve the interest of the game. The fluctuating effect (dynamic display) is an effect that starts when a game ball enters (wins) at the entrance (starting entrance), for example, 3 provided in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. A total of nine symbols and the like are displayed in a × 3 cell. More specifically, when a game ball wins a start opening, scrolling of symbols and the like is started, and then the symbols being scrolled are sequentially stopped and a total of nine symbols (stop symbols) are stopped and displayed. To do. In such a variation effect, a device is devised to give the player a sense of expectation by executing an effect that suggests in advance that the game state (for example, jackpot) is advantageous for the player.

  In this type of pachinko machine, for example, as an effect that suggests in advance that the game state is advantageous to the player, the display of chances and the like is not limited to one variation effect, but continuously over a plurality of variation effects. There are games that are configured to be performed periodically or intermittently, or those that perform the same or different performance multiple times continuously or intermittently with display or sound effects (hereinafter referred to as “continuous performance”), and advantageous games The game has been further improved in interest, such as giving players a sense of expectation of the state. Note that the chance eyes are, for example, stop symbols other than winning, and stop symbols (display results) including predetermined symbols (for example, symbols such as “3”, “4”, and “1”), respectively. Aspect). For example, if a plurality of variation effects to be started are held when a game ball wins a start opening, this continuous effect is performed continuously for the plurality of variation effects that are held. This indicates to the player that the greater the number of times of changing effects, the higher the possibility of shifting to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

Japanese Utility Model Publication No. 7-24383

  However, there may be a case where a continuous performance is executed that does not correspond to the number of continuously performed variable performances and the high possibility of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player, and the transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player may occur. There was a problem that the wrong thing was suggested to the player as a possibility.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and provides a gaming machine capable of accurately suggesting to the player the possibility of shifting to a gaming state advantageous to the player. It is an object.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 detects a display means for displaying identification information, a entrance into which a game medium enters, and an entrance of the game medium into the entrance. A detection means, a peripheral control means for executing dynamic display of identification information in the display means when the detection means detects a ball entering a game medium, and controls the peripheral control means, Main control means for performing control, and the main control means, when the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means, the entrance information for acquiring the entrance information associated with the entrance An entry means, an entry information transmission means for sending the entry information acquired by the entry information acquisition means to the peripheral control means, and a main entry for storing the entry information acquired by the entry information acquisition means. Sphere information storage means and its main entry information Dynamic display instruction means for instructing the peripheral control means to execute the dynamic display based on the contents of the memory means, the peripheral control means being instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means The dynamic display execution means for executing the dynamic display in the display means, and the dynamic display mode executed by the dynamic display execution means is set to a predetermined mode or a mode different from the predetermined mode A mode setting means, a pitch information receiving means for receiving the pitch information transmitted by the pitch information transmitting means of the main control means, and a pitch information for receiving the pitch information received by the pitch information receiving means. When the new entry information is stored in one peripheral storage means and the first peripheral storage means, the dynamic display execution means sequentially executes the information based on the contents of the first peripheral storage means. Real in dynamic display It is determined that the continuous effects can be executed by the effect availability determination means for determining whether or not the continuous effects for executing the dynamic display modes that are in sequence are executed in the predetermined mode, and the effect availability determination means. The continuous display control means for controlling the dynamic display modes of the execution order executed by the dynamic display execution means to be the predetermined modes, and the effect availability determination means. The entry information received by the entry information receiving means after it is determined that the continuous effect can be executed is stored in a second peripheral storage means different from the first peripheral storage means instead of the first peripheral storage means. First storage control means.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first storage control means is controlled by the continuous effect control means after it is determined by the effect availability determination means that the continuous effect can be executed. Before the game is completed, the incoming information received by the incoming information receiving means is stored in the second peripheral storage means in association with the reception order of the incoming information instead of the first peripheral storage means, and the peripheral control Means for determining whether or not the entry information is stored in the second peripheral storage means; and when the entry information is received by the entry information receiving means, the entry information is received by the storage determination means. Is stored in the second peripheral storage means, instead of the first peripheral storage means, in association with the reception order of the incoming information. Remember Receiving order entry information for acquiring the entry information stored in the second peripheral storage means in the order in which the entry information was received after the control by the second storage control means and the continuous production control means is completed. An acquisition means; and third storage control means for storing in the first peripheral storage means one by one in the order of acquisition of the entry information acquired by the reception order entry information acquisition means.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the continuous production control means determines that the continuous production can be executed by the production availability determination means. The mode of the dynamic display in which the execution order that is executed by the mode is continuously set to the predetermined mode by the mode setting unit, and the reception order entry information acquisition unit is controlled by the continuous production control unit. Is stored in the second peripheral storage means when the dynamic display with the last execution order is completed in the continuous dynamic display of the execution order set in the predetermined mode The information is acquired in the order in which the entry information is received.

  The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the predetermined aspect includes an aspect of the dynamic display effect, an aspect of the display result of the dynamic display, At least one of the sound effect modes of the dynamic display is included.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, when the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means in the main control means, the entrance information associated with the entrance is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, and the acquisition The received ball information is transmitted to the peripheral control unit by the ball information transmitting unit. Further, when the entrance information is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, the entrance information is stored in the main entrance information storage means, and the dynamic display is executed based on the contents of the main entrance information storage means. The peripheral display means is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means. On the other hand, in the peripheral control means, the dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means is executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means, and the dynamic display mode to be executed is predetermined. Or an aspect different from the predetermined aspect is set by the aspect setting means. Further, when the entrance information transmitted by the entrance information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the entrance information receiving means, the received entrance information is stored in the first peripheral storage means. And when new entrance information is memorize | stored in the 1st periphery memory | storage means, based on the content of the 1st periphery memory | storage means, it performs in the dynamic display performed in order by the dynamic display execution means It is determined by the effect availability determination means whether or not a continuous effect for executing the dynamic display modes that are in sequence in a predetermined manner can be executed. Here, if it is determined that execution is possible, the continuous presentation control unit controls the dynamic display modes in the execution order executed by the dynamic display execution unit to be in a predetermined mode, and the determination of whether or not presentation is possible. Entry information received by the entry information receiving means after it is determined to be executable by the means is stored in the second peripheral storage means different from the first peripheral storage means in place of the first peripheral storage means. Stored by the control means. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent new entry information from being stored in the first peripheral storage means after it is determined that the performance availability determination means can execute, the dynamic display mode is set to a predetermined mode by the continuous performance control unit. In the middle of being controlled so that the control is performed again, it is determined that the performance determination unit can execute again, and as a result, the execution of the control by the continuous performance control unit different from the control during the execution is started. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of dynamic displays controlled so as to be in a predetermined mode by the continuous performance control means from being changed during the control, so that it is advantageous for the player when the continuous performance is executed. There is an effect that it is possible to accurately suggest to the player the possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

  For example, the continuous production control means may be configured to control only the dynamic display mode before being executed by the dynamic display execution means so as to be a predetermined mode, or executed by the dynamic display execution means. It is good also as a structure which controls so that the aspect of the dynamic display currently performed and the aspect of the dynamic display before being performed by the dynamic display execution means may become a predetermined | prescribed aspect, respectively.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine of the first aspect, from the determination that the continuous effect can be executed by the effect determination unit, until the control by the continuous effect control unit ends. The incoming information received by the incoming information receiving means is stored in the second peripheral storage means by the first storage control means in association with the reception order of the incoming information in place of the first peripheral storage means. In the peripheral control means, when the incoming information is received by the incoming information receiving means, if it is determined by the storage determining means that the incoming information is stored in the second peripheral storage means, the incoming information is received. The incoming information received by the means is stored in the second peripheral storage means by the second storage control means in association with the reception order of the incoming information in place of the first peripheral storage means. Further, when the control by the continuous effect control means is finished, the entrance information stored in the second peripheral storage means is acquired by the reception order entry information acquisition means in the order in which the entrance information is received, and the acquisition is performed. The third storage control means stores the entry information in the first peripheral storage means one by one in the order of acquisition. Therefore, after the control by the continuous production control means is completed, the entrance information stored in the second peripheral storage means can be stored in the first peripheral storage means one by one in the order in which the entrance information is received. it can. Further, even after the control by the continuous effect control means is completed, the entry information received by the entry information receiving means is stored in the first peripheral storage means while the entry information is stored in the second peripheral storage means. Instead, it can be stored in the second peripheral storage means in association with the reception order of the entrance information. Therefore, since the order of the entry information stored in the first peripheral storage means can be the order in which the entry information is received, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect can be executed by the effect availability determination means. This can be done in an order corresponding to the order in which the information was received. Therefore, when continuous performances are executed in order, it is possible to accurately suggest to the player the possibility of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player in the order in which the possibility transitions. There is.

  The acquisition of the entry information by the reception order entry information acquisition means is, for example, after reading the entry information stored in the second peripheral storage means, the read entry information is stored in the second peripheral storage means. Indicates to be removed from

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to claim 2, when it is determined that the continuous effect can be executed by the effect availability determination means, the dynamic display is executed by the continuous effect control means. Each of the dynamic display modes in the execution order executed by the means is set to a predetermined mode by the mode setting means. In addition, when the dynamic display having the last execution order in the continuous dynamic display in which the execution order is controlled by the continuous production control means and the aspect is set to the predetermined aspect is completed, the second peripheral storage means The stored entry information is acquired by the reception order entry information acquisition means in the order in which the entry information is received. Therefore, when the execution of the last variation display in the continuous performance is finished and the control burden on the peripheral control means is reduced, the order in which the entrance information is received from the entrance information stored in the second peripheral storage means Can be obtained by the reception order entry information acquisition means. Accordingly, there is an effect that the control burden on the peripheral control means can be distributed.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, the predetermined mode includes a dynamic display effect mode and a dynamic display result. And at least one of the sound effects of dynamic display are included, so that the player can recognize that the dynamic display has been changed to a predetermined mode, and the player's interest There is an effect that it can attract.

  When the dynamic display mode is continuously set to the predetermined mode, the predetermined mode may be changed for each dynamic display. For example, in the first dynamic display, the predetermined mode is a dynamic display mode, and in the second dynamic display, the predetermined mode is a dynamic display result mode. In the display, a predetermined mode is set as a dynamic sound effect mode. As described above, if the dynamic display mode is changed, the dynamic display changes in a variety of ways, so that the player's interest can be more strongly attracted.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of various counters, a reservation ball storage area, and a reservation ball execution area. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the content of the changeable period memory of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus, (b) is the schematic which shows an example of the content of RAM of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. . (A) is a schematic diagram showing an actual screen and effective line settings when the display screen is scrolled horizontally, and (b) shows an actual screen and effective line settings when the display screen is vertically scrolled. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a miss chance eye, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a reach chance eye. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation ball | bowl storage area sequential advance process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation start process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process of the main controller and the payout controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous chance eye determination process of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display process of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the change execution time update process of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process of an audio | voice line control apparatus. It is a table | surface which shows an example of the content of the change production in case a new winning is "probability big hit" and the reception timing of a winning information command is in the period which can change a stop symbol. It is a table | surface which shows an example of the content of the fluctuating effect in case a new winning is "normal jackpot" and the receiving timing of a winning information command is in the period which can change a stop symbol. It is a table | surface which shows an example of the content of the fluctuating effect in case a new winning is a "probable big jackpot" or a "normal jackpot" and the receiving timing of a winning information command is a period during which the stop symbol cannot be changed. It is a table | surface which shows an example of the content of the fluctuating effect when a new winning is "front / rear miss reach" or "miss chance" (it does not matter the receiving timing of a winning information command). It is a flowchart which shows the main process of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the change production process of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the external interruption process of a display control apparatus.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16. On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect pattern of the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or changing the effect content at the reach effect.

  In addition, the front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot.

  Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs. In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. A touch sensor (not shown) for pressing, a push button type stop switch (not shown) for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by electric resistance. And a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the change of the signal. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor (not shown) is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor (not shown) changes corresponding to the operation amount. A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes according to the amount of rotation of the handle 51, and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. It is. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor (not shown) and the stop switch (not shown) are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the second ball entrance 67 (through gate), the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. In FIG. 2, a part of a nail, a metal fitting, or the like is deleted and illustrated for easy understanding of the reference numerals. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Below, the structure of the game board 13 is demonstrated.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Falling area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launching unit 112a to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  A first symbol display device 37 for mainly displaying the first symbol is disposed in the upper right portion of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right portion of FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37 is provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b.

  The LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, and the gaming state of whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a probable change, in a short time, or in a normal state is lit. , Indicating whether it is changing or not by lighting state, corresponding to the first symbol corresponding to “probability big hit” described later, the first symbol corresponding to “normal big hit”, and “out” The first symbol is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In this pachinko machine 10, three lottery results are provided as “probable big hit” of the first symbol, “normal jackpot” of the first symbol, and “miss” of the first symbol as the jackpot lottery results. . Then, when winning the first entrance 64, whether the first symbol is “probable big hit”, the first symbol “ordinary jackpot”, or the first symbol “out” A lottery will be held.

  As a result of the lottery, when the pachinko machine 10 has a “probable big hit” of the first symbol, the jackpot probability of the first symbol is increased, and the game state is easily shifted to the special gaming state. The probability of hitting the second symbol increases, and the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 (see FIG. 2) is opened for a predetermined time, so that the ball can easily enter the first entrance 64. It becomes a game state. Hereinafter, this state is referred to as “probability change (probability change state)”.

  In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 becomes the “normal jackpot” of the first symbol, the jackpot probability of the first symbol becomes a normal state, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the first entrance entrance The electric accessory attached to 64 is in an open state for a predetermined time, so that the ball is easy to enter the first entrance 64. Hereinafter, this state will be referred to as a short time (short time state), and a state other than the probability change (short time state) and the short time (short time state) will be referred to as a normal state (normal state).

  It should be noted that during the probability change or during the short time, instead of changing the winning probability of the second symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time for opening the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that an electric accessory opens | releases around the time.

  In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is “disconnected” in the first symbol, the state of the game that is neither probabilistic nor short in time (the state where neither the first symbol jackpot probability nor the second symbol hit probability is up) Become.

  In the present embodiment, the “probability jackpot” of the first symbol is a jackpot whose maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds, and then the jackpot of the first symbol (probable jackpot or normal jackpot). The interval is a jackpot (16R probability variation jackpot) in which the jackpot probability of the first symbol shifts to a high probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than usual) and the hit probability of the second symbol also increases.

  In addition, the “normal jackpot” of the 1st symbol means that after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds, the jackpot probability of the 1st symbol shifts to a low probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is normal), and a predetermined fluctuation The jackpot (16R normal jackpot) in which only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased only for the number of times (for example, 100 fluctuations).

  In the present embodiment, when the “normal big hit” of the first symbol is achieved, the hit probability of the second symbol is increased for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). However, instead, it may be configured to continue increasing the winning probability of the second symbol until the next lottery result of the first symbol is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the first symbol “probability big hit” or the first symbol “ordinary big hit” is set, the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds, but the number of rounds is an arbitrary number (for example, , 8 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.). Further, the number of rounds may be different between the “probability big hit” of the first symbol and the “normal jackpot” of the first symbol. For example, the maximum number of rounds may be 16 rounds in the case of “probability big hit” of the first symbol, and the maximum number of rounds may be eight rounds in the case of “normal jackpot” of the first symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the “probability big hit” of the first symbol is reached, the probability of winning the second symbol is increased until the lottery result of the big jackpot of the next first symbol is determined. However, instead of this, the probability of hitting the second symbol may be increased only for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

  From now on, the “probable big jackpot” of the first symbol is simply referred to as “probable big jackpot”, the “ordinary jackpot” of the first symbol is simply referred to as “normal jackpot”, and “Out” is simply referred to as “out”.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a third symbol display device 81 configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “LCD”) that displays the third symbol in a variable manner with a winning at the first entrance 64 as a trigger. , Passing through the second entrance 67 (through gate), the second symbol display portion 83 composed of LEDs that display the second symbol in a variable manner triggered by the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 (through gate), and the second entrance 67 (through gate) A second symbol holding lamp 84 indicating the number of balls held is provided.

  The display content of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, and for example, three symbol sequences of left, middle, and right are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are scrolled vertically or horizontally for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 7). Further, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the variable display device unit 80 surrounds the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81 so as to surround the center frame. 86 is arranged. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 displays the first symbol indicating the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 and the lottery result of the jackpot. A decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display device 37 is performed on the third symbol display device 81. Instead of the LCD, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  In addition, in the first symbol display device 37, a ball is displayed until a stop symbol (any one of the first symbol indicating a probable big hit, the first symbol indicating a normal jackpot, or the first symbol indicating a loss) is displayed. , When winning (entering) the first entrance 64, the number of winning (entering) is suspended up to 4 times, and the number of suspensions is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and the special figure is suspended. The number of lamps 85 that are turned on is also shown. Hereinafter, the number of suspensions for the first entrance 64 is referred to as the special figure reservation ball number N. Four special figure holding lamps 85 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holding times, and are arranged on the upper left side of the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured so that the winning at the first entrance 64 is held up to 4 times, but the maximum holding number is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less, Or you may set to the frequency | count (for example, 8 times) of 5 times or more. Also, the special figure holding lamp 85 is deleted, and the variable display holding number based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is numerically displayed on a part of the third symbol display device 81 or divided into four areas. May be displayed in a different form (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the number of times of holding. Further, the number of suspensions may be displayed on the first symbol display device 37. In this case, the special figure hold lamp 85 may not perform the lighting display.

  Each time the sphere passes through the second entrance 67 (through gate), the second symbol display unit 83 alternates between the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as the display symbol (second symbol). The variable display to light is performed. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the variation display on the second symbol display unit 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “◯”), the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is kept for a predetermined time. Only in the open state, the sphere is configured to enter the first entrance 64 easily.

  The number of passes through the second entrance 67 (through gate) of the ball is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of hold times is lit and displayed on the second symbol hold lamp 84. The second symbol variation display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display unit 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the number of times the ball is held for the second entrance 67 (through gate) is not limited to the maximum number of 4 as in the case of the first entrance 64, but is 3 times or less, or 5 You may set to the frequency | count (for example, 8 times) more than times. Moreover, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entrance switch 208a (see FIG. 4) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch 208a is turned on. Then, the main control device 110 performs a lottery lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37.

  The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the general winning slot 63 are the same. However, the number may be different. For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 may be 20.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol, A stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a and a large opening opening solenoid (solenoid 209 (FIG. 4)). The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is easy to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is lit in a manner corresponding to the jackpot, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 110 controls the operation of the entire pachinko machine 10, and sends various commands to sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113, thereby controlling the operation of the sub-control device. It is something to control. Various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction. Although details will be described later, various commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 are also transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 only in one direction.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203, counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, CINI1 to CINI2 described later, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. A specific configuration of each of the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The RAM 203 stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and the work area (work area for storing various flags and counters, I / O values, etc. Area). The RAM 203 further has a reserved ball storage area 203a, a reserved ball execution area 203b, a special figure reserved ball counter 203c, and a work area 203d. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 10), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 9) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 16) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  The reserved ball storage area 203a includes a first per-random number counter C1 (see FIG. 5) and a first per-type counter C2 in accordance with the winning timing when a ball wins (enters) the first entrance 64. (See FIG. 5) and a memory for storing each value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 (see FIG. 5). In the reserved ball storage area 203a, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) corresponding to one winning to the first entrance 64 is stored (held) up to four times. The specific configuration of the reserved ball storage area 203a will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Although details will be described later, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored (held) in the reserved ball storage area 203a (that is, the special figure reserved ball number N at the time of winning is less than 4). In this case, a winning information command indicating each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 stops the stop symbol based on the number N of special figure reservation balls and the values of the counters C1 to C3 indicated by the winning information command. Is continuously performed in the third symbol display device 81 (hereinafter referred to as “continuous chance eye effect”). ) Is determined. A specific example of “chance” will be described later with reference to FIGS. 8A and 8B.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment can change the stop symbol of the variable effect that has not yet started the effect to “chance”, and further, the stop symbol during the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, It is configured to be able to change to “chance eyes” during the fluctuating performance. Therefore, compared to the configuration in which only the stop symbol of the variable effect that has not yet started the production is changed to “chance eye”, the amount that the stop symbol in the variable effect can be changed to “chance eye”, that is, once more Opportunities can be displayed.

  In addition, since the stop symbol can be changed to “chance eyes” in the middle of the variation effect, when the winning information command is received, if the variation effect is being performed, a continuous chance effect can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of performing the chance chance continuous, rather than changing only the stop pattern of the fluctuation production that has not yet started the production to “chance eye”, so that the player's expectation is improved. Can do. Further, by making the stop symbol “chance eyes”, it is possible to make the player recognize that the continuous chance eyes are being produced, so that the player's interest can be attracted. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to participate in the game.

  The reserved ball execution area 203b is a memory in which data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) referred to when executing processing such as determination of jackpot or setting of display of the first symbol display device 37 is stored.

  When processing such as jackpot determination or display setting of the first symbol display device 37 is executed, the data corresponding to each winning (stored in each of the counters C1 to C3) stored in the holding ball storage area 203a described above. Of each value) is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203b. Note that the shift in this embodiment means that the data is moved from the area where the data is stored to another area. The specific configuration of the reserved ball execution area 203b will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The special figure holding ball counter 203c is a counter that counts the number of times that the first drawing hole 64 is held, that is, the number N of special figure holding balls. The special figure holding ball counter 203c has a maximum value of “4”, and is initialized to “0” when the RAM is initially set (see S113 in FIG. 9).

  In the above-described special figure holding lamp 85 (see FIG. 2), the same number of lamps as the special figure holding ball number N are turned on. More specifically, when the value of the special figure holding ball counter 203c (the number N of special figure holding balls) changes, the special figure holding after the counter value changes from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. A hold number command indicating the value of the number N of balls is transmitted. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special lamp hold lamp 85 turns on the same number of lamps as the special figure hold ball number N indicated by the hold number command. Let

  The work area 203d is an area for storing data related to the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 (for example, counter values). The counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 are provided in the work area 203d, and the value of each counter is appropriately stored in a counter buffer provided in the work area 203d.

  Here, referring to FIG. 5, the reserved ball storage area 203a, the reserved ball execution area 203b, the counter buffer, and the counters C1 to C4 and CS1 to CS3 provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. , CINI1 to CINI2 etc. will be described. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters, the reserved ball storage area 203a, and the reserved ball execution area 203b.

  The reserved ball storage area 203a, the reserved ball execution area 203b, the counter buffer, the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, CINI1 to CINI2, and the like are used for jackpot determination and display setting of the first symbol display device 37, It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a lottery of the display result of the second symbol display unit 83 and the like.

  For the jackpot lottery or display setting of the first symbol display device 37, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the first hit type symbol counter C2 used for the jackpot symbol selection, and the stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 used for variation pattern selection are used. The second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display unit 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated (returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value).

  Each of these counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 is at an interval of 4 ms, which is an execution interval of the main process (see FIG. 10), or at an interval of 2 ms, which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer provided in the work area 203 d of the RAM 203. When executing the various control programs, when the values of the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 are referred to, the values of the counters stored in the counter buffer are referred to. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the RAM 203 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 203a and a reserved ball execution area 203b. As described above, the reserved ball storage area 203a stores each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 in accordance with the winning timing when the ball wins (enters) the first entrance 64. It is memory.

  The reserved ball storage area 203a is composed of four reserved areas (a reserved first area to a reserved fourth area). The four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the holding ball storage area 203a include a first per-random number counter storage area 203a1, a first per-type counter storage area 203a2, and a stop pattern selection counter. A storage area 203a3 is provided. The values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the storage areas 203a1 to 203a3.

  In the present embodiment, a first per-random number counter storage area 203a1, a first per-type counter storage area 203a2, and a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203a3 are provided in the reserved ball storage area 203a. The three areas 203a1, 203a2, and 203a3 are not necessarily provided in the reserved ball storage area 203a. For example, a new storage area is provided separately from the reserved ball storage area 203a, and a part of the three areas 203a1, 203a2, 203a3 is provided in the reserved ball storage area 203a, and the rest are newly stored. It may be provided in the area.

  As described above, in the reserved ball storage area 203a, data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 is stored up to four times. In that case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the reserved first area.

  On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203b is composed of only one area. The reserved ball execution area 203b is provided with a first per-random number counter storage area 203b1, a first per-type counter storage area 203b2, and a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 11, when the big win lottery is started, the stored balls are stored in the reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area 203a by the forward holding ball storage area forward process (see FIG. 12). Data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) is shifted to each area 203b1 to 203b3 of the reserved ball execution area 203b. Then, the data shifted to the holding ball execution area 203b is referred to in the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 13), and the lottery winning result is determined based on the reference data, and the fluctuation display and stop corresponding to the lottery result are performed. The display is performed on the first symbol display device 37 or the like.

  More specifically, when the big hit lottery is started, the random number value in the first per-random number counter storage area 203a1 in the holding first area is transferred to the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1 in the holding ball execution area 203b. Shifted. Similarly, the random number value in the first hit type counter storage area 203a2 is shifted to the first hit type counter storage area 203b2, and the random number value in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203a3 is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3. The

  When the shift of the data to the reserved ball execution area 203b is completed, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that each area of the reserved ball storage area 203a is obtained by a reserved ball storage area forward feed process (see FIG. 12) described later. Shift processing is performed in which data stored (suspended) in (second to fourth) is packed into an area (first to third) having a smaller area number. In the present embodiment, data is shifted only in the reserved area (second to fourth) in which data is stored (held) in the reserved ball storage area 203a.

  Here, the data shift in the reserved ball storage area 203a will be described. For example, it is assumed that the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 203c is “4” and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the reservation ball storage area 203a. In this state, the data in the reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203b, and when the reserved first area becomes empty, the data in the other areas (second to fourth) are each assigned the area number 1. It is shifted to a small area (first to third). That is, the data in the reserved second area is shifted to the reserved first area, the data in the reserved third area is shifted to the reserved second area, and the data in the reserved fourth area is shifted to the reserved third area. .

  For example, if the value of the special figure holding ball counter 203c is “2”, only the data in the holding second area is shifted to the holding first area, and the data shift is thus completed. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the data shift process is not performed for the reserved areas (second to fourth) in which data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

  In addition, you may comprise so that each data of a reservation area (2nd-4th) may be shifted to the area where an area number is one smaller irrespective of the presence or absence of data, respectively. In that case, since it is not necessary to determine whether data is stored (held) in the holding area (second to fourth), the number of steps of the program can be reduced. Therefore, since the capacity of the program can be reduced, the free capacity of the ROM 202 can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, the number of data (holding number) stored in the holding ball storage area 203a is counted by the special figure holding number counter 203c, and a new winning is made at the first entrance 64. If it occurs, data corresponding to the new winning is stored in the holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) according to the value (special figure holding ball number N) indicated by the special figure holding number counter 203c. doing.

  Therefore, in the reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the new winning is not overwritten on the data stored (held) in the reserved area, so that data is transferred from the shift source area to the shift destination area. After shifting, the data of the shift source area can be left as it is without being cleared. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden as compared with the case of clearing the data of the shift source area after the data shift. Note that the data in the shift source area may be cleared after the data is shifted from the shift source area to the shift destination area.

  Next, each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is configured so that, for example, 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 738, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 738), it returns to 0. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first per-random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 738), and executes timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14). It is updated once every time and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 10).

  The value of the first per-random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the stored ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a. There are two types of random numbers to be jackpots: low probability (normal hit probability is normal) and high probability (high hit probability is higher than normal). Low probability (big hit probability) There are two types of random number values that are jackpots in the normal state), the values are “373,727”, and the random number values that are jackpots at the time of high probability (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than normal) are 13 The type is “59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 367, 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 733”. It should be noted that a table (not shown) storing random number values for determining whether or not a big hit is obtained from the value of the first random number counter C1 (random number value) is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113. Are provided in the ROM 222.

  In the present embodiment, each value of each counter C1 to C3 is transmitted by transmitting a winning information command from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, but each value of each counter C1 to C3 is transmitted. Instead, a lottery result based on each value of each counter C1 to C3 may be transmitted. More specifically, when each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired, the lottery based on each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is completed in the main controller 110, and the lottery result (for example, “probability big hit”, “normal” A winning information command indicating a “hit”, “normally missed”, “missed reach”, “missed super reach”, etc.) is transmitted. With this configuration, since it is not necessary to determine whether or not the jackpot is in the sound lamp control device 113, a table (not shown) storing random numbers for determining whether or not the jackpot is not stored in the ROM 222. It is possible to increase the free space of the ROM 222.

  Further, since it is not necessary to output each value (random number value) of each counter C1 to C3 from the main controller 110, a signal output from the main controller 110 is illegally stolen and each counter C1 to C3 Each value (random value) can be prevented from being analyzed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an analysis of an important random number value such as a random number value for determining whether or not a big hit is made from a signal output from the main controller 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the type of jackpot (whether it is a promiscuous jackpot or a normal jackpot), and in the present embodiment, one is added in order within a range of 0 to 4. Then, after reaching the maximum value (that is, 4), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in this embodiment), and the stored ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a. The value of the random number that becomes “high probability state (probability variation jackpot) after the jackpot end” is “1, 2, 3”, and the value of the random number that becomes “low probability state (normal jackpot) after the jackpot end” is “0,4 And two types of hits are determined. Therefore, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 includes a display mode corresponding to two types of jackpots, “probable big jackpot” and “normal jackpot”, and one type corresponding to a loss. Any one of the three display modes in total with the display mode is selected.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that “big hit” and “high probability state (probability change big hit) after the big hit” based on the data acquired at the timing when the ball has won the first entrance 64 Is “probable jackpot”, and “normal jackpot” is determined when it is determined as “big jackpot” and “low probability state after normal jackpot (normal jackpot)”. In addition, a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether it is a normal big hit or a probable big hit from the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 and the sound lamp control. They are provided in the ROM 222 of the device 113, respectively.

  As described above, if the winning information command indicating the lottery result is transmitted instead of each value of each of the counters C1 to C3, the audio lamp control device 113 does not determine whether it is a normal big hit or a probable big hit. Therefore, it is not necessary to store in the ROM 222 a table (not shown) that stores random numbers for determining whether it is a normal jackpot or a probabilistic jackpot, and the free space of the ROM 222 can be increased.

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the effect pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reaching, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Stop before and after detachment reach” (for example, a range of 0 to 8), and “Leach other than detachment before and after detachment” (for example, a range of 9 to 38) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach design after reach has occurred “No chance to miss (one of misses)” (for example, 39 to 49) when three identical symbols are displayed, but no reach, but “completely missed” (for example, 39 to 49) 4 stop (effect) patterns (modes of dynamic display results) are selected.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 8, in the present embodiment, as the stop symbol of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in addition to “the chance to miss”, “reach chance” “Eye” has a chance eye. As described above, the “disappearance chance” is a stop symbol in which no reach occurs but three identical symbols are displayed and stopped. The “reach chance eyes” is a stop symbol that is displayed when an out-of-bounds reach occurs in a variable effect when a continuous chance eye effect is being performed. It is a stop symbol to stop. In the following description, when both “off chance chance” and “reach chance eye” are indicated, or only one of them is indicated, it is simply described as “chance eye”.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. 203a.

  A table (not shown) referred to for selecting a stop pattern from the value (random value) of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 and in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp controller 113. The stop pattern is selected based on this table and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Note that such a table is provided with a plurality of tables so that the range of values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 that can take one stop pattern is different. This is because the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than normal), a low probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is normal), a special figure pending number counter This is because the selection ratio of each stop pattern is changed according to the value of 203c (number of special figure reservation balls N) or the like.

  For example, in a high-probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than normal), it is easy to generate a jackpot, and the range of random number values corresponding to the stop pattern “completely out” is 14 so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. A table as wide as ˜238 is selected, and “completely out” is easily selected. In this table, the range of random values for “front / rear out of reach” is narrowed to 0-5, the range of random values for “non-front / rear out of reach” is also narrowed to 6-9, The range of random values of “one of the above” is also narrowed to 10 to 13, and “rear out of front / rear reach”, “reach other than out of front / rear out”, and “miss chance” are difficult to select.

  In addition, when each random value is not stored (held) in the reserved ball storage area 203a in a low probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is normal), the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 is secured. For this reason, a table having a narrow random value range of 61 to 238 corresponding to the stop pattern of “completely out” is selected, and it is difficult to select “completely out”. In this table, the range of random values of “rear out of front / rear” is 0 to 8, the range of random values of “reach other than out of front / rear” is as wide as 9 to 50, and the range of random values of “off chance”. Are 51 to 61, and it is easy to select “reach other than front / rear disengagement”. Therefore, in the low probability state (the state where the big hit probability is normal), it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64, and therefore, the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is easily performed continuously. .

  Next, the three variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 will be described. First, the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2 will be described. One variation type counter CS1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. The other variation type counter CS2 Within the range of 0 to 240, 1 is added in order, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 240), it returns to 0. In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as “first variation type counter”, and CS2 is also referred to as “second variation type counter”.

  Rough display modes (variation effect patterns) such as so-called normal reach (20-second effect), super reach (30-second effect), premium reach (60-second effect), and the like are determined by the first variation type counter CS1. . Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. In addition, the second variation type counter CS2 determines the variation time (in other words, the symbol (medium symbol) of the middle symbol row Z2 or the middle symbol row Z2 ′ in this embodiment) after the reach has occurred until it stops. The number of variable symbols) is determined. Then, based on the variation time determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, the display control device 114 determines the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode.

  Therefore, a variety of variation patterns can be easily realized by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2. The values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 10) described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. In the present embodiment, the symbol variation mode is determined by the combination of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2. However, the symbol variation mode is determined only by the first variation type counter CS1, or the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol are determined. It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode in the same way.

  Here, a table (not shown) in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is associated with the type of display mode is provided in the ROM 202, and the type of display mode is determined from the value of the variation type counter CS1. When selecting (variation effect pattern), such a table is referred to. Similarly, a table (not shown) for selecting a change time (number of change symbols) from the value of the change type counter CS2 (random number value) until the last stop symbol stops is also provided in the ROM 202.

  Next, the variation type counter CS3 will be described. For example, the value of the variation type counter CS3 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 162, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 162). In the following description, CS3 is also referred to as a “third variation type counter”. The 3rd symbol display device 81 of this Embodiment performs the decorative production according to the display mode of the 1st symbol display device 37, and can slide the symbol which is changing in addition to the variation of a symbol. A notice effect such as passing a notice character for notifying the occurrence of the reach effect is performed. The effect pattern of the notice effect is selected by the variation type counter CS3.

  Specifically, the time required for the notice effect is added to the fluctuation time (for example, +1 second, +2 seconds, etc.), and conversely, the fluctuation time is subtracted in order to shorten the fluctuation display time (for example, − 1 second) or an effect pattern that does not add or subtract the fluctuation time.

  As in the case of the stop pattern selection counter C3 described above, the variation type counter CS3 also has a plurality of stop patterns selected with respect to the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS3. The table is provided. That is, whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than normal), a low probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is normal), a special figure holding number counter 203c Depending on the value (number of special figure reservation balls N) and the like, tables with different selection ratios of each effect pattern are provided. Such a table (not shown) is provided in the ROM 202 similarly to the variation type counters CS1 and CS2.

  As described above, the variation time of the symbol variation is determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, and the time to be added to or subtracted from the variation time is determined by the variation type counter CS3. Therefore, the final fluctuation time until the final stop symbol stops is determined by the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and the second entrance 67 (through gate) on either the left or right side of the ball is updated. Acquired when it is detected that the image has passed. There are 149 types of random numbers to be selected, and the range is “5 to 153”. Note that a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether or not to win from the value of the second random number counter C4 (random number value) is provided in the ROM 202.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second per-random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14). In addition to being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 10).

  Here, returning to FIG. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display unit 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and the like. A variety of switches 208 and a solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a as an axis, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the like are connected.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up.

  As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 16) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, on the condition that the touch sensor (not shown) detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 sets the sound output in the sound output device (speaker not shown) 226, the setting of the number of lamps to be lit in the special figure holding lamp 85, the lamps in the lighting units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, and the like. It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as setting of turning on and off, changing effect and jackpot effect. These controls are executed based on various commands transmitted from the main controller 110. For example, the control regarding the lighting and extinguishing of the lamp in the special figure hold lamp 85 is executed based on the hold number command transmitted from the main control device 110.

  The sound lamp control device 113 is equipped with an MPU 221 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 221 incorporates various circuits such as a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory. An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the special figure holding lamp 85, the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, and the like.

  The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 has a changeable period memory 222a. The changeable period memory 222a stores a period (hereinafter, referred to as “changeable period”) in which the change symbol of the variation effect started to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 can be changed.

  Here, the changeable period memory 222a of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the contents of the changeable period memory 222a of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. The changeable period memory 222a is a memory in which the changeable period of the changing effect started to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 is stored.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, for example, as a variation effect pattern, for example, a variation effect for detachment (11 seconds), a variation effect for normal reach (20 seconds), a variation effect for super reach (30 seconds), Fluctuation effects (60 seconds) for premium reach are provided. Note that the overall time of the variation effect differs for each variation effect pattern, but the time until the first and second symbol sequences are stopped is common (10 seconds).

  For example, in the variation effect for 11 seconds for detachment, as soon as the effect is started, the three symbol strings (Z1 to Z3 or Z1 ′ to Z3 ′, see FIG. 7) each change at high speed, and 1 The first symbol sequence stops after 9 seconds, the second symbol sequence stops after 10 seconds, and the last symbol sequence stops after 11 seconds. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the changeable period memory 222a stores the changeable period as 8 seconds from the start of the change in which the first symbol sequence is still changing at high speed.

  In addition, among the 11-second variation effects for detachment, the first symbol from 8 seconds to 9 seconds is switched from high-speed variation to medium-speed variation, and then controlled by switching to low-speed variation and stopping. This is a margin period provided for reliably executing (following) the processing. Therefore, depending on the content of the control process (for example, when the control burden is small), the changeable period may be close to 9 seconds. In that case, since the changeable period can be secured for a long time, it is possible to further increase the chances of performing the continuous chance effect.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when an execution variation effect (11 seconds) is started while the continuous chance effect is being performed, “Early chance” is displayed. Specifically, the first symbol row, the second symbol row, and the third symbol row stop in order, and “disappearance chance” is displayed after 11 seconds. Similarly, when the off-stage variation effect (11 seconds) is being executed and the continuous chance eye effect is started when the change-over period is within the changeable period, The “Exit chance” is displayed.

  On the other hand, when a continuous production for a normal reach (20 seconds), a super reach (30 seconds), or a premium reach (60 seconds) is started while a continuous chance eye effect is being performed The display is performed according to the stop symbol pattern of the variation effect. Specifically, if the stop pattern pattern of the variation effect is out of reach (“rear out of front / rear reach” or “reach other than out of front / rear out”), the “reach chance” is displayed in the change effect.

  For example, first, the first symbol sequence, the second symbol sequence stop in turn, reach occurs 10 seconds later, and then reach effect is performed at a time corresponding to each variation effect pattern, Finally, the third symbol row stops and “reach chance” is displayed. That is, the “reach chance” is displayed after the reach effect of each variation effect. In addition, if the stop pattern pattern of the variation effect is a hit (“probable big hit” or “ordinary big hit”), the “off chance chance (or reach chance eye)” is displayed in the first 11 seconds of the fluctuation effect. Then, the development effect is performed, and the stop symbol corresponding to “probable big jackpot” or “normal jackpot” is displayed.

  In addition, when each variation effect (for normal reach, for super reach, for premium reach) is being executed and within the changeable period, the variation chance effect is similarly started. Display is performed in accordance with the stop symbol pattern. Specifically, if the stop pattern pattern of the variation effect is out of reach (“rear out of front / rear reach” or “reach other than out of front / rear out”), the “reach chance” is displayed in the change effect. That is, the “reach chance” is displayed after the reach effect of each variation effect being executed. In addition, if the stop pattern pattern of the variation effect is a hit (“probable big hit” or “ordinary big hit”), the “off chance chance (or reach chance eye)” is displayed in the first 11 seconds of the fluctuation effect. Then, the development effect is performed, and the stop symbol corresponding to “probable big jackpot” or “normal jackpot” is displayed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the changeable periods are all set to the same time (8 seconds) regardless of the variation effect pattern, but even if the changeable period is changed for each variation effect pattern. good. For example, for each variation effect pattern, the changeable period is changed for each variation effect pattern by changing the time from the start of variation until the first symbol sequence switches from high speed variation to medium speed variation. You may let them.

  Here, returning to FIG. The RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores the stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 221 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 221 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / O values. Working area (working area). Further, the RAM 223 includes various memories, flags, counters, and the like.

  Here, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6B is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  The RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 includes a special figure holding ball counter 223a, a continuous chance eye counter 223b, a high probability state flag 223c, a chance eye display skip flag 223d, a stop symbol changeable flag 223e, and a change start flag. 223f, variable time memory 223g, stop symbol pattern memory 223h, variable time timer 223i, winning information memory 223j, acquisition waiting command memory 223k, and command storage area 223l.

  The special figure holding ball counter 223a is a counter that counts the number of times the winning is held for the first entrance 64 (the number N of special figure holding balls). The special figure holding ball counter 223a has a maximum value of “4”, and is initialized to “0” when an initial value of the RAM is set (see S1011 in FIG. 19). The value of the special figure holding ball counter 223a (the number N of special figure holding balls) is determined when a winning information command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1206 in FIG. 21) or the third symbol display device. 81 is updated when the start of the variable display is instructed (see S1420 in FIG. 23).

  The continuous chance counter 223b is a counter that indicates the number of times that a variable effect with a stop symbol as a chance is performed continuously when the third symbol display device 81 executes a continuous chance effect. The continuous chance eye counter 223b is set when a continuous chance eye effect is started, and is decremented by 1 each time a variable effect with a stop symbol as an opportunity is executed. In other words, until the value of the continuous chance eye counter 223b becomes 0, the variation effect using the stop symbol as the chance eye is continuously performed.

  When analyzing the lottery result from the received winning information command, the high probability state flag 223c analyzes the winning information command as if the jackpot probability is a high probability state, or the jackpot probability is a low probability state (normal state) It is a flag indicating whether to analyze as being. When the high probability state flag 223c is on, the winning information command is analyzed assuming that the jackpot probability is high, and when the high probability state flag 223c is off, the winning information is determined that the jackpot probability is low. The command is parsed.

  In a general pachinko machine, when a jackpot lottery is performed, and the lottery result is “probable big jackpot”, the jackpot probability is high until the next big jackpot (probable big jackpot or normal jackpot). Transition to a probability state (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than usual). On the other hand, when the lottery result is “ordinary jackpot” or “off”, the jackpot probability shifts to a normal state.

  That is, the jackpot probability of the next jackpot lottery is determined by the latest jackpot lottery result. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment analyzes the winning information commands in the order received, and further updates the state of the high probability state flag 223c in accordance with the analyzed lottery result.

  Thereby, the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) indicated by the received winning information command is still held in the holding ball storage area 203a in the main control device 110, and the lottery result has not yet been determined. Even if it is (each value of each counter C1-C3), the data can be analyzed based on the state of the high probability state flag 223c. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can accurately analyze the lottery result before the main control device 110.

  The chance eye display skip flag 223d is a flag indicating whether or not to skip the variation effect having the stop symbol as the chance symbol when the third symbol display device 81 executes the continuous chance eye effect. Note that, instead of skipping the variation effect itself, the stop symbol is simply changed to a stop symbol other than the chance symbol.

  When the chance eye display skip flag 223d is on, the stop effect of the changing effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 is set to a stop symbol other than the chance eye, and the flag is set to off. When the chance eye display skip flag 223d is off, the stop effect of the changing effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 is set according to the value of the continuous chance eye counter 223b.

  The chance eye display skip flag 223d is set to ON when the last variation effect in the continuous chance effect is executed. Although details will be described later, this is to prevent the continuous chance eye effect from being performed after the continuous chance eye effect is finished. In addition, when the variation effect with the stop symbol as an opportunity can be performed four times continuously, it is also set to ON when the maximum number of continuous effects is limited to three times (see S1319 in FIG. 22).

  The stop symbol changeable flag 223e is a flag indicating whether or not the stop symbol of the variation effect started to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 can be changed. While the stop symbol changeable flag 223e is on, the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 can be changed (that is, within the period during which the stop symbol can be changed). On the other hand, when the stop symbol changeable flag 223e is off, it is a case where the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed cannot be changed. Specifically, the period during which the stop symbol can be changed is exceeded or the variation effect is executed. For example, it is not done.

  The variation start flag 223f is a flag that is turned on when the main control device 110 is instructed to start the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, and is turned off when the variation effect is started. Specifically, the variation start flag 223f is set to ON when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1210 in FIG. 21), and the third symbol display device 81 produces a variation effect. When the variable display process for starting (see S1110 in FIG. 20) is started, it is set to off (see S1402 in FIG. 23).

  The variation time memory 223g is a memory in which the variation time of the variation effect to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 is stored. When the variation pattern command and the effect time addition command transmitted from the main controller 110 are received, the variation time is stored in the variation time memory 223g (see S1211 in FIG. 21).

  The variation pattern command is a command indicating a variation effect pattern to be executed (normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc.), and the effect time addition command is a notification effect pattern of the variation effect to be executed. It is a command. As described above, in this embodiment, the variation time is determined for each variation effect pattern, and the extension time and the reduction time are determined for each notification effect pattern. Therefore, the variation time memory 223g stores the total time of the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern command and the extension time (shortening time) corresponding to the effect time addition command.

  The stop symbol pattern memory 223h is a memory in which a stop symbol pattern of a variation effect to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 is stored. More specifically, in the stop symbol pattern memory 223h, “probability big hit”, “normal big hit”, “front / rear miss reach”, “reach other than front / rear miss”, “off chance chance (one of miss)”, “ One of the six stop (production) patterns of “completely off” is stored (see S1213 in FIG. 21).

  The variation time timer 223i is a memory in which an elapsed time since the execution of the variation effect is started in the third symbol display device 81 is stored. The winning information memory 223j is a memory for storing each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-kind counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 indicated by the received winning information command (see S1205 in FIG. 21). .

  The acquisition standby command memory 223k is a memory for storing the winning information commands received during the continuous chance effect production in the order of reception (see S1203 in FIG. 21). The acquisition standby command memory 223k is configured by a ring buffer, and is configured to read and write data by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. Therefore, when a winning information command is extracted (read), The process according to the winning information command is executed in the order received.

  If a winning information command is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k, the received winning information command is acquired when the winning information command is received, regardless of whether or not the consecutive chance eyes are being produced. It is stored in the standby command memory 223k (see S1202 in FIG. 21). This is to process the winning information command in the order received. Also, the winning information command processed by the MPU 221 is deleted from the acquisition standby command memory 223k.

  The command storage area 223l is an area for temporarily storing various commands transmitted from the main controller 110, including winning information commands. The command transmitted from main controller 110 is first stored in this command storage area 223l (see FIG. 25). The MPU 221 acquires commands one by one from the command storage area 223l and executes processing according to the acquired commands. Like the acquisition standby command memory 223k, this command storage area 223l is configured by a ring buffer and configured to read and write data by the FIFO method, so that processing corresponding to various commands is performed in the order of received commands. Executed.

  Note that the command processed by the MPU 221 is deleted from the command storage area 223l. Further, the command storage area 223l and the acquisition standby command memory 223k may be configured by a buffer other than the ring buffer as long as data can be read and written in the FIFO format.

  The display control device 114 controls a variation effect (variation display) and a jackpot effect of the third symbol on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and bus lines 239 and 240. have. The input side of the input port 237 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 237 is connected to the MPU 231, ROM 232, work RAM 233, and image controller 236. A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236, and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 238. Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probabilities and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is available. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common part to reduce the cost.

  The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on a display variation pattern command, a display stop symbol command, etc. output from the sound lamp control device 113. The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various programs, and includes a change start flag 233a and a change time counter 233b.

  The variation start flag 233a is a flag that is turned on when the voice lamp control device 113 instructs the start of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, the variation start flag 233a is set to ON when a variation pattern command for display instructing a variation effect or a jackpot effect set by the sound lamp control device 113 is received from the sound lamp control device 113. (Refer to S1802 in FIG. 32), when the variation effect (variation display) is started in the third symbol display device 81, it is set to off (see S1703 in FIG. 31). The variation time counter 233b is a counter that stores an elapsed time since the variation effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 235 is a memory in which data for effects such as symbols (background symbols, third symbols, and decorative symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are stored in a compressed format. The character ROM 235 stores, for example, effect data for normal reach, effect data for super reach, effect data for premium reach, a character design of the third design, a background design, a notice character design, and the like. ing.

  The character ROM 235 stores the effect data as described above in a compressed state in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In the present embodiment, the production data is composed of approximately 1024 Mbytes, and the approximately 1024 Mbytes of data is compressed to approximately 768 Mbytes and stored in the character ROM 235. Only the necessary presentation data compressed and stored in the character ROM 235 is read and decompressed, and then written in a predetermined area of the video RAM 234.

  The video RAM 234 is a memory for storing effect data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a decompressed state (a state where it can be used immediately). The video RAM 234 has a change effect storage area 234a and a stop effect storage area 234b.

  The storage area for variation effect 234a is a memory for storing variation effect data for performing a variation effect such as high-speed variation in the third symbol display device 81, and the storage region for stop effect 234b is a memory for the third symbol display device. 81 is a memory for storing stop effect data for performing a stop effect to display a stop symbol at 81;

  In the present embodiment, the variation effect for one time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is performed based on the variation effect data and the stop effect data. Although details will be described later, when the variation effect is started, first, an image corresponding to the variation effect data (variation effect) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the time. Then, an image corresponding to the stop effect data (stop effect) is displayed according to time (see S1708 and S1709 in FIG. 31).

  When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 reads the variation effect data corresponding to the received command from the character ROM 235, and this variation effect storage area 234a. (See S1803 in FIG. 32). On the other hand, when a display stop symbol command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received, stop effect data corresponding to the received command is read from the character ROM 235 and stored in the stop effect storage area 234b ( (See S1805 in FIG. 32).

  Further, when the display control device 114 receives the stop symbol change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 reads out stop effect data having the stop symbol as “chance eye” from the character ROM 235, and for this stop effect. The storage area 234b is overwritten (rewritten) (see S1807 in FIG. 32). Thereby, the stop symbol set before the start of the variation effect can be changed after the variation effect is started in the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 (that is, in the middle of the variation effect).

  The reason why the effect data is read from the character ROM 235 and stored in the change effect storage area 234a and the stop effect storage area 234b is that the processing speed of the RAM is generally higher than that of the ROM. For example, when the presentation data is displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 while being read from the character ROM 235, when the amount of data to be read is large, the reading has time, and a smooth display cannot be achieved or the image is clear. This is because the display may not be possible. This is also because the processing of the display data (for example, changing the size of the decorative design or changing the color of the background design) is easier when stored in the RAM.

  The image controller 236 adjusts the timings of the MPU 231, the video RAM 234, and the output port 238 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing to read the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, and drives various switches 208, solenoids such as a solenoid 209, motors and the like, a voltage of 12 volts, and 5 for logic. A volt voltage, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and among these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage, the voltages required by the control devices 110 to 114 are supplied to each.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 16).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data in the RAM 203 and issues a payout initialization command for causing the payout controller 111 to clear the backup data. It transmits to the payout control device 111.

  Next, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 7A is a schematic diagram showing an actual screen and effective line setting when the display screen is horizontally scrolled. FIG. 7B is a schematic diagram showing an actual screen and effective line setting when the display screen is scrolled vertically.

  The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols consisting of 10 types of character symbols corresponding to the numbers from “0” to “9”, and one type of sub symbol formed smaller than this main symbol (in this embodiment). , Shell picture). These main symbols and sub symbols constitute a symbol row by arranging main symbols in ascending or descending order of numbers and arranging sub symbols between the main symbols.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed, and a big hit occurs after the variable display is finished. It is configured as follows. When shifting to a “high probability state (probability variation jackpot) after the jackpot end”, a variable display in which main symbols corresponding to odd numbers (corresponding to “high probability symbols”) are arranged is performed. On the other hand, when shifting to the “low probability state after normal jackpot (normal jackpot)”, a variable display is performed in which main symbols corresponding to even numbers (corresponding to “low probability symbols”) are aligned.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the direction of the variable display (vertical scroll or horizontal scroll) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is the first per random number counter storage area of the reserved ball execution area 203b. It is configured to change according to the value of 203b1.

  Specifically, when the value of the first random number counter storage area 203b1 in the reserved ball execution area 203b is an even number, as shown in FIG. 7A, the main symbol and the sub-symbol are displayed for each symbol row. The display is variably displayed so as to scroll (horizontal scroll) from right to left (arrow X direction) with periodicity. As shown in FIG. 7A, at the time of such horizontal scrolling, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper, middle, and lower are displayed for each symbol row. In this case, the upper symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbol appear in ascending order. ing.

  On the other hand, when the value of the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1 in the reserved ball execution area 203b is an odd number, as shown in FIG. 7B, the main symbol and the sub-symbol are periodic for each symbol row. Is displayed so as to scroll (vertically scroll) from top to bottom (arrow Y direction). As shown in FIG. 7B, at the time of such vertical scrolling, three symbol rows Z1 ', Z2', and Z3 'are displayed for each symbol row. In this case, in the left symbol row Z1 ′, the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 ′ and the right symbol row Z1 ′, the numbers of the main symbol appear in ascending order. Is arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 7A and FIG. 7B, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has a left, middle, and right for each symbol row (Z1 to Z3 or Z1 ′ to Z3 ′), respectively. The third symbol is displayed on the right or the top, middle, and bottom three levels. Accordingly, the third symbol display device 81 displays a total of nine third symbols of 3 rows × 3 columns.

  Here, five valid lines are set on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in both cases of vertical scrolling and horizontal scrolling. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7A, at the time of horizontal scrolling, five lines of a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right rising line L4, and a left rising line L5 are set as effective lines. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 7B, at the time of vertical scrolling, five lines of an upper line L1 ′, a middle line L2 ′, a lower line L3 ′, a right rising line L4 ′, and a left rising line L5 ′ are effective lines. Is set.

  In each game, when the combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) is aligned on one of the active lines when the variable display scrolling vertically or horizontally is stopped, the jackpot is set as the jackpot A video is displayed. In the case of horizontal scrolling (FIG. 7A), the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1, the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2, and in the case of vertical scrolling (FIG. 7B). The variable display stops in the order of left symbol row Z1 ′ → right symbol row Z3 ′ → middle symbol row Z2 ′.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 8A and 8B, the “chance eyes (missing chance eyes, reach chance eyes)” displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIGS. 8A and 8B show an example of a stop symbol when the direction of change of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is horizontally scrolled. FIG. 8A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the “miss chance” displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 8B shows the “reach” displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a "chance eye".

  First, the “off chance chance” will be described. As described above, the “miss chance” is a stop pattern in which three identical symbols are displayed but stopped without reaching. In FIG. 8A, the symbol “turtle” is displayed on the left line L1 of the upper symbol row Z1, the right line L3 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the middle line L2 of the lower symbol row Z3. Reach has not occurred in any of the five effective lines L1 to L5.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, a reach is not generated, and a stop symbol on which three identical symbols (here, “turtle”) are displayed is regarded as a “miss chance”. In the example shown in FIG. 8A, the same symbol displayed in each of the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 is “turtle”. A pattern (for example, “shark” or “octopus”) may be used.

  Next, the “reach chance” will be described. As described above, the “reach chance” is a stop symbol that stops after three reachable symbols are displayed after a reach has occurred. In FIG. 8B, the symbol “turtle” is displayed on the left line L1 of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle line L2 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the left line L1 of the lower symbol row Z3. Therefore, among the five effective lines L1 to L5, reach occurs in the effective line L1, but it is not a hit.

  In this embodiment, the reach is generated, but it is not a hit, and the stop symbol in which three identical symbols (here, “turtle”) are displayed is the “reach chance”. It is said. Similar to the example shown in FIG. 8A, the same symbol may be another symbol (for example, “shark” or “octopus”) as long as the symbol is the same.

  Further, the above-mentioned “disappearance chance eyes” shown in FIG. 8A and “reach chance eyes” shown in FIG. 8B are examples, and the stop positions of the same symbol are not limited thereto. For example, if the same symbol is displayed on the right line L3 of the upper symbol row Z1, the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the middle line L2 of the lower symbol row Z3, it is a “miss chance”. Further, when the same symbol is displayed on the left line L1 of the upper symbol row Z1, the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the right line L3 of the lower symbol row Z3, it is “reach chance”.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 9 to 16. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process (see FIG. 9) that is started when the power is turned on, a main process (see FIG. 10) that is executed after the startup process, and a regular (this embodiment) In the form, there are a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) activated at a cycle of 2 ms) and an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 16) activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. First, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described, and then startup processing and main processing will be described.

  First, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process of main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a process that is repeatedly executed by the MPU 201 at a cycle of 2 ms, for example. In the timer interrupt process, first, various switch reading processes are executed (S501). Here, for example, the state of various switches 208 connected to the main control device 110 is read and provided in various winning ports (general winning port 63, specific winning port 65a, first winning port 64, etc.). When a winning is detected in the switch, a winning ball command for causing the payout control device 111 to pay out the balls having the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening is set (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM 203.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S502). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the first initial value random number counter buffer provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 The updated value is stored in a second initial value random number counter buffer provided in the work area 203 d of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are updated (S503). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and those counter values are the maximum values (this embodiment In the embodiment, when it reaches 738, 4, 238, 250), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in buffers corresponding to the counters C1 to C4 provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203.

  After that, the start winning process (see FIG. 15) accompanying the winning at the first entrance 64 is executed (S504), the firing control process is executed (S505), and the timer interruption process is ended. The firing control process is performed on the condition that a stop switch (not shown) for stopping the firing is not operated by detecting that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with a touch sensor (not shown). This is a process for determining on / off of the firing of the sphere. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the start winning process (S504) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S504). The start winning process (S504) is a process for storing (holding) the data corresponding to the winning in the holding ball storage area 203a when the winning to the first winning slot 64 is detected. This is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14).

  In this start winning process (S504), first, the state (on or off) of the first entrance switch 208a is read to determine whether or not the ball has won (entered) the first entrance 64 ( S651). In the processing of S651, if it is determined that the first entrance switch 208a is off and there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S651: No), this is performed without performing anything. The start winning process (S504) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14).

  On the other hand, when the state of the first entrance switch 208a is on and it is determined that the ball has won (entered) the first entrance 64 (S651: Yes), the special figure holding ball counter It is determined whether or not the value 203c (number of special figure holding balls N) is less than a predetermined upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S652).

  In the process of S652, when the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 203c (number of special figure reservation balls N) is 4, that is, when the upper limit value has already been reached (S652: No), S653 to S657. Each process is skipped, the start winning process (S504) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14). On the other hand, if the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 203c (number N of special figure reservation balls) is less than 4 in the processing of S652 (S652: Yes), 1 is added to the special figure reservation ball counter 203c (S653).

  Next, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 updated by the processing of S503 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14) are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. Are stored in each of the storage areas 203a1 to 203a3 in the area corresponding to the number N of special figure reservation balls (S654).

  For example, when the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 203c (the number N of special figure reservation balls) updated by the processing of S653 is “1”, each storage area 203a1 to 203a3 of the hold first area has each counter Each value of C1 to C3 is stored. That is, if the special figure holding ball number N is “X”, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the storage areas 203a1 to 203a3 of the holding X area.

  Next, a winning information command indicating each stored value of each of the counters C <b> 1 to C <b> 3 is output to the sound lamp control device 113. Here, the winning information command is immediately output to the sound lamp control device 113 without waiting for the external output processing (see S201 in FIG. 10) of the main processing (S655). Since the main process is executed every 4 ms, the command can be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 at a maximum of about 4 ms if the winning information command is transmitted immediately.

  Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility of changing the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81, compared to the case where the winning information command is output at the execution timing of the next main process. In addition, since the voice lamp control device 113 can receive the winning information command and other commands (for example, the hold number command) at different timings, the processing corresponding to each command can be executed at different timings. , The control burden can be distributed. In addition, since the main control device 110 can separately transmit the ball entry information command and other commands to the sound lamp control means 113, it is possible to distribute the control burden compared to the case of transmitting at the same timing. it can.

  In this embodiment, the winning information command is output immediately. However, here, only the setting of the winning information command is performed and output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process at the execution timing of the next main process. You may comprise so that it may do.

  Then, a hold number command is set (S656). Here, a hold number command indicating the value of the special figure hold number counter 203c (special figure hold ball number N) is set. The hold number command set here is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S201 at the execution timing of the next main process (see FIG. 10). When the output hold number command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the same number of lamps as the special figure hold ball number N indicated by the hold number command are turned on in the special figure hold lamp 85.

  Next, the LED 37a in the first symbol display device 37 is turned on according to the value of the special figure holding ball counter 203c (number of special figure holding balls N), and the new holding number is indicated by the lighting state (S657). When the process of S657 is completed, the start winning process (S504) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14).

  According to the start winning process (S504) in FIG. 15 described above, when a winning to the first winning slot 64 is detected by the first winning slot switch 208a, data corresponding to the winning (each counter C1) (Each value of .about.C3) can be stored in the area with the smallest area number among the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the holding ball storage area 203a. Therefore, in the reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the older winnings can be stored in the area with the smaller area number. Therefore, the data is given with the temporal winning order (winning order). Can be remembered.

  In addition, a winning information command indicating data corresponding to winning in the first entrance 64 (each value of each counter C1 to C3) is not waited for external output processing (see S201 in FIG. 10) of the main processing. Immediately, it can be output to the sound lamp control device 113. By outputting (transmitting) the winning information command immediately, the command can be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 at a maximum of about 4 ms. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 can be changed.

  Next, an NMI interruption process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 in the payout / release control device 111 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing of the main controller 110 and the payout launch controller 111. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.

  First, an NMI interrupt process executed in main controller 110 will be described. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  Next, an NMI interrupt process executed in the payout / release control device 111 will be described. By such NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout and emission control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing start-up processing of the main controller 110. The start-up process is a process for performing various initial settings of the main controller 110, and is a process that is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on or the MPU 201 is reset.

  In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S101). Specifically, wait processing is performed in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the sub control device (the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, etc.) to become operable. (1 second in this embodiment) is executed (S102). Next, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S104). If it is turned on (S104: Yes), the process proceeds to S111. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S105), and if not stored (S105: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not been completed normally, the process proceeds to S111 also in this case.

  If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S106). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination is performed. If the value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process moves to S111 even in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in S213 of the main process (see FIG. 10). Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S111, a payout initialization command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 in order to initialize the payout control device 111 (S111). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. On the other hand, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S112, S113) of RAM 203 after transmission of the payout initialization command.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S112, S113) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S112, S113) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S112, S113), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S112), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S113). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S110.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the payout control device 111 to the gaming state when the drive power supply is shut off is transmitted to the payout control device 111 (S109), and the process proceeds to S110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213. In the process of S110, the interrupt is permitted and the process proceeds to a main process (see FIG. 10) of the main controller 110 described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing main processing of the main controller 110. The main process is a process for executing the main control of the pachinko machine 10, and is executed after the start-up process (see FIG. 9) of the main controller 110 described above, and thereafter repeatedly executed at a cycle of 4 ms. It is processing. As an outline, each process of S201 to S206 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

  In this main process, first, output data such as a command updated in the previous process is transmitted to a sub-control device (payout control device 111, voice lamp control device 113, etc.) (S201). For example, when a prize ball command is set by the process of S501 of the timer interruption process (see FIG. 14), the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111. Further, for example, the number-of-holds command set by the start winning process (see FIG. 15) described above or the change of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 set by the change starting process (see FIG. 13) described later. Various commands such as a fluctuation pattern command, a stop symbol command, a stop command, and an effect time addition command (necessary for display) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, respectively. Further, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  The transmission of output data such as commands is performed in the order in which the output data such as commands are set. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives various commands output from the main control device 110 (necessary for displaying the variation of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81), according to the received command, Display control of a display variation pattern command for instructing a variation effect and a jackpot effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a display stop symbol command for indicating a stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 To device 114.

  Next, each value of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 is updated (S202). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when these counter values reach the maximum values (198, 240, and 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS 1, CS 2, and CS 3 are stored in buffers corresponding to the counters CS 1 to CS 3 provided in the work area 203 d of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counters CS1, CS2 and CS3 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S203), and the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 is performed. A variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the three symbol display device 81 is executed (S204). Details of the variation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the end of the variation process (S204), when the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit state, a large opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed ( S205). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds).

  Next, a display control process for the second symbol (for example, the symbol “◯” or “x”) in the second symbol display unit 83 is executed (S206). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (through gate), the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the passing timing, and the second symbol display unit 83 In FIG. 2, the second symbol variation display is performed. Then, the winning determination in the second symbol is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is released for a predetermined time, and the ball Becomes easy to enter the first entrance 64.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S207: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S208). If the predetermined time has already passed (S208: Yes), the process proceeds to S201, and the above-described processes of S201 to S208 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S208: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 is repeatedly executed (S209, S210).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S209). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738, 250 in this embodiment), it is set to 0. clear. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in buffers corresponding to the counters CINI1 and CINI2 provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Next, the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S210). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when these counter values reach the maximum values (198, 240, and 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are stored in buffers corresponding to the counters CS1 to CS3 provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Since the execution time of each process of S201-S206 mentioned above changes according to the state of a game, the remaining time until it reaches the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and changes. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second per-random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S207, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207: Yes), the power failure is caused by the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 16 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S211 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S211), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to the sub-control devices (dispensing control device 111, voice lamp control device 113, etc.) (S212). ). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S213), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S214), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S207 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S201 to S206 is completed, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S209 and S210 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can start from the process of S201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S201 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shut-off, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the initial value of the startup process (see FIG. 9) can be saved without saving the stack pointer value. In the process (S101), the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), so that the process can start from the process of S201. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the fluctuation process (S204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation process (S204) of the main controller 110. The variation process (S204) is a process for starting the variation display corresponding to the data when the data corresponding to the winning is stored (suspended) in the reserved ball storage area 203a. 10).

  In this variation process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made (S301). As for the jackpot, during the jackpot game displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 and the 1st symbol display device 37 in the case of the jackpot (that is, “probability jackpot”, “normal jackpot” two), and jackpot Includes during the predetermined time after the game ends. If the result of the determination is that it is a big hit (S301: Yes), this fluctuation process (S204) is terminated without performing anything, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 10) of the main controller 110.

  If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S302: No), the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 203c (number of special figure reservation balls N) is acquired (S303).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure holding ball number N is larger than 0 (S304). If the special figure holding ball number N is 0 (S304: No) as a result of checking by the process of S304, S305 to S305. The process of S306 is skipped, the fluctuation process (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 10) of the main controller 110. On the other hand, if the special figure reservation ball number N is 1 or more (S304: Yes), the reservation ball storage area forward process for shifting the data used for the jackpot determination from the reservation ball storage area 203a to the reservation ball execution area 203b is performed. This is executed (S305), and a fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S306). Then, the fluctuation process (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 10) of the main controller 110. The reserved ball storage area progressive process will be described later with reference to FIG. 12, and the change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, since this fluctuation process (S204) is a subroutine executed in the main process, it is executed every 4 ms. However, if it is a big hit (S301: Yes), or if it is fluctuating (S302: Yes). Since the processes of S305 to S306 are skipped, the variable display is not started each time the variable process is executed, and the data corresponding to the pending winning is not consumed.

  In the process of S302, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (S307). The display time during the change of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counters CS1 and CS2 and the addition time selected by the change type counter CS3. If it has not elapsed (S307: No), this variation process (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 10) of the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed in the processing of S307 (S307: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S308). In the setting of the stop symbol, whether or not a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and in the case of a big hit, the “high probability state ( Whether the symbol becomes “probable jackpot” or the symbol that becomes “low probability state after normal jackpot (normal jackpot)” is determined.

  In the present embodiment, the red LED is turned on when “high probability state (probability big hit) after jackpot end”, and green LED when “low probability state (normal jackpot) after jackpot end”. Is turned on, and a blue LED is turned on when it is off. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  Further, in the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, for example, if the currently lit LED is red from the start of variation until the variation time elapses, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stopped symbol is set in the process of S308, the variation stop of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped to synchronize with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. A command is set (S309). When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this stop command, it transmits a display stop command to the display control device 114 and instructs the display control device 114 to stop the variable display. The third symbol display device 81 stops the variation when the variation time elapses, and receives the stop command to end one variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. Then, when the process of S309 is completed, the fluctuation process (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 10) of the main controller 110.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the reserved ball storage area progressive process (S305) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the reserved ball storage area forward process (S305) of main controller 110. The reserved ball storage area forward process (S305) is a process for shifting the data used for determining the jackpot from the reserved ball storage area 203a to the reserved ball execution area 203b, and is executed in the variation process (see FIG. 11). Process. This process is a process that is executed when the special figure reservation ball number N is 1 or more.

  In the reserved ball storage area forward process (S305), first, each data stored in the reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203b (S351). In the process of S351, specifically, the data stored in the first per-random number counter storage area 203a1 of the reserved first area is shifted to the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1 of the reserved ball execution area 203b. Similarly, the data stored in the first per category counter storage area 203a2 is transferred to the first per category counter storage area 203b2, and the data stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203a3 is converted into the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3. Shift to.

  Next, each data stored in the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area is shifted to the area (first to third area) having the smaller area number (S352). In the present embodiment, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second to fourth) in which data is stored (held). Therefore, since the data shift process is not performed for the reserved areas (second to fourth) in which data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts can be reduced and the control burden is reduced. be able to.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that each data of a holding | maintenance area (2nd-4th) may be each shifted to the area where an area number is 1 small irrespective of the presence or absence of data. In that case, since it is not necessary to determine whether data is stored (held) in the holding area (second to fourth), the number of steps of the program can be reduced. Therefore, since the capacity of the program can be reduced, the free capacity of the ROM 202 can be increased.

  Next, the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 203c (special figure reservation ball number N) is decremented by 1 (S353), and the value of the special figure reservation ball number counter 203c after the subtraction (special figure reservation ball number N) is shown. A hold number command is set (S354). The hold number command set here is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S201 at the execution timing of the next main process (see FIG. 10). When the output hold number command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the same number of lamps as the special figure hold ball number N indicated by the hold number command are turned on in the special figure hold lamp 85.

  Next, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on in accordance with the value of the special figure holding ball counter 203c (the number N of special figure holding balls), and the new holding number is displayed in the lighting state (S355). When the process of S355 is completed, the reserved ball storage area forward feed process (S305) is terminated and the process returns to the fluctuation process (see FIG. 11).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the variation start process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process (S306) of main controller 110. The variation start process (S306) determines whether the game is a big hit or miss based on the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) stored in the reserved ball execution area 203b, and according to the determination result. It is a process for starting the fluctuation display, and is a process executed in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 11).

  In this variation start process (S306), first, each counter value stored in the reserved ball execution area 203b is acquired (S401). That is, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the first random number counter storage area 203b1 of the reserved ball execution area 203b and the first per-type counter C2 stored in the first per-type counter storage area 203b2. The value and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 are acquired.

  And it is discriminate | determined based on the value of the 1st hit random number counter C1 acquired by the process of S401 (S402). Whether it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode (low probability state or high probability state) at that time. As described above, at the time of normal low probability (when the jackpot probability is normal), “373,727” is the winning value among the numerical values 0 to 738 of the first random number counter C1, and at the time of high probability (jackpot probability) Is a higher value than usual), “59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 367, 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 733” is the winning value.

  Further, when it is determined that the jackpot is, which jackpot of the two types of jackpot (“probable jackpot”, “ordinary jackpot”) based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained by the processing of S401 Whether there is a hit type is determined. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 (“0 to 4”) is “0, 4” in the case of jackpot, “low probability state (usually jackpot) after the jackpot ends” becomes “1 , 2, 3 ”,“ high probability state (probability jackpot) after jackpot ”is set.

  If it is determined in the process of S402 that the game is a big hit (S402: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired by the process of S401 is confirmed, and the display mode for the big win is set (S403). That is, in the process of S403, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2, the process shifts to “a high probability state (probability big hit) after the jackpot end” or “low probability state (normal jackpot) after the jackpot end”. Set When the transition state after the big hit is set, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set. In the present embodiment, the red LED is turned on when “high probability state (probability big hit) after jackpot end”, and green LED when “low probability state (normal jackpot) after jackpot end”. Is turned on, and a blue LED is turned on when it is off.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 set a jackpot stop symbol that is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the transition state after the jackpot end. That is, the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set by setting the transition state after the big hit is ended by the process of S403.

  Next, based on the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S404). That is, it determines the fluctuation time of rough symbol fluctuations such as normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc. based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1, and finally stops after the occurrence of reach based on the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2. The variation time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol (medium symbol) of the middle symbol row Z2 or the middle symbol row Z2 ′) stops is determined. By determining the variation pattern by the processing of S404, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol is determined. .

  The relationship between the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 and the variation time is preset by a table or the like. The variation time can be set using only the value of the first variation type counter CS1 without using the value of the second variation type counter CS2, and can be set only by the value of the first variation type counter CS1. Whether or not to set both values of both variation type counters CS1 and CS2 may be determined as appropriate according to the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the game conditions each time.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S402 that it is not a big hit (S402: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S405). In the process of S405, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the stop pattern selection counter stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 of the reserved ball execution area 203b is set. Based on the value of C3, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is “rear out of front / rear out”, “reach other than out of front / rear out”, or “off chance (one of out)”. Or “completely off”. In the present embodiment, as described above, the high probability state (the state where the jackpot probability is higher than normal), the low probability state (the state where the jackpot probability is normal), whether the special figure pending number counter 203c The table is set so that the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 differs according to the value (number of special figure holding balls N) and the like.

  Next, based on the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203, a variation pattern at the time of detachment is determined (S406). That is, as in S404 described above, based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1, a rough change time of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc. is determined, and the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is set. Based on this, the variation time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the final stop symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol (medium symbol) in the middle symbol row Z2 or the middle symbol row Z2 ′) stops after the occurrence of reach is determined. By determining the variation pattern by the process of S406, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. .

  When the processing of S404 or the processing of S406 ends, next, the effect time to be added to or subtracted from the variation time determined by the first and second type counters CS1 and CS2 is determined (S407). At this time, the addition / subtraction of the effect time is determined based on the value of the third type counter CS3 stored in the counter buffer of the work area 203d of the RAM 203, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, The variation time of the third symbol display device 81 is set. In the present embodiment, the determination of the addition / subtraction of the production time is performed according to the value of the third variation type counter CS3 when the variation display time is not changed, when the variation display time is added for one second, and when the variation display time is increased. 4 types of addition values are determined, i.e., when 2 seconds is added, and when the variable display time is subtracted 1 second.

  In addition, when the variable display time is added or subtracted, a notice effect that increases the expected value of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a slip effect that causes the change time of the variable symbol to be longer than usual and is accompanied by a slip) An effect of displaying a notice character is produced, for example, an effect of making the change time of one change symbol shorter than usual and stopping it immediately). In addition, when the value of the first random number counter C1 is a big hit, the probability that an added value of 2 seconds is selected is set high, so that the player expects a big hit by confirming the notice effect. Can do.

  Next, a variation pattern command is set according to the variation pattern (variation time) determined in the process of S404 or S406 (S408), and a stop symbol command is set according to the stop symbol set in the process of S403 or S405. (S409). Then, an effect time addition command is set according to the added value of the effect time determined in the process of S407 (S410).

  After the process of S410, a change direction command is set according to the value of the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1 of the reserved ball execution area 203b (S411), the change start process (S306) is terminated, and the change process (FIG. 11) is performed. Return to Reference).

  The variable direction command set by the processing of S411 is a command that defines whether the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is vertical scroll or horizontal scroll. In the present embodiment, when the value of the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1 in the reserved ball execution area 203b is an even number, a change direction command corresponding to horizontal scrolling is set, and the first per-random number counter storage area is set. When the value of 203b1 is an odd number, a change direction command corresponding to vertical scrolling is set.

  Each command set in the fluctuation start process (S306) is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S201 at the execution timing of the next main process (see FIG. 10). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives various commands output from the main control device 110 (necessary for displaying the variation of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81), according to the received command, Display control of a display variation pattern command for instructing a variation effect and a jackpot effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a display stop symbol command for indicating a stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 To device 114. And the display control apparatus 114 controls the display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 according to these commands.

  Here, the order of commands transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when the variable display is started in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81 will be described. As described above, in the external output process (S201) of the main process (see FIG. 10), the commands are transmitted in the order in which the commands are set. In addition, before executing the change start process (S306), the reserved ball storage area forward process (S305) is always executed.

  Therefore, the “holding number command” is set by the reserved ball storage area forward process (S305), and then the “variation pattern command”, “stop symbol command”, “calculation time addition command” by the variation start process (S306). The commands are set in the order of “change direction command”. Therefore, various commands are sent from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 in the order of “pending number command”, “variation pattern command”, “stop symbol command”, “calculation time addition command”, “variation direction command”. Sent.

  Note that the “variation direction command” may be included in the “variation pattern command” without providing the “variation direction command”. Further, the “variation pattern command” may include the information indicated by the “calculation time addition command” without providing the “calculation time addition command”. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which combined each.

  In addition, these commands may be transmitted in a different order. Further, the order of command transmission may be changed to change the order of transmission. For example, if the “variation pattern command” and the “variation direction command” are transmitted first from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, the variation display is started before other commands are transmitted. Can start quickly. This is because the “pending number command”, “stop symbol command”, “calculation time addition command” and the like do not affect the start of the variable display.

  Further, the maximum number of commands to be transmitted to the outside may be limited to a predetermined number (for example, 3) by executing the external output process (S201) once. For example, if the number of commands to be transmitted is large (for example, 6), the command is transmitted over two main processes (main process executed this time and main process executed next time). This is because if there are many commands to be transmitted at a time, it takes time to transmit and the main process may not be executed every 4 ms. When configured in this way, the command may be transmitted from a command with a high priority. Specifically, as described above, the “variation pattern command” and the “variation direction command” are transmitted first from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and thereafter, the “hold number command” and the “stop symbol command” ”,“ Calculation time addition command ”and the like are transmitted over one or more main processes. Note that the maximum number of commands to be transmitted to the outside by executing one external output process (S201) may be changed depending on the remaining time of the main process, the amount of information to be processed in each main process, and the like. good.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control apparatus 111 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 211 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 17, a startup process executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing start-up processing of the payout control device 111. The start-up process is a process for performing various initial settings of the payout control device 111, and is a process executed when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on or when the MPU 211 is reset.

  First, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S801). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, the RAM access is permitted (S802), and an external interrupt vector is set (S803).

  Thereafter, a data backup process for the RAM 213 in the MPU 211 is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 (S804). If not stored (S804: No), the backup data is not stored, so the process proceeds to S811. Transition. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 (S804: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S805). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S806: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination is performed. If the value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S811. As described later in the processing of S917 of the main processing (see FIG. 18) of the payout control device 111, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 213. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 213 is correctly stored.

  In the RAM initialization process of S811 and S812, all areas of the RAM 213 are cleared to 0 (S811), and then the initial value of the RAM 213 is set (S812). Thereafter, the peripheral devices of the MPU 211 are initialized (S809), an interrupt is permitted (S810), and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 18) of the payout control device 111.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of power interruption is set (S804: Yes) and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S806: Yes), the data backed up in the RAM 213 is retained. In addition to clearing the information on the occurrence of power interruption (S807), in order to start paying out a winning ball or a loaned ball, permission to pay out a ball is set (S808). Thereafter, the peripheral devices of the MPU 211 are initialized (S809), an interrupt is permitted (S810), and the process proceeds to a main process (see FIG. 18) of the payout control device 111 described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the main process of the payout control device 111. The main process is a process for executing the ball payout control, which is executed after the start-up process of the payout control device 111 described above, and is repeatedly executed thereafter.

  In this main process, first, a winning ball command, a payout return command, a payout initialization command, and the like transmitted from the main control device 110 are received, and a command determination process for determining the type of these commands is performed (S901). This command determination processing is processing for executing processing corresponding to each command in accordance with various commands received from the main control device 110. Here, for example, the payout return transmitted from the main control device 110 is used. When a command, a payout initialization command, or a prize ball command is received, the payout of prize balls or rental balls is permitted.

  When the command determination process (S901) is completed, it is determined whether or not the payout is permitted (S902). If the payout is not permitted (S902: No), the main control device 110 is not yet started up. In such a case, the command determination process (S901) is repeatedly executed until the payout is permitted in the command determination process (S901). On the other hand, if the payout is permitted in the processing of S902 (S902: Yes), the state return switch 120 is checked, and if it is determined that the state return operation is started, the state return operation is executed (S903).

  Thereafter, the setting of the lower pan full tank state or the lower pan full tank release state is executed according to the change in the state of the lower pan 50 (S904). That is, when the lower pan 50 is determined based on the detection signal of the lower pan full switch, the lower pan full state is set when the lower pan is full. , Set the lower pan full release state. Further, the setting of the tank ball absence state or the tank ball absence release state is executed according to the change in the state of the tank ball (S905). In other words, the tank ball no switch state is determined based on the detection signal of the tank ball no switch, and when there is no tank ball, the setting of the tank ball no state is executed. Perform configuration. Thereafter, the presence / absence of a notification state is determined, and when there is a notification state, notification is made by a 7-segment LED provided in the payout control device 111 (S906).

  Next, a winning ball payout process is executed by each process of S907 to S909. That is, if the total number of winning balls is not 0 (S907: No, S908: No), the winning ball control process is started to pay out winning balls (S909). . On the other hand, if the prize ball cannot be paid out (S907: Yes) or if the total number of prize balls is 0 (S908: Yes), the process proceeds to the lending and payout process.

  In the lending process of S910 to S912, if the lending is not disabled and a lending payout request from the card unit has been received (S910: No, S911: Yes), The lending control process is started (S912). On the other hand, if the rental ball cannot be dispensed (S910: Yes) or if a rental ball dispensing request has not been received (S911: No), the process proceeds to S913. Similarly, after the ball rental control process (S912) is completed, the process proceeds to S913.

  In the process of S913, the control of the vibrator 134 (vibration motor control) is executed on the condition that the ball is clogged (S913). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 (S914). If the occurrence information of power interruption is not stored (S914: No), the power failure signal SG1 is received from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. Since it is not output and the power supply is not shut off, in such a case, the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes of S901 to S913 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the process of S914 (S914: Yes), the result of the power failure is output due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. This means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 16 has been executed. Therefore, in such a case, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S915), and the command determination process is executed again in order to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main controller 110 (S916). ). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the RAM 213 (S917), access to the RAM 213 is prohibited (S918), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, for example, the RAM determination value is a checksum value in the stack area and the work area to be backed up in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S914, since the information on the occurrence of power interruption is confirmed at the timing when one cycle of the main process of the payout control device 111 ends, the process is started up when returning from the state before the power interruption. After the process is completed, the process can be started from S901. In other words, the main process can be started in the same manner as when initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, the contents of each register used by the MPU 211 are saved to the stack area, or the initial setting process of the payout control device 111 without saving the value of the stack pointer (S801). In (see FIG. 17), the processing can be started from S901 by setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value). Therefore, the control burden on the payout control device 111 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the payout control device 111 to malfunction or run away. In addition, since the power-off process is executed at the timing when each process is completed, the amount of information to be backed up in the RAM 213 can be reduced.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 19 to 25 and the tables shown in FIGS. 26 to 29. The process of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and various commands transmitted from the main controller 110. And command reception interrupt processing.

  For convenience of explanation, first, referring to FIG. 26 to FIG. 29, the condition for starting the continuous chance effect and the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” set when the continuous chance effect is started. An example will be described. Thereafter, the command reception interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process and the main process will be described.

  First, with reference to FIG. 26 to FIG. 29, an example of a condition for starting the continuous chance effect and the number of continuous display times of “chance eyes” set when the continuous chance effect is started will be described. . In the tables of FIG. 26 to FIG. 29, when either “off chance chance” or “reach chance eye” is acceptable, it is simply described as “chance eye”.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a new winning is detected in the main controller 110, if the number N of special figure reservation balls at the time of winning is less than 4 (maximum number of times of holding), A winning information command indicating each value of the counters C1 to C3 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to perform the continuous chance effect, and when it is determined to start the continuous chance effect. Various settings (such as how many times chance chances are displayed in succession) for starting a continuous chance eye effect are also made.

  Further, in this embodiment, whether or not to perform the continuous chance eye effect is determined when the new winning is “probable big hit”, “normal jackpot”, “front / rear out of reach”, or “out chance chance” To be done. Then, the number of times of continuous display of “chance eyes” set when starting the continuous chance effect production is the timing at which the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command and the counters C1 to C1 indicated by the received winning information command. It is determined in advance according to the combination of each value of C3 and the number N of special figure reservation balls.

  FIG. 26 shows the variation effect when the new winning is “probability jackpot” and the reception timing of the winning information command corresponding to the new winning is within the period during which the stop symbol can be changed (changeable period). It is a table | surface which shows an example of the content. FIG. 27 shows the variation effect when the new winning is “ordinary jackpot” and the reception timing of the winning information command corresponding to the new winning is within the period in which the stop symbol can be changed (changeable period). It is a table | surface which shows an example of the content.

  FIG. 28 shows a variation effect in the case where the new winning is “probable jackpot” or “ordinary jackpot” and the reception timing of the winning information command corresponding to the new winning is a period during which the stop symbol cannot be changed. It is a table | surface which shows an example of the content. FIG. 29 is a table showing an example of the contents of the fluctuating effects when the new winning is “front / rear out of reach” or “missing chance” (regardless of the reception timing of the winning information command corresponding to the new winning). is there.

  First, FIG. 26 will be described. FIG. 26 shows the variation effect when the new winning is “probability jackpot” and the reception timing of the winning information command corresponding to the new winning is within the period during which the stop symbol can be changed (changeable period). It is a table | surface which shows an example of the content. If the new winning is “probable jackpot” and the reception timing of the winning information command corresponding to the new winning is within the period during which the stop symbol can be changed (changeable period), Displayed up to 5 times continuously.

  For example, if the number N of special figure holding balls is 4 including a new winning, the stop pattern of the changing effect currently being executed is changed to “chance eye” and the changing effect for the holding excluding the new winning is also given. The stop symbols are also set to “chance points” for each of the first to third variation effects after winning a prize. On the other hand, with regard to a new winning variation effect (fourth variation effect after winning a prize), the stop symbol is set to “chance eye”, and after the “chance eye” is displayed, the development effect is performed. The stop symbol corresponding to “big hit” is set to be displayed. That is, when the number N of special figure reservation balls is 4 including a new winning, the “chance” is displayed five times in succession.

  Similarly, in the case where the number N of special figure reservation balls is 1 to 3 including a new winning, the stop symbol is changed to “chance eye” from the variation effect currently being executed. Therefore, when the special drawing reservation ball number N is 3 including the new winning, the “chance eye” is displayed four times in succession, and when the special drawing reservation ball number N is 2 including the new winning, “Chance eyes” are displayed three times in succession, and when the special figure reservation ball number N is 1 including a new winning, “chance eyes” are displayed twice in succession.

  Next, FIG. 27 will be described. FIG. 27 shows the variation effect when the new winning is “ordinary jackpot” and the reception timing of the winning information command corresponding to the new winning is within the period in which the stop symbol can be changed (changeable period). It is a table | surface which shows an example of the content. If the new winning is a “normal jackpot” and the reception timing of the winning information command corresponding to the new winning is within the period during which the stop symbol can be changed (changeable period), The display is limited to a maximum of 4 consecutive times.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum continuous number of fluctuation effects with the stop symbol as “chance” is “probable big hit (up to 5 consecutive times)” and “normal big hit (up to 4 consecutive times)”. The case is different from the case of “rearward / rearward reach or missed chance (up to three consecutive times)”. In other words, the greater the number of times of the variable effect having the stop symbol as “chance”, the more the game chance state is shifted to after the continuous chance effect is completed. Thus, the player is angry at the number of continuous fluctuation effects with the stop symbol as the “chance”, so that the player can be provided with a highly interesting game.

  For example, when the number N of special figure reservation balls is 4 including a new winning, the stop design of the changing effect currently being executed is not changed. On the other hand, with regard to the fluctuation effect for the reserved portion excluding a new winning (the first to third fluctuation effects after winning), the stop symbol is set to “chance” respectively. Furthermore, for a new winning variation effect (fourth variation effect after winning a prize), the stop symbol is set to “chance eye”, and after the “chance eye” is displayed, the development effect is performed. The stop symbol corresponding to “big hit” is set to be displayed. In other words, when the number N of special figure reservation balls is 4 including a new winning, the “chance” is displayed four times in succession.

  In addition, in the case where the number N of special figure reservation balls is 1 to 3 including a new winning, the stop symbol is changed to “chance eye” from the variation effect currently being executed. Therefore, when the special drawing reservation ball number N is 3 including the new winning, the “chance eye” is displayed four times in succession, and when the special drawing reservation ball number N is 2 including the new winning, “Chance eyes” are displayed three times in succession, and when the special figure reservation ball number N is 1 including a new winning, “chance eyes” are displayed twice in succession.

  Next, FIG. 28 will be described. FIG. 28 shows a variation effect in the case where the new winning is “probable jackpot” or “ordinary jackpot” and the reception timing of the winning information command corresponding to the new winning is a period during which the stop symbol cannot be changed. It is a table | surface which shows an example of the content. Note that the stop symbol cannot be changed even when there is no variation effect currently being executed (when there is no change effect to be executed because there is no hold, or when the change effect has not yet started even if there is a hold). In such a case, the table of FIG. 28 is a table in which the column of “Currently changing variation effect” (a column in which four “No change” is lined up in the vertical direction) is deleted.

  If the receiving timing of the winning information command corresponding to the new winning is a period during which the stop symbol cannot be changed, it is currently being executed regardless of whether the new winning is “probable big win” or “normal big hit” Since the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect cannot be changed to “chance”, the “chance” is displayed up to four times continuously.

  For example, in the case where the number N of special figure holding balls is 4 including a new winning, the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being executed is not changed (cannot be performed). On the other hand, with regard to the fluctuation effect for the reserved portion excluding a new winning (the first to third fluctuation effects after winning), the stop symbol is set to “chance” respectively. Furthermore, for the new winning variation effect (fourth variation effect after winning a prize), the stop symbol is set to “chance eye”, and after the “chance eye” is displayed, the development effect is performed. A stop symbol corresponding to “big hit” or “normal big hit” is set to be displayed. In other words, when the number N of special figure reservation balls is 4 including a new winning, the “chance” is displayed four times in succession.

  Similarly, when the number N of special figure reservation balls is 2 to 3 including a new winning, the stop symbol is changed to “chance eye” from the variation effect currently being executed. Therefore, when the special drawing reservation ball number N is 3 including the new winning, the “chance eye” is displayed three times in succession, and when the special drawing reservation ball number N is 2 including the new winning, “Chance” is displayed twice in succession. However, in the case where the special figure reservation ball number N is 1 including the new winning, the “chance eye” can be displayed only once, and the “chance eye” can be displayed continuously. No change is made. The above description is the same for the case where a winning information command is received when there is no fluctuating effect currently being executed.

  Next, FIG. 29 will be described. FIG. 29 is a table showing an example of the contents of the fluctuating effects when the new winning is “front / rear out of reach” or “missing chance” (regardless of the reception timing of the winning information command corresponding to the new winning). is there. Note that the stop symbol cannot be changed even when there is no variation effect currently being executed (when there is no change effect to be executed because there is no hold, or when the change effect has not yet started even if there is a hold). In this case, the table of FIG. 29 is a table in which the column of “currently executed variation effect” (a column in which “not changed” is described in four columns in the vertical direction) is deleted.

  If the new winning is “front / rear out of reach” or “off chance”, regardless of the timing of receiving the winning information command corresponding to the new winning, Will not be changed. Further, the display of “chance” is limited to a maximum of three consecutive times, and the development effect as described above is not performed.

  For example, when the number N of special figure reservation balls is 4 including a new winning, the stop design of the changing effect currently being executed is not changed. In addition, the change of the stop symbol is not performed for the first variation effect after winning a prize among the variation effects (the first to third variation effects after winning) excluding a new winning.

  On the other hand, for the second to third variation effects after winning a prize, the stop symbol is set to “chance” respectively. Further, for the new winning variation effect (fourth variation after winning), the stop symbol is set to “chance”. That is, when the number N of special figure reservation balls is 4 including a new winning, the “chance” is displayed three times in succession.

  In addition, in the case where the number N of special figure reservation balls is 2 to 3 including a new winning, the stop pattern of the fluctuating production for the reserved portion excluding the new winning is changed to “chance”. Therefore, when the special drawing reservation ball number N is 3 including the new winning, the “chance eye” is displayed three times in succession, and when the special drawing reservation ball number N is 2 including the new winning, “Chance” is displayed twice in succession. However, in the case where the special figure reservation ball number N is 1 including the new winning, the “chance eye” can be displayed only once, and the “chance eye” can be displayed continuously. No change is made. The above description is the same for the case where a winning information command is received when there is no fluctuating effect currently being executed.

  Next, a command reception interrupt process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing of the sound lamp control device 113. The command reception interrupt process is an interrupt process for receiving various commands transmitted from the main control device 110, and is a process executed every time various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 are received. is there.

  In this command reception interrupt process, the command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, the received command is stored in the command storage area 223l (S1530), and the process ends. If the command stored here is a winning information command, a continuous chance eye determination process (S1207) is executed in a command determination process (see FIG. 21) described later, and if a predetermined condition is satisfied. If it determines, the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 will perform a continuous chance eye effect.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113. The start-up process is a process for performing various initial settings of the sound lamp control device 113, and is a process executed when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on or when the MPU 221 is reset.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, a power-on notification process is executed (S1002).

  In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, the power-on notification process is performed to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). 33, the display lamp 34, the special figure holding lamp 85, and the like. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG.

  When the power-on notification process is completed, it is determined whether the current startup process has been executed because the MPU 221 has been reset during the power-off process (S1115 in FIG. 20) described later. It is determined based on whether or not the disconnection processing flag is on (S1003).

  As described above, when an instantaneous voltage drop (instant blackout, so-called “momentary power interruption”) occurs, main controller 110 transmits a power-off command to voice lamp controller 113 and the like. As will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 20, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command, the power-off occurrence information indicating that the power-off command has been received is stored in the RAM 223 and the power-off process is performed. (S1115 in FIG. 20) is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed.

  That is, whether or not the MPU 221 is reset during the power-off process can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag. Note that if the power supply is completely shut off during execution of the power-off process or after completion of the execution, the data in the RAM 223 is lost, so the power-off process flag is turned off.

  More specifically, the case where the power-off process in progress flag is off is a case where the current startup process is executed after any of the following three states. The first state is a state where the power supply is completely shut off. When the power is completely shut down, the data in the RAM 223 is lost, so that the power-off process in progress flag is turned off.

  As the second state, the power-off process (S1115 in FIG. 20) was executed because an instantaneous power failure occurred. However, after the power-off process was completed, This is a state where the MPU 221 is reset. In this case, since the power is not shut off, the data in the RAM 223 is retained without loss. Further, since the power-off process is completed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off.

  The third state is a state in which only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like. That is, if the MPU 221 is reset without executing the power-off process (without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110), the data in the RAM 223 is held while the power-off process flag is off. Is done.

  If the current start-up process is executed after any of the three states described above, that is, if the power-off flag is OFF (S1003: No), whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed is determined. Confirm (S1004). It should be noted that whether or not the data is destroyed is that the data in the RAM 223 is normally held when only the MPU 221 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started. This is because the control of the sound lamp control device 113 can be continued using the data.

  For example, even if only the MPU 221 is reset due to noise or the like, if the data in the RAM 223 is normally held, the data can be used to continue control related to the continuous chance eye effect. Here, when only the MPU 221 is reset due to noise or the like, if the data in the RAM 223 is always initialized, it is necessary to start again from the initial state to determine whether to start the continuous chance effect. However, in the present embodiment, if the data in the RAM 223 is normally held, it is possible to continuously determine whether to start the continuous chance effect using the data, so the continuous chance effect is performed. It is possible to prevent the opportunity from decreasing.

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1007. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1005, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1004: No), the process proceeds to S1009.

  More specifically, when the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the RAM 223 is turned off when the power is turned off). Since the memory is lost), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1004: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1005. On the other hand, the power cut-off process (S1115 in FIG. 20) was executed because an instantaneous power failure occurred. However, the power was not cut off and returned to normal, and then the MPU 221 was reset after the execution of the power cut-off process was completed. When the current startup process is started or after the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like, the current startup process is started. Since the keyword “55AAh” is stored, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1004: No), and the process proceeds to S1009.

  In the process of S1003, when the power-off process flag is on (S1003: Yes), the power-off process (S1115 in FIG. 20) was executed because an instantaneous power failure occurred, but the power supply was not shut down. This is a case in which the MPU 221 is reset in the middle of executing the power-off process after returning to normal. In this case, the current storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, in such a case, it is difficult to continue the control, so the process proceeds to S1005 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the processing of S1005, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1005). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1006: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1007). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a reading / writing check abnormality is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1006: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1008), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify the RAM 223 of an abnormality.

  In the processing of S1009, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1009). The power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process (S1115 in FIG. 20) is executed, and turned off when the power is completely cut off (see S1114 in FIG. 20). Therefore, when the power-off flag is on when the startup process is executed, the power-off process was executed because an instantaneous power failure occurred. Or when the MPU 221 is reset upon completion of execution.

  Therefore, in such a case (S1009: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1010), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1011), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1012), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110. Specifically, among the memories 223a to 223l of the RAM 223 such as the special figure holding ball counter 223a, the continuous chance eye counter 223b, and the high probability state flag 223c, the memories 223a to 223k except the command storage area 223l are cleared. To do.

  On the other hand, the case where the power-off flag is off at the time of start-up processing is, for example, when power is turned on again after the power is completely shut down (data in the RAM 223 including the data of the power-off flag is lost). Or when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like, and the power-off flag is not turned on (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). This is a case where data in the RAM 223 is held.

  Therefore, in such a case (S1009: No), S1010 which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1011, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1011), and the interrupt permission is set. Then (S1012), the process proceeds to the main process.

  Note that the clearing process in S1010 is skipped when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, and the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is not cleared but saved. This is because the control of the sound lamp control device 113 can be continued. For example, even if only the MPU 221 is reset due to noise or the like, if the data in the RAM 223 is normally held, the data can be used to continue control related to the continuous chance eye effect. Here, when only the MPU 221 is reset due to noise or the like, if the data in the RAM 223 is always initialized, it is necessary to start again from the initial state to determine whether to start the continuous chance effect. However, in the present embodiment, if the data in the RAM 223 is normally held, it is possible to continuously determine whether to start the continuous chance effect using the data, so the continuous chance effect is performed. It is possible to prevent the opportunity from decreasing.

  Further, when the processes of S1005 to S1007 are executed, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1005, and therefore it is not necessary to clear the work area of the RAM 223 again.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113. The main process is a process for executing lamp display, audio output control, and the like. The main process is executed after the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 described above, and is repeatedly executed thereafter.

  In the main process, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the start of the main process (S1101). If 1 msec or more has not elapsed (S1101: No), the processes of S1102 to S1108 are performed. Without performing this, the process proceeds to S1109. The reason why it is determined in S1101 whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is that it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec) since S1102 to S1108 are processes related to display (production).

  On the other hand, in the command determination processing in S1109, processing corresponding to each command is executed in accordance with various commands received from the main control device 110, and in the variable display processing in S1110, each of the items used for setting the production mode. Update processing of a counter (not shown) or the like is executed. Furthermore, in the variable execution time update process of S1111, update process of the variable time timer 223i (see FIG. 6B) indicating the elapsed time since the start of the variable effect (variable display) in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. This is because it is preferable to execute each process of S1109 to S1111 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1109 in a short cycle, the processing according to the command transmitted from the main control device 110 can be reliably executed without omission.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the processing of S1101 (S1101: Yes), each lamp (for example, the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is set so that the lamp is edited in the processing of S1106 described later. Etc.) is set (S1102). Then, the customer waiting effect process of S1103 is executed, and then the hold number display update process is executed (S1104). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the hold number display update process, the number of lighting of the special figure hold lamp 85 is updated based on the hold number command stored in the command storage area 223l of the RAM 223.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1105). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. For example, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the feeling of expectation for the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production which can have, or selecting one reach production out of a plurality of reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1105 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, a lamp editing process is executed (S1106), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1107). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamps 34, and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1107, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1108), and the process proceeds to S1109. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1106 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process in S1107 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the processing of S1109, command determination processing for executing processing corresponding to each command is performed according to various commands received from the main control device 110 (S1109). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the variable display process which sets the effect aspect of the variable effect (variable display) in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is performed (S1110). In the variation display process, a display variation pattern command for instructing the set effect mode, a display stop symbol command, and the like are transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with these commands.

  After the process of S1110, a variable execution time update process for updating the execution time of the variable effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 (the elapsed time since the start of the execution of the variable effect) is executed (S1111). Details of the variable execution time update process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1111 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 223 (S1112). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1112 (S1112: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1114), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1115). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1116), and then the process loops infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output to the audio output device 226, the electrical decoration units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  In the process of S1112, if the occurrence information of power interruption is not stored (S1112: No), whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword “55AAh” stored in the RAM 223 (see the process of S1007 in FIG. 19). If the RAM 223 is not destroyed (S1113: No), the process returns to the process of S1101, and the above-described processes of S1101 to S1113 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed in the process of S1113 (S1113: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the audio output device 226, the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, the special figure holding lamp 85, or the like. good.

  Next, a command determination process (S1109) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing command determination processing of the sound lamp control device 113. The command determination process (S1109) is a process for executing a process corresponding to each command in accordance with various commands received from the main controller 110.

  In this command determination process (S1109), it is first determined whether or not a winning information command has been received (S1201). Specifically, it is determined whether a winning information command is stored in the command storage area 223l. As described above, the winning information command is a command indicating data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) corresponding to winning in the first entrance 64.

  If the winning information command has not been received in the process of S1201 (S1201: No), the process of S1202 to S1208 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1209. On the other hand, when the winning information command is received (S1201: Yes), it is determined whether the winning information command is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k (S1202).

  If a winning information command is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k in the process of S1202 (S1202: Yes), the process proceeds to S1208. On the other hand, when the winning information command is not stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k in the processing of S1202 (S1202: No), it is determined whether the value of the consecutive chance counter 223b is 0 (S1203).

  In the process of S1203, when the value of the continuous chance eye counter 223b is other than 0 (1 or more) (S1203: No), since the continuous chance eye effect is being executed, the process proceeds to S1208. By the processing of S1203, it is possible to prevent the continuous chance eye determination process (S1207) described later from being executed during execution of the continuous chance eye effect, and thus it is possible to prevent the value of the continuous chance eye counter 223b from being overwritten. , It is possible to accurately execute the continuous chance eye effect during the execution. Therefore, it is possible to accurately indicate to the player the gaming state that the gaming machine is scheduled to move to after the end of the continuous chance effect, by the number of consecutive variable effects with the stop symbol as “chance eye”. Therefore, the player is relieved according to the number of continuous fluctuation effects with “stop chance” as the stop symbol, and can provide a highly interesting game to the player.

  On the other hand, if the value of the continuous chance counter 223b is 0 in the processing of S1203 (S1203: Yes), it is determined whether the chance display skip flag 223d is on (S1204). As described above, the chance eye display skip flag 223d is a flag for setting the stop symbol of the changing effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 to a stop symbol other than the “chance eye”. When the chance eye display skip flag 223d is on (S1204: Yes), after the continuous chance eye effect has ended, the variation effect has not ended once, so the received winning information command is acquired. The information is stored in the standby command memory 223k (S1208), and the process proceeds to S1209.

  The process of S1208 is executed when a winning information command is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k. That is, when all the winning information commands received so far have not been processed, the winning information command received this time is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k. Therefore, winning information commands can be stored in the order received, and can be processed later in the order received.

  More specifically, when a winning information command is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k, if the winning information command is received, the received winning command is received regardless of whether or not the continuous chance effect is being executed. The winning information command is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k in the order received. Then, when the consecutive chance effect is completed, winning information commands stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k are acquired one by one in the order received (that is, in the order stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k). It will be processed.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, since the winning information command can always be processed in the order received, it is possible to determine whether or not to start the continuous chance eye effect in the order corresponding to the receiving order of the winning information command. . Therefore, when successive chance effects are executed in order, the transition of the gaming state of the gaming machine (the gaming state advantageous to the player) is suggested to the player exactly in the order that the gaming state transitions. be able to.

  Further, the processing of S1208 is also executed during execution of the continuous chance effect or when the variation effect has not been completed once after the continuous chance effect is completed. Here, the reason will be described.

  Although the details will be described later, the received winning information command is processed in the order received by a continuous chance eye determination process (S1207) described later. The continuous chance eye determination process is a process for determining whether or not to start a continuous chance eye effect based on the received winning information command and the value of the special figure holding ball counter 223a. If it is determined by the continuous chance eye determination process that the continuous chance eye effect is started, the continuous chance eye counter 223b is set with the number of times that the variable effect with the stop symbol “chance eye” is continuously performed.

  For example, it is assumed that a winning information command is received and a continuous chance eye determination process is executed during execution of a continuous chance eye effect. If it is determined to start the continuous chance effect, the value of the continuous chance counter 223b used in the continuous chance effect being executed is overwritten. Therefore, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the continuous chance effect, the continuous chance eye determination process is skipped, and the winning information command received during this time is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k. Therefore, since the value of the continuous chance counter 223b can be prevented from being overwritten during the execution of the continuous chance effect, the continuous chance effect can be accurately executed. Also, winning information commands can be stored in the order received, and can be processed later in the order received.

  Further, for example, after the end of the continuous chance effect (for example, “Chance Eye” is displayed three times in succession), the continuous chance effect (for example, “Chance Eye” is displayed in succession three times) is performed. Then, it seems as if the fluctuating effect with “stop chance” as the stop symbol was performed six times in succession. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after the end of the continuous chance effect, until the variation effect whose stop symbol is other than “chance eye” ends once so that the continuous chance effect is not performed, The winning chance information command received during this time is skipped in the continuous chance eye determination process, and is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the continuous chance production from being executed continuously, the maximum number of continuous productions of the variable production with the stop symbol as “chance eye” can be surely limited to the number corresponding to the lottery result. , Can perform the consecutive chance eyes production accurately. Also, winning information commands can be stored in the order received, and can be processed later in the order received.

  In the process of S1204, when the chance eye display skip flag 223d is OFF (S1204: No), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is extracted from the received winning information command and stored in the winning information memory 223j ( S1205).

  Then, 1 is added to the value of the special figure holding ball counter 223a (S1206), a continuous chance eye determination process is executed (S1207), and then the process proceeds to S1209. Details of this consecutive chance eye determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 22, but the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 223a (number of special figure hold balls N) and the value of the winning information memory 223j (the counters C1 to C1) This is a process for determining whether to start the continuous chance eye effect based on each value of C3). When it is determined that the continuous chance eye effect is to be started, various settings for starting the continuous chance eye effect are also made in the continuous chance eye determination process.

  Next, in the process of S1209, it is determined whether a variation pattern command and an effect time addition command have been received (S1209). Specifically, it is determined whether the variation pattern command and the effect time addition command are stored in the command storage area 223l. As described above, the variation pattern command is a command indicating a variation effect pattern to be executed (normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc.), and the effect time addition command is a variation effect to be executed. This is a command indicating a pattern of a notice effect.

  If the variation pattern command and the effect time addition command are not received in the processing of S1209 (S1209: No), the processing of S1210 to S1211 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1212. On the other hand, when the variation pattern command and the production time addition command are received (S1209: Yes), the variation start flag 223f is set to ON (S1210).

  Next, the fluctuation time is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command, and the addition / subtraction value (extension time and shortening time) of the production time is extracted from the production time addition command, and the total value of each time is obtained as the fluctuation time memory. It is stored in 223g (S1211). Thereby, the variation time of the variation effect to be started in the third symbol display device 81 is calculated. When the process of S1211 is completed, the process proceeds to S1212.

  Next, in the process of S1212, it is determined whether a stop symbol command has been received (S1212). Specifically, it is determined whether a stop symbol command is stored in the command storage area 223l. If the stop symbol command is not received in the process of S1212 (S1212: No), the process of S1213 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1214. On the other hand, when the stop symbol command is received (S1212: Yes), the stop symbol pattern is extracted from the received stop symbol command, and the content is stored in the stop symbol pattern memory 223h (S1213). Transition to processing. Specifically, in the stop symbol pattern memory 223h, “probability big hit”, “normal big hit”, “front / rear miss reach”, “reach other than front / rear miss”, “miss chance (one of miss)” , Any one of the six complete (stopping) stop (production) patterns is stored.

  Next, in the process of S1214, it is determined whether a stop command has been received (S1214). Specifically, it is determined whether a stop command is stored in the command storage area 223l. As described above, the stop command is a command indicating the end of the changing effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  If the stop command is not received in the process of S1214 (S1214: No), the process of S1215 to S1219, S1205 to S1207 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1220. On the other hand, if a stop command has been received (S1214: Yes), a display stop command is transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1215). The display control device 114 waits in a state where the variation effect is stopped after the variation time has elapsed after starting the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. Then, when the display stop command is received, the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is ended. When the processing of S1215 is completed, it is next determined whether or not a winning information command is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k (S1216).

  In the processing of S1216, if no winning information command is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k (S1216: No), there is no winning information command to be processed, so the processing of S1217 to S1219, S1205 to S1207 is skipped. Thus, the process proceeds to S1220. On the other hand, if a winning information command is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k in the processing of S1216 (S1216: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the consecutive chance counter 223b is 0 (S1217).

  In the process of S1217, when the value of the continuous chance eye counter 223b is other than 0 (1 or more) (S1217: No), the continuous chance eye effect is being produced. As described above, since the value of the continuous chance counter 223b may be overwritten, the processing of S1218 to S1219, S1205 to S1207 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S1220.

  The processing in S1217 can prevent the continuous chance eye determination process (S1207), which will be described later, from being executed during execution of the continuous chance eye effect, so that the value of the continuous chance eye counter 223b can be prevented from being overwritten. , It is possible to accurately execute the continuous chance eye effect during the execution. Therefore, it is possible to accurately indicate to the player the gaming state that the gaming machine is scheduled to move to after the end of the continuous chance effect, by the number of consecutive variable effects with the stop symbol as “chance eye”. Therefore, the player is relieved according to the number of continuous fluctuation effects with “stop chance” as the stop symbol, and can provide a highly interesting game to the player.

  On the other hand, when the value of the continuous chance eye counter 223b is 0 (S1217: Yes), it is determined whether the chance eye display skip flag 223d is on (S1218).

  In the processing of S1218, when the chance eye display skip flag 223d is on (S1218: Yes), after the continuous chance eye effect ends, the variation effect whose stop symbol is other than “chance eye” ends once. If the continuous chance eye determination process subsequent to this process is executed, as described above, there is a possibility that the continuous chance eye effect may be continuously executed. Therefore, the processes of S1219, S1205 to S1207 are skipped. The process proceeds to S1220.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1218, when the chance eye display skip flag 223d is off (S1218: No), the winning information command is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k, and the continuous chance eye effect is not executed. This is a case where the fluctuating effect is executed once after the continuous chance effect is finished.

  In this case, one winning information command stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k is acquired in the stored order (the order received) (S1219). Then, the processing of S1205 to S1207 is executed, the processing returns to S1216, and while the winning information command is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k, the processing of S1216 to S1219 and S1205 to S1207 is repeated, in the order received. Process winning information commands one by one.

  Note that when the stop command is received, the winning information commands stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k are processed together because the timing at which the stop command is received is the timing at which the variation process is terminated. This is because the process executed at this timing does not affect the execution of the variation effect. Here, even if there is the next variation effect, since the execution has not yet started, the execution of the variation effect is not affected. Moreover, the timing which complete | finishes a fluctuation | variation process is the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 for the image corresponding to fluctuation effect data (variation effects, such as high-speed fluctuation), and the image corresponding to stop effect data (stop effect which displays a stop symbol). This is the timing when the image processing to be displayed on the screen ends. Therefore, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured as an integrated device (for example, an effect control device), at the timing when the control burden is reduced in the effect control device. In addition, since the winning information commands can be processed together, the control burden of the effect control device can be distributed.

  Further, the RAM 223 can be used efficiently by collectively processing the winning information commands stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k. In other words, when the memory area of the acquisition standby command memory 223k is dynamically secured and released from the RAM 223, the winning information command stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k is processed periodically or intermittently. Rather than the case, the period in which the winning information command is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k can be shortened by collectively processing. Therefore, since the memory area secured from the RAM 223 can be released more quickly, the RAM 233 can be used efficiently together with other programs and other memory areas that are dynamically secured.

  Next, in the process of S1220, it is determined whether another command has been received (S1220). Specifically, it is determined whether other commands are stored in the command storage area 223l. If no other command is received in the process of S1220 (S1220: No), the process of S1221 is skipped and the command determination process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the other command is received (S1220: Yes), the process according to the other command is executed (S1221). For example, when a power-off command is received, the power-off occurrence information is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 223. Further, for example, if a hold number command is received, when the hold number display update process (see S1104 in FIG. 20) is executed, the same number of lamps as the special figure hold ball number N indicated by the received hold number command are displayed. Is a process of setting the special figure hold lamp 85 to be lit.

  According to the command determination process (S1109) in FIG. 21 described above, when a winning information command is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k, the received winning information command is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k. The winning information commands can be stored in the order received, and can be processed later in the order received.

  Further, during the execution of the continuous chance effect, the continuous chance determination process is skipped, and during this time, the received winning information command is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the value of the continuous chance eye counter 223b from being overwritten during execution of the continuous chance eye effect, and to execute the continuous chance eye effect accurately. Therefore, it is possible to accurately indicate to the player the gaming state that the gaming machine is scheduled to move to after the end of the continuous chance effect, by the number of consecutive variable effects with the stop symbol as “chance eye”. Therefore, the player will be anxious according to the continuous number of the fluctuating effects with the stop symbol as the “chance”, and can provide a highly interesting game to the player. Also, winning information commands can be stored in the order received, and can be processed later in the order received.

  Also, after the end of the continuous chance effect, the continuous chance eye determination process is skipped until the variation effect whose stop symbol is other than “chance eye” ends once, during which the received winning information command is acquired. It is stored in the standby command memory 223k. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the continuous chance production from being executed continuously, the maximum number of continuous productions of the variable production with the stop symbol as “chance eye” can be surely limited to the number corresponding to the lottery result. , Can perform the consecutive chance eyes production accurately. Also, winning information commands can be stored in the order received, and can be processed later in the order received.

  Further, when the stop command is received, the winning information command stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k is processed, so that the winning information command can be processed without affecting the execution of the variation effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the continuous chance eye determination process (S1207) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the continuous chance eye determination process of the audio lamp control device 113. The continuous chance eye determination process (S1207) is based on the value of the special figure holding ball counter 223a (number of special figure holding balls N) and the value of the winning information memory 223j (each value of each counter C1 to C3). This is a process for determining whether or not to start a chance eye effect, and is a process executed in the above-described command determination process (see FIG. 21).

  In this continuous chance eye determination process (S1207), first, the value of the winning information memory 223j of the RAM 223 (each value of each counter C1 to C3) and the state of the high probability state flag 223c are acquired, and based on these conditions. Then, a lottery result of a new winning (a winning corresponding to the received winning information command) is acquired (S1301). Specifically, if the high probability state flag 223c is on, it is determined that the jackpot probability is a high probability state, and the values of the winning information memory 223j (each value of each counter C1 to C3) are analyzed to obtain the lottery result. To do. On the other hand, if the high-probability state flag 223c is off, the value of the winning information memory 223j is analyzed and the lottery result is acquired by assuming that the jackpot probability is the low-probability state.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the new winning lottery result obtained by analysis is a “hit” (S1302). If the new winning lottery result is “hit” (S1302: Yes), the lottery result is determined. Is “probable big hit” (S1303).

  In the process of S1303, when the lottery result is “probable big hit” (S1303: Yes), the high probability state flag 223c is set to ON (S1306), and the process proceeds to S1307. In the processing of S1306, the big probability of the next big hit lottery is set by setting the high probability state flag 223c to ON. As described above, since the jackpot probability of the next jackpot lottery is determined by the latest jackpot lottery result, here, the status of the jackpot probability is updated for the next lottery.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1303, when the lottery result is “normal jackpot” (S1303: No), the high probability state flag 223c is set to OFF (S1304), and the value of the special figure holding ball counter 223a is 4. It is determined whether or not there is (S1305). In the process of S1304, the value of the high probability state flag 223c is updated for the same reason as in the process of S1306 described above.

  In the process of S1305, when the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 223a is 4 (S1305: Yes), the process of S1307 to S1310 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1311. Here, the reason for skipping the processing of S1307 to S1310 is that, in the case of “ordinary big hit”, the variation effect with the stop symbol as “the chance chance” is limited to a maximum of four consecutive times.

  In the case of “probable big hit”, since the number of continuous fluctuation effects with the stop symbol as “chance” is not limited, it is executed five times at maximum. In addition, in the case of “front / rear miss reach” or “miss chance”, the variation effect with the stop symbol as “chance” is limited to a maximum of three consecutive times. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of consecutive fluctuation effects with the stop symbol as “chance” is different for “probable big hit”, “normal big hit”, and “out-of-front reach”. Therefore, the player is relieved according to the number of continuous fluctuation effects with the stop symbol as “chance”, and can provide a highly interesting game to the player.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1305, when the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 223a is less than 4 (S1305: No), it is determined whether or not the stop symbol changeable flag 223e is on (S1307). As described above, the stop symbol change possible flag 223e is a flag indicating whether or not the stop symbol of the variation effect started to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 can be changed. It should be noted that while the stop symbol changeable flag 223e is on, it is within a period in which the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, and when it is off, the stop symbol of the variable effect being executed is being stopped. Cannot be changed.

  In the process of S1307, when the stop symbol changeable flag 223e is on (S1307: Yes), the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 is set to “chance eye” (S1308), A stop symbol change command corresponding to the setting is immediately output to the display control device 114 (S1309). As a result, the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 is changed to “chance eye”.

  Therefore, compared to changing only the stop symbol of the variable effect that has not yet started the production to “chance eyes”, the amount of change of the stop symbol during the variable effect to “chance eyes”, that is, one more time Can display “opportunity”. Therefore, since the chance of performing the continuous chance eye effect can be increased, the player's expectation can be improved. Further, by outputting the stop symbol change command to the display control device 114 immediately as in the process of S1309, it is possible to reliably change the stop symbol during the fluctuating effect to the “chance”. Then, when the process of S1309 ends, the process proceeds to S1311.

  In the processing of S1308, for example, if the pattern of the stop effect of the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 is reach (“rear out of front / rear” or “reach other than front / rear out”), the stop symbol is “ It is set to be “reach chance”, and if the pattern of the stop symbol is other than reach, it is set to be “miss chance”. In this way, it is possible to change the displayed “chance eyes” in the continuous chance eye production, so that the player can avoid having a monotonous impression on the game, and has high interest. It becomes possible to provide the game which has. Alternatively, all may be set to be “miss chance chances”, or all may be set to be “reach chance eyes”.

  In the present embodiment, when the stop symbol changeable flag 223e is ON, the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 is set to “chance eye”. If the stop pattern pattern of the variation effect is reach (“rear out of front / rear reach” or “reach other than front / rear out”), the reach is displayed as it is in the stop design, and the stop pattern pattern of the current variation effect is displayed. If is other than reach, the stop symbol may be set to be “chance”. In general, reach is more valuable than “chance eyes”. Therefore, in this way, since it is possible to preferentially perform a variation effect with a high game value, the player is glad and can provide a highly interesting game to the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the stop symbol changeable flag 223e is on, the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 is set to “chance eye”. If the variation effect pattern is a pattern with a high gaming value (for example, super reach or premium reach), the variation effect being executed is performed as it is, and the variation effect pattern being executed is the game value. If the pattern is low (for example, normal reach), the stop symbol may be set to be a “chance”. In this way, since it is possible to preferentially perform a variation effect with a high game value, the player will be anxious and can provide a highly entertaining game to the player.

  On the other hand, if the stop symbol change enable flag 223e is OFF in the processing of S1307 (S1307: No), the stop symbol of the running variation effect being executed cannot be changed, so the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 223a is 2 or more. It is determined whether or not there is (S1310). In the process of S1310, when the value of the special figure holding ball counter 223a is 2 or more (S1310: Yes), a continuous chance effect (variable effect with the stop symbol as “chance eye” can be continuously performed). Since this is possible, the process proceeds to S1311.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1310, when the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 223a is less than 2 (S1310: No), the current special figure reservation ball number N including the new winnings is 1, and the continuous Since the chance eye effect cannot be performed, this continuous chance eye determination process is terminated without doing anything. As a result, the fluctuating effect with the stop symbol as the “chance” is continuously executed at least twice or more. That is, since single execution can be prohibited, it is possible to increase the value of the continuous chance effect.

  In the process of S1302, if the lottery result of the new winning is “dismiss” (S1302: No), it is determined whether the lottery result is “rear out of front / rear reach” (S1312). In the process of S1312, when the lottery result is “front / rear out of reach” (S1312: Yes), the process proceeds to S1314. If the lottery result is out of the range other than “front / rear out of reach” (S1312: No), it is determined whether the lottery result of the new winning is “out chance (out of one)” (S1313).

  In the process of S1313, if the lottery result of the new winning is out of the range other than “No chance to miss” (S1313: No), the lottery result of the new winning is a lottery result that is not related to the continuous chance eye effect. Since there is, this continuous chance eye determination process is terminated without doing anything. On the other hand, in the process of S1313, when the lottery result of the new winning is “miss chance” (S1313: Yes), the process proceeds to S1314.

  In the present embodiment, if a new winning lottery result happens to be “miss chance”, the continuous chance effect is executed based on the value of the special figure holding ball counter 223a. . Thereby, since the opportunity to perform a continuous chance eye effect can be increased, a player's expectation can be improved.

  In the process of S1314, it is determined whether the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 223a is 2 (S1314). When the value of the special figure holding ball counter 223a is 2 (S1314: Yes), 2 is stored in the continuous chance counter 223b (S1315), and this continuous chance eye determination process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S1314, it is determined whether the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 223a is 3 or more (S1316). Since the process of S1316 is executed when S1314: No, the process is executed when the value of the special figure holding ball counter 223a is 1 or 3 or more.

  In the process of S1316, when the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 223a is less than 3 (S1316: No), that is, when the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 223a is 1, the continuous chance eye effect cannot be performed. This continuous chance eye determination process is terminated without doing anything. As a result, the fluctuating effect with the stop symbol as the “chance” is continuously executed at least twice or more. That is, since single execution can be prohibited, it is possible to increase the value of the continuous chance effect.

  On the other hand, when the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 223a is 3 or more in the processing of S1316 (S1316: Yes), 3 is stored in the continuous chance counter 223b (S1317). This is because, as described above, in the case of “front / rear miss reach” or “miss chance”, the variation effect with the stop symbol as “chance” is limited to a maximum of three consecutive times. Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 223a is 4 (S1318). If the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 223a is 4 (S1318: Yes), the chance eye display skip flag 223d is turned on. (S1319), the continuous chance eye determination process is terminated.

  Here, the reason why the chance eye display skip flag 223d is set to ON will be described. When the value of the special figure holding ball counter 223a is 4, the fluctuating effect will be performed four times from now on. However, in the case of “front / rear out of reach” or “off chance”, the stop symbol is set to “chance”. The fluctuating effect of “Eye” is limited to a maximum of 3 consecutive times. Therefore, the chance eye display skip flag 223d is set to ON so that the stop symbol of the variation effect executed first is a stop symbol other than the “chance eye” (see S1417 in FIG. 23).

  On the other hand, if the value of the special figure holding ball counter 223a is other than 4 (that is, 3) in the process of S1318 (S1318: No), the process of S1319 is skipped and the continuous chance eye determination process is terminated. .

  According to the continuous chance eye determination process (S1207) of FIG. 22 described above, if the new winning is “probable big hit” or “normal big hit” and the stop symbol changeable flag 223e is on, the third win In the symbol display device 81, the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed can be changed. Therefore, compared to the configuration in which only the stop symbol of the variable effect that has not yet started the production is changed to “chance eye”, the amount that the stop symbol in the variable effect can be changed to “chance eye”, that is, once more Can display “opportunity”. Therefore, since the chance of performing the continuous chance eye effect can be increased, the player's expectation can be improved.

  In addition, in the case of “probability big hit”, the number of continuous variation effects with the stop symbol as “chance eyes” can be made up to 5 consecutive times, because the stop symbol during the variation effects can be changed to “chance eyes”. On the other hand, in the case of “ordinary jackpot”, the number of consecutive fluctuation effects with the stop symbol as “chance eyes” can be limited to a maximum of 4 consecutive times. In the case of “rear out of reach reach” or “off chance eyes” , It can be limited to a maximum of 3 consecutive times, and “chance eyes” display in a single shot (only once) can be prohibited. Therefore, the player will be anxious according to the continuous number of fluctuating effects with “stop chance” as the stop symbol, and can provide a highly interesting game to the player. In addition, since the “chance eyes” display in a single shot (only once) is prohibited, the value of the continuous chance eyes production can be increased.

  Also, by chance, if the result of the new winning lottery is “miss chance (one of miss)”, the continuous chance effect can be executed based on the value of the special figure holding ball counter 223a. . Therefore, since the opportunity to perform a continuous chance eye effect can be increased, a player's expectation can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the fluctuation display process (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation display process of the audio lamp control device 113. The variable display process (S1110) is a process for setting the effect mode of the variable effect (variable display) in the third symbol display device 81, and is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 20). is there.

  In this variation display process (S1110), it is first determined whether or not the variation start flag 223f of the RAM 223 is on (S1401). As described above, the variation start flag 223f is a flag that is turned on when the main control device 110 is instructed to start the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, the variation start flag 223f is from the main control device 110. This flag is set to ON when a transmitted variation pattern command is received (see S1210 in FIG. 21).

  If the variation start flag 223f is off in the processing of S1401 (S1401: No), since the start of the variation effect is not instructed, this variation display processing is terminated without doing anything. On the other hand, when the fluctuation start flag 223f is on (S1401: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223f is set to off (S1402), and the stop symbol pattern stored in the stop symbol pattern memory 223h of the RAM 223 is acquired. At the same time, the fluctuation time stored in the fluctuation time memory 223g is acquired (S1403).

  As described above, the stop symbol pattern memory 223h is a memory in which the stop symbol pattern of the variation effect to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 is stored, and is “probability big hit”, “normal big hit”, “front / rear out of reach reach”. ”,“ Reach other than front / rear out ”,“ off chance chance (one of out) ”, and“ complete out ”are stored (see S1213 in FIG. 21). ). The variation time memory 223g is a memory in which the variation time of the variation effect to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 is stored.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the chance eye display skip flag 223d of the RAM 223 is on (S1404). As described above, the chance eye display skip flag 223d is a flag that is set on to prevent the continuous chance eye effect from being performed after the continuous chance eye effect ends (see S1411). Alternatively, this flag is also set to ON when the effect of changing the stop symbol as “chance” can be performed four times continuously and limited to a maximum of three times (see S1319 in FIG. 22).

  In the process of S1404, when the chance eye display skip flag 223d is on (S1404: Yes), the stop symbol of the changing effect is a stop symbol other than the “chance eye”. In this case, the chance eye display skip flag 223d is set to OFF (S1415), the process of S1409 described later is executed, and the process proceeds to S1416.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1404, when the chance eye display skip flag 223d is off (S1404: No), the processing proceeds to S1405. In the process of S1405, it is determined whether or not the value of the consecutive chance counter 223b is 1 (S1405). As described above, the continuous chance eye counter 223b is a counter that indicates the number of times that the variation effect with the stop symbol as “chance eye” is continuously performed, and the stop symbol is displayed until the value of the continuous chance eye counter 223b becomes zero. Fluctuating effects are continuously performed as “opportunities”.

  In the process of S1405, when the value of the continuous chance eye counter 223b is 1 (S1405: Yes), it is a case where the last variation effect is performed in the continuous chance eye effect. In this case, it is determined whether the result of the variation effect is a big hit based on the stop symbol pattern acquired in the process of S1403 (S1406). In the process of S1406, if the result of the fluctuating effect is a big hit (S1406: Yes), that is, if the acquired stop symbol pattern is “probable big hit” or “ordinary big hit”, the fluctuation acquired in the process of S1403 Within the time, the stop symbol is displayed as a “chance eye”, and thereafter, a changing production that develops is set (S1407).

  Then, the stop symbol pattern of the variation effect that is started to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 is set to the stop symbol pattern (“probable big hit” or “normal jackpot”) acquired in the process of S1403 (S1408), The process proceeds to S1411.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1406, when the result of the variation effect is “displacement” (S1406: No), that is, the stop pattern of the acquired stop symbol is “rearward / rearward reach” or “disappearance chance (one of the distractions). In the case of “)”, a variation effect according to the variation time acquired in the process of S1403 is set (S1409).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation time is determined for each variation effect pattern (disappearance, normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc.) and for each notification effect pattern. Therefore, in the process of S1409, for example, if the variation time acquired in the process of S1403 is 11 seconds ± 2 seconds, a variation effect for losing is set, and if it is 20 seconds ± 2 seconds, a variation effect for normal reach is set. Further, for example, if the acquired variation time is 30 seconds ± 2 seconds, a super-reaching variation effect is set, and if the acquired variation time is 60 seconds ± 2 seconds, a premium reach variation effect is set. Then, the variable design stop symbol pattern to be executed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to “chance” (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1411.

  For example, in the process of S1410, if the stop symbol pattern of the variation effect to be executed is reach (“rear out of front / rear” or “reach other than front / rear out”), the stop symbol pattern is set to “reach chance”. If the stop symbol pattern is “miss chance” (finally, it is not “completely missed”. In the first place, it is not a continuous chance effect), the stop symbol pattern is set to “miss chance”. In this way, it is possible to change the displayed “chance eyes” in the continuous chance eye production, so that the player can avoid having a monotonous impression on the game, and has high interest. It becomes possible to provide the game which has. Alternatively, all may be set to be “miss chance chances”, or all may be set to be “reach chance eyes”.

  In the process of S1411, the chance eye display skip flag 223d is set to ON (S1411), and the process proceeds to S1414. Here, the reason why the chance eye display skip flag 223d is set to ON is to prevent the continuous chance eye effect from being continuously executed as described above.

  In the process of S1405, when the value of the continuous chance eye counter 223b is other than 1 (0 or 2 or more) (S1405: No), the process of S1409 is executed, and then the value of the continuous chance eye counter 223b is 2 or more. Is determined (S1412). Since the process of S1412 is executed when S1405: No, the process is executed when the value of the continuous chance counter 223b is 0 or 2 or more.

  In the process of S1412, when the value of the continuous chance eye counter 223b is 2 or more (S1412: Yes), the pattern pattern of the changing effect to be started on the third symbol display device 81 is set to “chance eye”. (S1413), and the process proceeds to S1414.

  For example, in the process of S1413, if the stop symbol pattern of the variation effect to be executed is reach (“rear out of front / rear” or “reach other than front / rear out”), the stop symbol pattern is set to “reach chance”. If the stop symbol pattern is other than reach (“miss chance” or “completely miss”), the stop symbol pattern is set to “miss chance”. In this way, it is possible to change the displayed “chance eyes” in the continuous chance eye production, so that the player can avoid having a monotonous impression on the game, and has high interest. It becomes possible to provide the game which has. Alternatively, all may be set to be “miss chance chances”, or all may be set to be “reach chance eyes”.

  In the process of S1414, 1 is subtracted from the value of the continuous chance counter 223b (S1414), and the process proceeds to S1419. If the value of the consecutive chance counter 223b is 0 in the process of S1412 (S1412: No), it is determined whether the pattern of the stop symbol acquired in the process of S1403 is a “miss chance chance” (S1416).

  In the process of S1416, when the pattern of the stop symbol acquired in the process of S1403 is “miss chance” (S1416: Yes), when the number N of special figure reservation balls is 0, a new winning is happened by chance. This is a case where the lottery result of “No chance to miss”. This is because, when the special figure holding ball number N is 1 or more, if the chance result of the new winning lottery is “miss chance”, the value of the consecutive chance counter 223b is set to 1 or more. Because it should be done. Therefore, in this case, in order to prohibit the variation effect having the stop symbol as “chance eye” from being executed in a single shot, the stop symbol pattern of the variation effect to be started in the third symbol display device 81 is expressed as “ A pattern other than “chance” is set (S1417).

  Specifically, the stop symbol pattern is set to any one of “front / rear detachment reach”, “reach other than front / rear detachment”, or “complete detachment”. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fluctuating effect having the stop symbol “the chance to miss” from being executed by chance, so that the value of the continuous chance effect can be increased. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S1419.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1416, when the pattern of the stop symbol acquired in the process of S1403 is other than “miss chance” (S1416: No), that is, the pattern of the stop symbol is “probable big hit”, “normal big hit” , “Front / rear out of reach”, “reach out of front / rear out of reach”, and “completely out”, the processing of S1403 is performed as the pattern of the stop effect of the variation effect to be executed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol pattern acquired in step S1418 is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S1419.

  In the process of S1419, the display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation effect set in the process of S1407 or S1409, the process of S1408, the process of S1410, the process of S1413, the process of S1417, or S1418. A display stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern set in the above process is transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1419).

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the special figure holding ball counter 223a (S1420), and the stop symbol changeable flag 223e is set to ON (S1421). Then, the value of the variation time timer 223i in the RAM 223 is initialized to 0, measurement of the variation effect execution time is started (S1422), and this variation display process is terminated.

  The above-described variation display process (S1110) in FIG. 23 can set the effect mode of the variation effect (variation display) in the third symbol display device 81. Further, when the special figure holding ball number N is 0, when the lottery result of a new winning is accidentally “off chance (one of miss)”, the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to set a stop pattern pattern of the variation effect to be executed to a disconnect pattern other than “disappearance chance”. Therefore, since the fluctuating effect with the stop symbol as “chance eyes” can be prohibited from being executed by chance, the value of the continuous chance effect can be increased.

  In this embodiment, when the chance eye display skip flag 223d is ON, the display of “chance eye” is skipped. For example, a counter indicating the number of skips is provided, Set the number of times to skip "eyes". Each time the display of “chance” is skipped, the number of counters may be decremented by 1, and the display may be repeated until the number of counters becomes 0, thereby skipping the display of “chance”. By configuring in this way, it is possible to skip the display of multiple “chance eyes”, so the fluctuation that makes the stop symbol “chance eyes” regardless of the maximum number of holdings (even if the maximum number of holdings is 5 or more). The number of continuous productions can be limited to a certain number. In other words, even if the maximum number of holds is 8, if it is “probable big hit”, it can be limited to a maximum of 5 consecutive times, and if it is “normal jackpot”, it can be limited to a maximum of 4 consecutive times. ”Or“ outgoing reach ”, it can be limited to a maximum of 3 consecutive times.

  Next, the variable execution time update process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the variable execution time update process of the sound lamp control device 113. The variable execution time update process (S1111) is a process for updating the execution time of the variable effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 (the elapsed time since the execution of the variable effect is started). This is a process executed in the process (see FIG. 20).

  In this variable execution time update process (S1111), it is first determined whether or not the stop symbol change enable flag 223e of the RAM 223 is on (S1501). As described above, the stop symbol change possible flag 223e is a flag indicating whether or not the stop symbol of the variation effect started to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 can be changed. It should be noted that while the stop symbol changeable flag 223e is on, it is within a period in which the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, and when it is off, the stop symbol of the variable effect being executed is being stopped. Cannot be changed.

  In the process of S1501, if the stop symbol changeable flag 223e is on (S1501: Yes), the value of the variable time timer 223i (the execution time of the variable effect) in the RAM 223 is updated (S1502). On the other hand, in the process of S1501, when the stop symbol changeable flag 223e is off (S1501: No), the stop symbol cannot be changed and there is no need to update the time, so S1502 to S1504 are skipped. The variable execution time update process is terminated.

  Then, it is determined whether the value of the variation time timer 223i exceeds the value of the changeable period memory 222a (S1503). As described above, the changeable period memory 222a is a memory in which the changeable changeable period (period in which the stop symbol can be changed) started to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 is stored (FIG. 6A). )reference).

  In the process of S1503, when the value of the variable time timer 223i exceeds the value of the changeable period memory 222a (S1503: Yes), the stop symbol can be changed so far, This is a case where the stop symbol cannot be changed. In this case, the stop symbol change possible flag 223e is set to OFF (S1504), and this variable execution time update process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1503, when the value of the variable time timer 223i does not exceed the value of the changeable period memory 222a (S1503: No), the stop symbol can be changed this time as well, so the process of S1504 The process is skipped, and the variable execution time update process is terminated.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 32. The MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main process that is repeatedly executed after power-on and an external interrupt process that is executed when a command is received. For convenience of explanation, the external interrupt process is described first, and then The main process will be described.

  First, an external interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing external interrupt processing of the display control device 114. This external interrupt process is an interrupt process for receiving various commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed every time various commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 are received. It is.

  In this external interrupt process, first, it is determined whether a display variation pattern command has been received (S1801). As described above, the display variation pattern command is a command indicating a variation effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (variation effect pattern) and a jackpot effect. If the display variation pattern command is received in the processing of S1801 (S1801: Yes), the variation start flag 233a of the work RAM 233 is set to ON (S1802).

  Then, the variation time is extracted from the received variation pattern command for display, and variation effect data corresponding to the variation time is read from the character ROM 235 and stored in the variation effect storage area 234a of the video RAM 234 (S1803). As described above, the fluctuation effect data is data for performing a fluctuation effect such as high-speed fluctuation in the third symbol display device 81. The stop data is data for performing a stop effect for displaying the stop symbol on the third symbol display device 81.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to S1804. On the other hand, if the display variation pattern command is not received in the process of S1801 (S1801: No), the process of S1802 to S1803 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1804.

  In the processing of S1804, it is determined whether or not a display stop symbol command has been received (S1804). As described above, the display stop symbol command is a command indicating the stop symbol of the changing effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the process of S1804, when a display stop symbol command is received (S1804: Yes), a stop symbol pattern (“probable big hit”, “normal jackpot”, “front / rear out of reach”, from the received display stop symbol command, “One of the six of“ reach other than front / rear out of reach ”,“ miss chance (one of out) ”, and“ complete out ”) is extracted, and the stop effect data according to the pattern of the stop symbol is extracted. The data is read from the ROM 235 and stored in the stop effect storage area 234b of the video RAM 234 (S1805). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S1806. On the other hand, if the display stop symbol command is not received in the process of S1804 (S1804: No), the process of S1805 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1806.

  In the process of S1806, it is determined whether a stop symbol change command has been received (S1806). As described above, the stop symbol change command is a command for changing the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81 to “chance”. When the stop symbol change command is received in the processing of S1806 (S1806: Yes), stop effect data having the stop symbol as “chance” is read from the character ROM 235 and stored in the stop effect storage area 234b ( S1807).

  That is, the stop effect data set before the start of the change effect is rewritten (overwritten) with the stop effect data whose stop symbol is “chance”. As a result, the stop symbol can be changed after the variation effect is started on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) (that is, in the middle of the variation effect). When the process of S1807 is completed, the process proceeds to S1808. On the other hand, if the stop symbol change command has not been received in the process of S1806 (S1806: No), the process of S1807 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1808.

  In the processing of S1808, it is determined whether another command has been received (S1808). If another command has been received (S1808: Yes), processing according to the received command is performed (S1809). For example, if the received command is a display stop command, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of stopping the changing effect that is being executed or has been executed. Then, when the processing of S1809 ends, this external interrupt processing ends. On the other hand, if no other command is received in the processing of S1808 (S1808: No), the processing of S1809 is skipped and the external interrupt processing is terminated.

  With the above-described external interrupt process of FIG. 32, various commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 can be received, and a process according to the received command can be executed. When the stop symbol change command is received, the stop effect data set (stored) in the stop effect storage area 234b is rewritten to stop effect data having the stop symbol as “chance eye” before the start of the variable effect ( Can be overwritten). Therefore, after the variation effect is started on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) (that is, in the middle of the variation effect), the stop symbol can be changed.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing main processing of the display control apparatus 114. The main process is started when the power is turned on, and is repeatedly executed thereafter.

  In the main process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1601). Specifically, processing for initializing the MPU 231 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 234 is performed. Thereafter, when the power is turned on, an initial screen indicating that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD). Data is read from the character ROM 235 and stored in a predetermined area in the video RAM 234 (S1602). Then, using the effect data stored in the process of S1602, an initial screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) (S1603).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the fluctuating effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81 is a jackpot effect (that is, whether or not the jackpot is being hit) (S1604). If it is not a jackpot (S1604: No) Fluctuation effect processing for displaying an image corresponding to the variation effect or stop effect is executed on the third symbol display device 81 (S1605), and the process proceeds to S1607. The details of the variation effect process (S1605) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot is in the process of S1604 (S1604: Yes), the jackpot effect process is executed (S1606). In the jackpot presentation process, the number of rounds is updated, the number of winning balls is updated, the background image is updated for each round (for example, the presentation data is read from the character ROM 235 for each round, and the predetermined number in the video RAM 234 is set. Write to the area). After the big hit effect process (S1606) is completed, the process proceeds to S1607.

  In the process of S1607, the process of S1605 or the process of S1606 is started in order to execute the process (S1605 process or S1606 process) of performing an effect in the third symbol display device 81 every 20 milliseconds. It is confirmed whether or not 20 milliseconds or more have elapsed since the first time (S1607). In the process of S1607, when 20 msec or more has not elapsed since the process of S1605 or S1606 was started (S1607: No), the process waits until 20 msec elapses, and returns to the process of S1604. The processes of S1604 to S1607 are repeated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1607, when 20 msec or more has elapsed since the process of S1605 or S1606 was started (S1607: Yes), the process returns to S1604, and the processes of S1604 to S1607 described above are performed. repeat. Note that the processing of S1604 to S1607 described above is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off (or shut off).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the change effect process (S1605) executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the variation effect process of the display control device 114. This variation effect process (S1605) is a process for displaying an image corresponding to the variation effect and the stop effect on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD), and in the main process (see FIG. 30) described above. It is a process to be executed.

  In the variable display process (S1605), first, it is determined whether or not the variable effect is being executed (changed) in the third symbol display device 81 (S1701). It is determined whether the fluctuation start flag 233a of the RAM 233 is on (S1702). As described above, the variation start flag 233a is a flag that is turned on when the sound lamp control device 113 instructs the start of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, the flag is set to ON when a display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S1802 in FIG. 32).

  If the variation start flag 233a is off in the processing of S1702 (S1702: No), other display processing is executed (S1711), and the variation display processing is terminated. The other display process is, for example, a display process such as an effect of waiting for a customer to be executed when a predetermined time has elapsed when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player.

  On the other hand, if the variation start flag 233a is on (S1702: Yes) in the processing of S1702, the variation start flag 233a is turned off (S1703), and the variation time counter 233b of the work RAM 233 is reset (set to 0). (S1704), the process proceeds to S1706. As described above, the fluctuation time counter 233b is a counter that stores an elapsed time after the fluctuation effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1701, when the variation effect is being executed (changed) in the third symbol display device 81 (S1701: Yes), the value of the variation time counter 233b is updated (S1705), and the process of S1706 is performed. Migrate to The update of the fluctuation time counter 233b is to add 20 milliseconds to the value of the fluctuation time counter 233b.

  In the process of S1706, it is determined whether or not the display stop command for display transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 has been received, so that it is within the variation effect time (S1706). For example, it is determined that it is within the variation effect time from the start of the variation effect until the display stop command is received.

  In the process of S1706, if it is determined that the time is within the variation effect time (S1706: Yes), it is determined whether it is time to execute the stop effect (S1707). For example, it is determined whether the elapsed time of the fluctuation time counter 233b exceeds the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation presentation data (variation presentation such as high-speed fluctuation) stored in the fluctuation presentation storage area 234a. Determines that it is time to execute a stop effect for displaying a stop symbol.

  In the processing of S1707, if it is not yet time to execute the stop effect (S1707: No), the third symbol display device 81 (No.) is used using the change effect data stored in the change effect storage area 234a of the video RAM 234. An image corresponding to the fluctuation effect data (fluctuation effect such as high-speed fluctuation) is displayed on the LCD) (S1708). As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation effect for one time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 includes variation effect data for performing a variation effect such as high-speed variation, and a stop effect for displaying a stop symbol. It is performed based on stop effect data for performing. And this variation production process is complete | finished.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1707, when it is time to execute the stop effect (S1707: Yes), the stop effect data stored in the stop effect storage area 234b of the video RAM 234 is used to display the third symbol display device. An image corresponding to stop effect data (stop effect for displaying stop symbols) is displayed on 81 (LCD) (S1709). And this variation production process is complete | finished.

  In the processing of S1706, when it is not within the variation effect time (S1706: No), that is, when the variation effect time is over, the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) is stopped (S1710). The variation effect process is terminated. In the process of S1710, for example, the display of a new image on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) is stopped. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD), the displayed image continues to be displayed as it is. When the process of S1710 is completed, the variation effect process is terminated.

  31 can display an image corresponding to the variation effect or the stop effect on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD). In addition, a variation effect for one time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) can be performed based on the variation effect data and the stop effect data. Specifically, when the variation effect is started, first, the variation effect data stored in the variation effect storage area 234a is read, and an image corresponding to the variation effect data (variation effect such as high-speed fluctuation) is displayed as the third pattern. It is displayed on the display device 81. When all the images are displayed, the stop effect data stored in the stop effect storage area 234b is read out, and an image corresponding to the stop effect data (stop effect for displaying the stop symbol) is displayed.

  That is, since the data used for one variation effect is stored in different storage areas 234a and 234b and read out as necessary, execution of the stop effect is started within the variation effect time. If it is before, the stop effect data set (stored) before the start of the variable effect can be rewritten (overwritten) with another stop effect data. Therefore, after the variation effect is started on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) (that is, in the middle of the variation effect), the stop symbol can be changed to “chance”.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to change the stop symbol of the variable effect that has not yet started the effect to the “chance eye”, and furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81 The stop symbol during the fluctuating production can be changed to “chance” during the fluctuating production. Therefore, compared to the configuration in which only the stop symbol of the variable effect that has not yet started the production is changed to “chance eye”, the amount that the stop symbol in the variable effect can be changed to “chance eye”, that is, once more Can display “opportunity”.

  In addition, since the stop symbol can be changed to “chance” in the middle of the variation effect, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, is there a variation effect being executed (the stop symbol can be changed)? Alternatively, if the number N of special figure reservation balls is at least 1, a continuous chance effect can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of performing the chance chance continuous, rather than changing only the stop pattern of the fluctuation production that has not yet started the production to “chance eye”, so that the player's expectation is improved. Can do.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be easily guessed.

  For example, in the above embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to perform a continuous chance eye effect, but instead determines whether or not to perform a continuous chance eye effect in the main control device 110. It is good also as a structure which performs this determination. In the main control device 110, when it is determined whether or not to perform a continuous chance effect, it is not necessary to transmit / receive a winning information command, so the number of command transmissions in the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 It is possible to reduce the number of times the command is received. Therefore, both the control burdens of the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 can be reduced.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the stop symbol change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received by the display control device 114, the stop symbol that is in the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the change effect. However, the stop symbol after the change is not limited to the “chance eye” but may be changed to another stop symbol. For example, if information indicating the type of stop symbol is included in the stop symbol change command, the stop symbol during the variation effect can be changed to an arbitrary stop symbol during the variation effect.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the maximum number of continuous fluctuation effects with “stop chance” as the stop symbol is 5 continuous, but 5 continuous or more may be displayed. For example, if the variation effect is performed four times in succession, “chance eyes” are displayed a plurality of times within the period of each variation effect. Since the fluctuating effect for displaying the chance eye is 11 seconds, especially if the fluctuating effect is premium reach (60 seconds), the fluctuation time is relatively long, so that the “chance eye” can be easily displayed a plurality of times. Can do. In this way, the number of “chance eyes” can be increased without changing the number of fluctuating effects, and the player's expectation can also be improved.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the last variation effect in the continuous chance effect is ended with “probable big hit” or “normal jackpot”, when the last change effect is started, the “chance eye” is displayed first. Then, the stop effect corresponding to “probable big jackpot” or “ordinary jackpot” is displayed. However, in the last change effect, the “chance eyes” display and the development effect are not performed. Alternatively, a stop symbol corresponding to “probability big hit” or “normal big hit” may be displayed.

  Also, in the above embodiment, when the new winning is “ordinary jackpot” and the reception timing of the winning information command corresponding to the new winning is within the period during which the stop symbol can be changed (changeable period) In addition, if the number N of special figure holding balls including a new winning is 4, the display of “chance eyes” is limited to a maximum of four consecutive times, and the stop pattern of the currently running variation effect is not changed. . Instead of this, the stop pattern of the variation effect currently being executed is changed to “chance eye”, and thereafter, the stop symbols of the variable effect from the first to the third time after winning are also changed to “chance eye”. However, the stop pattern of the 4th variation production after winning a prize, which is the last variation production, does not display the “chance” but simply displays the stop symbol corresponding to “normal jackpot” The display of “eyes” may be limited to a maximum of four consecutive times.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although all the changeable periods are made into the same time (8 second), in the stop timing of the 3rd symbol of each symbol row (Z1-Z3 or Z1'-Z3 '), and a stop symbol Based on this, the changeable period may be determined. For example, it is configured so that a stop symbol can be set (designated) for each symbol row (Z1 to Z3 or Z1 ′ to Z3 ′), and each symbol row (Z1 to Z3 or Z1) before the change effect. The stop symbols to be displayed in 'to Z3') are set and stored for each symbol row. As described above, if the variation direction of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is horizontal scrolling (see FIG. 7A), the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol. The variable display stops in the order of column Z2. That is, even if the third symbol is stopped in the upper symbol row Z1, the stopped symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 and the middle symbol row Z2 are changed until the third symbol is stopped in the lower symbol row Z3 (that is, the upper symbol row Z3). Since the “chance eye” can be displayed by changing to the stop symbol of the symbol row Z1, the changeable period is set. Even if the third symbol is stopped in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, if the same third symbol is stopped, the stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is changed (the same third symbol). Since the “chance” can be displayed by changing to a symbol), the changeable period is set. In the case of vertical scrolling (see FIG. 7B), the upper symbol row Z1 becomes the left symbol row Z1 ′, the lower symbol row Z3 becomes the right symbol row Z3 ′, and the middle symbol row Z2 ′ becomes the middle symbol row. The same is true only with Z2 ′.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the continuous chance eye effect is not continuously performed after the end of the continuous chance eye effect, but the continuous chance eye effect may be continuously performed. For example, in the case of continuously performing the chance chance effect, the total number of times of the variation effect having the stop symbol as “chance eye” does not exceed the maximum number of consecutive times according to the lottery result. Specifically, if the lottery result of the subsequent consecutive chance stage production is “probable big hit”, the maximum number of consecutive fluctuation productions with “stop chance” as the stop symbol is up to 5 consecutive times, and up to 4 if “normal big prize”. Up to 3 consecutive times, and “up / down reach or missed chance” up to 3 consecutive times. As a result, the number of continuous variation effects with the stop symbol as “chance” increases, so that the player's expectation can be improved.

  In addition, in the continuous chance eye effect of the above-described embodiment, the fluctuating effect is continuously performed with the “stop chance symbol (displacement chance eye, reach chance eye)” as the stop symbol, but the stop symbol is “chance eye”. Instead, the sound effect during the changing effect (the mode of the sound effect of the dynamic display, for example, the stop sound of the third pattern, etc.) may be changed to a sound effect different from that during the normal changing effect. This sound effect allows the player to recognize that the continuous chance stage production is being performed, so that the player's interest can be attracted. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to participate in the game.

  In addition, in the continuous chance eye production of the above embodiment, a variable production with the stop symbol as “chance eye (miss chance chance, reach chance eye)” is performed continuously, but instead, a special special different from normal It is also possible to perform various fluctuation effects continuously. For example, the same variation effect (the aspect of the dynamic display effect is the same) may be performed continuously, or different variation effects may be performed successively in a predetermined order. By this special variation effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the continuous chance effect is being produced, so that it is possible to attract the player's interest. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to participate in the game.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 and the display control apparatus 114 are provided separately, you may provide each apparatus 113,114 integrally as one apparatus instead.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although it was set as the structure where the 1st entrance 64 was provided as an entrance where a jackpot determination is started, this 1st entrance may be two or more. . And it may be configured to change the effect mode of the continuous chance eye effect (for example, change the scroll direction (vertical and horizontal) of the effect) in accordance with the first entrance where the game ball has won.

  In the above embodiment, the stop pattern is determined when determining the effect pattern (rear-front / rear reach, reach other than front-rear, reach chance (one off), complete disengagement) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is determined based on the counter value of the selection counter C3, but without providing the stop pattern selection counter C3, other counters (the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the variation type counters CS1 to CS1) You may comprise so that it may determine based on the counter value of CS3). The effect pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81 includes one counter value of the variation type counters CS1 to CS3, a counter value of the first random number counter C1, and a counter of the first type counter C2. Or the counter value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the counter value of the first per-type counter C2. May be determined.

  Further, in the first random number counter C1 in the above embodiment, the numerical value in the range of 0 to 738 is counted, but the range to be counted may be determined as appropriate. Here, in order to count a numerical value in a range of 0 to 738, an area of at least 1 byte (a range that can be counted by 1 byte is 0 to 255) is required. For example, if the first random number counter C1 is composed of 2 bytes, a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 that is the maximum range that can be counted by 2 bytes may be counted, or 0 to 32768 (the most significant bit) Only a bit value of “1” and other bits may be counted in the range of bit value “0”).

  Similarly, the first hit type counter C2 in the above embodiment counts a value in the range of 0 to 4, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 counts a value in the range of 0 to 238. The range may be determined as appropriate. Here, in order to count values in the range of 0 to 4 and in the range of 0 to 238, an area of at least 2 bytes (the range that can be counted by 2 bytes is 0 to 65535) is required. For example, if the first hit type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are composed of 1 byte, numerical values in the range of 0 to 255, which is the maximum range that can be counted by 1 byte, may be counted. , 0 to 128 (only the most significant bit has a bit value of “1” and other bits have a bit value of “0”) may be counted.

  Here, when the probability is calculated using the maximum value of the range to be counted as the denominator and the one count value as the numerator, the wider the range to be counted, the easier it is to provide various probabilities. For example, if the denominator is 100, the probability can be set only for every 1%, but if the denominator is 1000, the probability can be set for every 0.1%. That is, the wider the counting range, the easier the fine adjustment of the probability. In pachinko machines, it is common to produce models with the same variation effect and jackpot effect but different jackpot probabilities, so by configuring the pachinko machine so that you can easily fine-tune the probability, Fine adjustment of the jackpot probability can be easily made for each model, and the design burden can be reduced.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although comprised so that the pending | holding number command may be transmitted from the main control apparatus 110 to the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113, you may comprise so that a pending | holding number command may not be transmitted. That is, in the voice lamp control device 113, the special figure holding ball number N is stored in the special figure holding ball counter 223a of the RAM 223, so that the special figure holding ball number N can be obtained without receiving the holding number command. . That is, in this case, the same number of lamps as the value of the special figure holding ball counter 223a are configured to be lit in the special figure holding lamp 85. As a result, the number of command transmissions in the main control device 110 and the number of command receptions in the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced, so both the control burdens on the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 are reduced. can do.

  In the above embodiment, the “variable direction command” is provided. However, the present invention may be implemented by a pachinko machine or the like not provided with the “variable direction command”. In the above embodiment, the “calculation time addition command” is provided, but the present invention may be implemented by a pachinko machine or the like that is not provided with the “calculation time addition command”.

  In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 determines the changing effect and the notice effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Instead of the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 is used. The variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the notice effect may be determined. For example, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a holding number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the special figure holding ball number N based on the received holding number command, and based on the extracted special figure holding ball number N, The variation effect displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81 and the notice effect are determined. When the sound lamp control device 113 determines a variation effect or a notice effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the extracted special figure reservation ball number N, the special figure reservation lamp 85 The number of reservations for the first entrance 64 may or may not be displayed. As a result, the number of pending command transmissions in the main controller 110 can be reduced, so that the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the special figure reservation ball number N is notified by turning on the special figure reservation lamp 85. However, without providing the special figure reservation lamp 85, the special figure reservation ball number N is displayed in the third symbol. You may comprise so that it may display on the apparatus 81. FIG. In addition, the display is performed so that the number of holdings is visually distinguishable (for example, a number or a four-divided area is displayed as a mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) that is different by the number of holdings). To do. In addition, the special figure reservation ball number N may be notified by turning on the special figure reservation lamp 85, and the special figure reservation ball number N may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although it was comprised so that a prize to the 1st entrance 64 could be held at a maximum of 4 times, respectively, the maximum hold frequency is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  In the above embodiment, the special figure reservation ball counter 203c is provided as a counter for counting the special figure reservation ball number N of the first entrance 64. However, the counter 203c is not provided and the counter 203c is provided as necessary. (For example, at the start of a change), the contents of the reserved ball storage area 203a are confirmed (the number of areas with data is counted) so as to obtain the special figure reserved ball number N of the first entrance 64. You may comprise. In this case, the data of the shift source area is cleared after the data is shifted from the shift source area to the shift destination area.

  In the above embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured as separate devices, but the sound lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information vertically or horizontally on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Instead, it may be performed by moving and displaying symbols along a predetermined route such as an L-shape. Moreover, you may scroll diagonally. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in various manners together with the symbol or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although it was comprised so that passage of the 2nd entrance 67 might be suspended up to 4 times each, the maximum number of times of suspension is not limited to 4 times, and it is 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 are configured as separate devices, but instead, the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 are integrated. , May be configured as a single device. For example, in this case, each time a new winning is detected and each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a, it is based on the contents of the reserved ball storage area 203a and the reserved ball execution area 203b. Thus, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute a continuous chance eye effect. Further, when a new winning is detected and the continuous chance effect is being executed, the values of the counters C1 to C3 corresponding to the new winning are temporarily stored in a memory area of a queue format (FIFO format). In addition, after the end of the continuous chance effect, the values of the counters C1 to C3 corresponding to the winnings are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a in the order stored in the memory area of the queue format (FIFO format). You may move them one by one. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the value of the continuous chance eye counter from being overwritten during execution of the continuous chance eye effect, and it is possible to accurately execute the continuous chance eye effect. Therefore, it is possible to accurately indicate to the player the gaming state that the gaming machine is scheduled to move to after the end of the continuous chance effect, by the number of consecutive variable effects with the stop symbol as “chance eye”. Therefore, the player is relieved according to the number of continuous fluctuation effects with “stop chance” as the stop symbol, and can provide a highly interesting game to the player.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the gaming machine is configured to change the stop symbol of the variable effect being executed or the stop symbol of the variable effect that is being executed to “chance”, but the execution is suspended. The gaming machine may be configured so as to change only the stop symbol of the variation effect that has been made to “chance”.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the stop symbol in which three same 3 symbols are stopped-displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is set as "chance eyes", three predetermined 3rd symbols are the 1st symbols. The stop symbol that is stopped and displayed on the three symbol display device 81 may be a “chance eye”.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, the present invention may be applied to a so-called second type pachinko gaming machine having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as another game machine such as an alepacchi or a sparrow ball.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information is specific, and in this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the various embodiments described above are shown. Display means for displaying the identification information, a entrance for entering the game medium, a detection means for detecting the entrance of the game medium into the entrance, and the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means In a gaming machine provided with dynamic display executing means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information in the event that a game medium has been entered by the detecting means, The entrance information acquisition means for acquiring the entrance information, the entrance information storage means for storing the entrance information acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, and the dynamic display execution means are stored in the entrance information storage means. The dynamic display of the identification information is executed based on the contents, and when the entrance information is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, the dynamic display is executed based on the contents of the entrance information storage means. State of dynamic display being executed by execution means A change possibility determination unit that determines whether or not the change can be changed to a predetermined mode, and a dynamic display mode executed by the dynamic display execution unit when the change determination unit determines that the change is possible First changing means for changing to the mode of the dynamic display, and dynamic display executed next to the dynamic display whose mode has been changed by the first changing unit, wherein the mode of the dynamic display before the execution is the predetermined The game machine A1 is provided with a second changing means for changing to the above aspect.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means, the entrance information associated with the entrance is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, and the entrance information is stored in the entrance information storage means. Remembered. Then, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information based on the contents of the ball entry information storage means. Further, when the entry information is acquired by the entry information acquisition means, it is determined by the changeability determination means whether the dynamic display mode executed by the dynamic display execution means can be changed to a predetermined mode. If it is determined that the change is possible, the dynamic display mode executed by the dynamic display execution unit is changed to a predetermined mode by the first change unit. Furthermore, the dynamic display is executed next to the dynamic display whose mode has been changed, and the mode of the dynamic display before the execution is changed to a predetermined mode by the second changing unit.

  Since the dynamic display executing means executes dynamic display based on the contents of the incoming ball information storage means, the mode of dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means is determined before the start of the execution. However, since the mode of dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display executing means can be changed to a predetermined mode by the first changing means, the mode of dynamic display determined before the start of execution is changed to the dynamic display. Can be changed to a predetermined mode during execution. In addition, since the dynamic display is executed next to the dynamic display whose mode is changed by the first changing unit, the mode of the dynamic display before the execution can be changed to a predetermined mode by the second changing unit. The mode of the continuous dynamic display of the dynamic display being executed and the dynamic display to be executed next can be changed to a predetermined mode. Therefore, when the dynamic display mode is continuously set to the predetermined mode, the dynamic display mode that is already being executed can be changed to the predetermined mode. The dynamic display mode can be changed to the predetermined mode once more than the predetermined mode from the target display mode. Therefore, the opportunity to change the dynamic display mode to a predetermined mode continuously can be increased.

  Display means for displaying the identification information, a entrance for entering the game medium, a detection means for detecting the entrance of the game medium into the entrance, and the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means In a gaming machine comprising: peripheral control means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information in the event that the display means is in control; and main control means for controlling the peripheral control means and performing main control relating to the game. The control means, when the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means, the entrance information acquisition means for acquiring entrance information associated with the entrance, and the entrance information acquired by the entrance information acquisition means Based on the contents of the main entrance information storage means, the main entrance information storage means for storing the entrance information acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, and the main entrance information storage means. Execution of the dynamic display in the periphery Dynamic display instruction means for instructing the control means, and the peripheral control means includes dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means in the display means, , An incoming ball information receiving unit for receiving the incoming ball information transmitted by the incoming ball information transmitting unit of the main control unit, and a peripheral incoming ball information storing unit for storing the incoming ball information received by the incoming ball information receiving unit; When the incoming information is received by the incoming information receiving means, the dynamic display mode executed by the dynamic display executing means is a predetermined mode based on the contents of the peripheral incoming information storage means. Changeable determination means for determining whether the display can be changed, and when the changeability determination means determines that the change is possible, the dynamic display mode executed by the dynamic display execution means is changed to a predetermined mode. First And a dynamic display executed next to the dynamic display whose mode has been changed by the first changing unit, wherein the second dynamic display mode is changed to the predetermined mode. A gaming machine A2 comprising a changing means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in the main control means, when the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means, the entrance information accompanying the entrance is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, and the entrance information is It is transmitted to the control means by the entrance information transmission means. Further, when the entrance information is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, the entrance information is stored in the main entrance information storage means, and the dynamic display is executed based on the contents of the main entrance information storage means. The peripheral display means is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means. On the other hand, in the peripheral control means, the dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means is executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means. Further, when the entrance information transmitted by the entrance information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the entrance information receiving means, the received entrance information is stored in the peripheral entrance information storage means and the peripheral entrance information is stored. Based on the content of the sphere information storage means, it is determined by the changeability determination means whether the dynamic display mode executed by the dynamic display execution means can be changed to a predetermined mode. If it is determined that the change is possible, the dynamic display mode executed by the dynamic display execution unit is changed to a predetermined mode by the first change unit. Furthermore, the dynamic display is executed next to the dynamic display whose mode has been changed, and the mode of the dynamic display before the execution is changed to a predetermined mode by the second changing unit.

  Since the dynamic display execution means of the peripheral control means executes the dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, the dynamic display mode executed by the dynamic display execution means of the peripheral control means Is determined before the execution starts. In the peripheral control means, the mode of dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display executing means can be changed to the predetermined mode by the first changing means, so the mode of dynamic display determined before the start of execution is It is possible to change to a predetermined mode during execution of dynamic display. In addition, since the dynamic display is executed next to the dynamic display whose mode is changed by the first changing unit, the mode of the dynamic display before the execution can be changed to a predetermined mode by the second changing unit. The mode of the continuous dynamic display of the dynamic display being executed and the dynamic display to be executed next can be changed to a predetermined mode. Therefore, when the dynamic display mode is continuously set to the predetermined mode, the dynamic display mode that is already being executed can be changed to the predetermined mode. The dynamic display mode can be changed to the predetermined mode once more than the predetermined mode from the automatic display mode. Therefore, the opportunity to change the dynamic display mode to a predetermined mode continuously can be increased.

  In the gaming machine A2, the main control means controls the peripheral control information related to the number of pieces of entry information stored in the main entry information storage means separately from the entry information transmitted by the entry information transmission means. A game machine A3, characterized in that the game machine A3 is provided with a pitch information transmission means for sending to the means.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in the main control means, apart from the entrance information transmitted by the entrance information transmission means, information related to the number of entry information stored in the main entrance information storage means is sent to the peripheral control means. It is transmitted by the number-of-entry information transmission means. Therefore, since the peripheral control means can separately receive the entry information and the information related to the number of entry information stored in the main entry information storage means, the processing for each information can be executed at different timings. And control burden can be distributed. Further, the main control means can separately transmit the entrance information and the information related to the number of entrance information stored in the main entrance information storage means to the peripheral control means, so that it is compared with the case of transmitting at the same timing. Thus, the control burden can be distributed.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the predetermined mode changed by the first change unit and the second change unit includes a dynamic display effect mode, a dynamic display result mode, and a dynamic display mode. A gaming machine A4 including at least one of the displayed sound effect modes.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the predetermined mode changed by the first change unit and the second change unit includes a dynamic display effect mode, a dynamic display result mode, and a dynamic display sound effect. Since at least one of the modes is included, it is possible to make the player recognize that the dynamic display has been changed to a predetermined mode, and to attract the player's interest.

  When the dynamic display mode is continuously set to the predetermined mode, the predetermined mode may be changed for each dynamic display. For example, in the first dynamic display, the predetermined mode is a dynamic display mode, and in the second dynamic display, the predetermined mode is a dynamic display result mode. In the display, a predetermined mode is set as a dynamic sound effect mode. In this way, if the dynamic display mode is changed, the dynamic display changes in a variety of ways, and the player's interest can be more strongly attracted.

  Display means for displaying the identification information, a entrance for entering the game medium, a detection means for detecting the entrance of the game medium into the entrance, and the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means In a gaming machine comprising: peripheral control means for performing dynamic display of identification information in the display means; and main control means for controlling the peripheral control means and performing main control relating to games. The control means includes an entrance information acquisition means for acquiring entrance information associated with the entrance when the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means, and an entrance acquired by the entrance information acquisition means The contents of the incoming ball information transmitting means for transmitting information to the peripheral control means, the incoming ball information storing means for storing the incoming ball information acquired by the incoming ball information acquiring means, and the contents of the main incoming ball information storage means Based on the execution of the dynamic display Dynamic display instruction means for instructing the peripheral control means, wherein the peripheral control means executes the dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means in the display means Execution means, mode setting means for setting the dynamic display mode executed by the dynamic display execution means to a predetermined mode or a mode different from the predetermined mode, and entrance information of the main control unit Incoming information receiving means for receiving incoming information transmitted by the transmitting means, first peripheral storage means for storing incoming information received by the incoming information receiving means, and new in the first peripheral storage means When dynamic entry information is stored, based on the contents of the first peripheral storage means, the dynamic display is executed in order by the dynamic display execution means, and the dynamic order is continuously executed. Each display mode An effect availability determination unit that determines whether or not a continuous effect to be executed in a predetermined mode can be executed, and is executed by the dynamic display execution unit when the effect determination unit determines that the continuous effect can be executed. The continuous effect control means for controlling the dynamic display modes in the execution order to be the predetermined mode, and the input after the continuous effect is determined to be executable by the effect availability determination means. A first storage control means for storing the incoming information received by the ball information receiving means in a second peripheral storage means different from the first peripheral storage means instead of the first peripheral storage means; A gaming machine B1 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B1, when the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means in the main control means, the entrance information accompanying the entrance is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, and the acquired entrance Information is transmitted to the peripheral control means by the entrance information transmitting means. Further, when the entrance information is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, the entrance information is stored in the main entrance information storage means, and the dynamic display is executed based on the contents of the main entrance information storage means. The peripheral display means is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means. On the other hand, in the peripheral control means, the dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means is executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means, and the dynamic display mode to be executed is predetermined. Or an aspect different from the predetermined aspect is set by the aspect setting means. Further, when the entrance information transmitted by the entrance information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the entrance information receiving means, the received entrance information is stored in the first peripheral storage means. And when new entrance information is memorize | stored in the 1st periphery memory | storage means, based on the content of the 1st periphery memory | storage means, it performs in the dynamic display performed in order by the dynamic display execution means It is determined by the effect availability determination means whether or not a continuous effect for executing the dynamic display modes that are in sequence in a predetermined manner can be executed. Here, if it is determined that execution is possible, the continuous presentation control unit controls the dynamic display modes in the execution order executed by the dynamic display execution unit to be in a predetermined mode, and the determination of whether or not presentation is possible. Entry information received by the entry information receiving means after it is determined to be executable by the means is stored in the second peripheral storage means different from the first peripheral storage means in place of the first peripheral storage means. Stored by the control means. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent new entry information from being stored in the first peripheral storage means after it is determined that the performance availability determination means can execute, the dynamic display mode is set to a predetermined mode by the continuous performance control unit. In the middle of being controlled so that the control is performed again, it is determined that the performance determination unit can execute again, and as a result, the execution of the control by the continuous performance control unit different from the control during the execution is started. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of dynamic displays controlled so as to be in a predetermined mode by the continuous performance control means from being changed during the control, so that it is advantageous for the player when the continuous performance is executed. It is possible to accurately suggest to the player the possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

  For example, the continuous production control means may be configured to control only the dynamic display mode before being executed by the dynamic display execution means so as to be a predetermined mode, or executed by the dynamic display execution means. It is good also as a structure which controls so that the aspect of the dynamic display currently performed and the aspect of the dynamic display before being performed by the dynamic display execution means may become a predetermined | prescribed aspect, respectively.

  In the gaming machine B1, the first storage control means receives the entry information receiving means from when it is determined that the continuous effect can be executed by the effect availability determining means until the control by the continuous effect control means ends. Entry information is stored in the second peripheral storage means in association with the reception order of the incoming information instead of the first peripheral storage means, and the peripheral control means is stored in the second peripheral storage means. Storage determination means for determining whether the entry information is stored, and when the entry information is received by the entry information receiving means, if the entry information is determined to be stored by the storage determination means, Second storage control means for storing the incoming ball information received by the incoming ball information receiving means in the second peripheral memory means in association with the receiving order of the incoming ball information instead of the first peripheral memory means; A reception order entry information acquisition means for obtaining the entry information stored in the second peripheral storage means in the order in which the entry information was received after the control by the control means is completed, and the reception order entry information; A gaming machine B2 comprising: third storage control means for storing the entrance information acquired by the acquisition means one by one in the acquired order in the first peripheral storage means.

  According to the gaming machine B2, the entrance information received by the entrance information receiving means from when it is determined that the effect can be executed by the effect availability determination means until the end of the control by the effect control means is the first peripheral memory. Instead of the means, the first storage control means stores the information in the second peripheral storage means in association with the reception order of the entry information. In the peripheral control means, when the incoming information is received by the incoming information receiving means, if it is determined by the storage determining means that the incoming information is stored in the second peripheral storage means, the incoming information is received. The incoming information received by the means is stored in the second peripheral storage means by the second storage control means in association with the reception order of the incoming information in place of the first peripheral storage means. Further, when the control by the continuous effect control means is finished, the entrance information stored in the second peripheral storage means is acquired by the reception order entry information acquisition means in the order in which the entrance information is received, and the acquisition is performed. The third storage control means stores the entry information in the first peripheral storage means one by one in the order of acquisition. Therefore, after the control by the continuous production control means is completed, the entrance information stored in the second peripheral storage means can be stored in the first peripheral storage means one by one in the order in which the entrance information is received. it can. Further, even after the control by the continuous effect control means is completed, the entry information received by the entry information receiving means is stored in the first peripheral storage means while the entry information is stored in the second peripheral storage means. Instead, it can be stored in the second peripheral storage means in association with the reception order of the entrance information. Therefore, since the order of the entry information stored in the first peripheral storage means can be the order in which the entry information is received, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect can be executed by the effect availability determination means. This can be done in an order corresponding to the order in which the information was received. Therefore, the possibility of shifting to a gaming state advantageous to the player can be suggested to the player accurately in the order in which the possibility is shifted.

  The acquisition of the entry information by the reception order entry information acquisition means is, for example, after reading the entry information stored in the second peripheral storage means, the read entry information is stored in the second peripheral storage means. Indicates to be removed from

  In the gaming machine B2, the continuous production control means, when the production availability determination means determines that the continuous production can be executed, the dynamic order execution means executed by the dynamic display execution means are continuous. Each of the display modes is set to the predetermined mode by the mode setting unit, and the reception order entry information acquisition unit is controlled by the continuous performance control unit and the mode of the execution order set to the predetermined mode is set. When the dynamic display whose execution order is the last among the continuous dynamic displays is completed, the entrance information stored in the second peripheral storage means is acquired in the order in which the entrance information is received. A gaming machine B3 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine B3, when it is determined by the effect availability determination means that the continuous effect can be executed, the continuous effect control means causes the dynamic display modes executed by the dynamic display execution means to be continuously displayed. A predetermined mode is set by the mode setting means. In addition, when the dynamic display having the last execution order in the continuous dynamic display in which the execution order is controlled by the continuous production control means and the aspect is set to the predetermined aspect is completed, the second peripheral storage means The stored entry information is acquired by the reception order entry information acquisition means in the order in which the entry information is received. Therefore, when the execution of the last variation display in the continuous performance is finished and the control burden on the peripheral control means is reduced, the order in which the entrance information is received from the entrance information stored in the second peripheral storage means Can be obtained by the reception order entry information acquisition means. Therefore, the control burden on the peripheral control means can be distributed.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, the peripheral control means determines that the entry information is stored in the second peripheral storage means by the storage determination means after the control by the continuous performance control means is completed. The reception order entry information acquisition means, the second storage control means, and the effect availability determination means are repeatedly executed until it is determined that the continuous effect can be executed during or newly by the effect availability determination means. A gaming machine B4 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine B4, after the control by the continuous effect control means is completed in the peripheral control means, while it is determined by the storage determination means that the entry information is stored in the second peripheral storage means or newly The reception order entry information acquisition means, the second storage control means, and the effect availability determination means are repeatedly executed until it is determined by the effect availability determination means that the continuous effect can be executed. Therefore, after the control by the continuous production control means is completed, the input stored in the second peripheral storage means is determined while the storage determining means determines that the entry information is stored in the second peripheral storage means. The process of storing the sphere information in the first peripheral storage means and the process of determining whether or not the continuous effect can be executed based on the contents of the first peripheral storage means can be repeatedly executed. Therefore, the process of storing the entry information stored in the second peripheral storage unit in the first peripheral storage unit and the process of determining whether the continuous effect can be executed based on the contents of the first peripheral storage unit are periodically performed. Compared with the case where the execution is performed intermittently or intermittently, it is possible to shorten the period during which the incoming ball information is stored in the second peripheral storage means. Therefore, the storage means can be used efficiently when the second peripheral storage means is shared with other storage means, programs for executing other processes, and the like.

  Further, the process of storing the entry information stored in the second peripheral storage means in the first peripheral storage means and the process of determining whether or not the continuous effect can be executed based on the contents of the first peripheral storage means are: This is executed until it is determined by the means for determining whether or not the continuous effect can be executed. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent new entry information from being stored in the first peripheral storage means after it is determined that the performance availability determination means can execute, the dynamic display mode is set to a predetermined mode by the continuous performance control unit. In the middle of being controlled so that the control is performed again, it is determined that the performance determination unit can execute again, and as a result, the execution of the control by the continuous performance control unit different from the control during the execution is started. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of dynamic displays controlled so as to be in a predetermined mode by the continuous performance control means from being changed during the control, so that it is advantageous for the player when the continuous performance is executed. The possibility of shifting to the gaming state can be suggested to the player more accurately.

  Display means for displaying the identification information, a entrance for entering the game medium, a detection means for detecting the entrance of the game medium into the entrance, and the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means A dynamic display executing means for performing dynamic display of identification information in the display means, and a mode of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means as a predetermined mode or the predetermined mode. In a gaming machine provided with a mode setting means for setting in another mode, a pitch information acquisition means for acquiring pitch information associated with the pitch when a ball entering the game medium is detected by the detection means; The first entry information storage means for storing the entry information acquired by the entry information acquisition means, and the dynamic display execution means are based on the contents of the first entry information storage means. Display, and information on the entry When the entry information is acquired by the means, the execution order continues in the dynamic display executed in order by the dynamic display execution means based on the contents of the first entry information storage means. When it is determined that the continuous effect can be executed by the effect availability determination unit that determines whether it is possible to execute a continuous effect that causes each of the dynamic display modes to be executed in the predetermined mode, The continuous production control means for controlling the dynamic display modes in the execution order executed by the dynamic display execution means to be the predetermined modes, and the continuous performance is executed by the production availability determination unit. Second entry information storage means different from the first entry information storage means in place of the first entry information storage means instead of the entry information acquired by the entry information acquisition means after it is determined to be possible Gaming machine B5, characterized in that a storage control means for storing for.

  According to the gaming machine B5, when the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means, the entrance information associated with the entrance is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, and the entrance information is stored in the first entrance information storage. Stored in the means. Then, based on the contents of the first incoming information storing means, dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display executing means in the display means. Further, when the entrance information is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, the execution order of the dynamic display executed in order by the dynamic display execution means is based on the contents of the first entrance information storage means. Whether or not a continuous effect that allows continuous dynamic display to be executed in a predetermined manner can be executed is determined by the effect determination unit. Here, if it is determined that execution is possible, the continuous presentation control unit controls the dynamic display modes in the execution order executed by the dynamic display execution unit to be in a predetermined mode, and the determination of whether or not presentation is possible. The second entry information that is different from the first entry information storage means instead of the first entry information storage means is the entry information acquired by the entry information acquisition means after the means is determined to be executable. It is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent new entry information from being stored in the first entry information storage unit after it has been determined that the effect availability determination unit can execute, the dynamic display mode is predetermined by the continuous effect control unit. In the middle of being controlled so as to be the mode of the above, it is determined again by the effect availability determination means that execution is possible, and as a result, execution of the control by the continuous effect control means different from the control being executed is started. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of dynamic displays controlled so as to be in a predetermined mode by the continuous performance control means from being changed during the control, so that it is advantageous for the player when the continuous performance is executed. It is possible to accurately suggest to the player the possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

  For example, the continuous production control means may be configured to control only the dynamic display mode before being executed by the dynamic display execution means so as to be a predetermined mode, or executed by the dynamic display execution means. It is good also as a structure which controls so that the aspect of the dynamic display currently performed and the aspect of the dynamic display before being performed by the dynamic display execution means may become a predetermined | prescribed aspect, respectively.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the predetermined mode includes at least one of the dynamic display effect mode, the dynamic display display result mode, and the dynamic display sound effect mode. A gaming machine B6 characterized in that one is included.

  According to the gaming machine B6, the predetermined mode includes at least one of a dynamic display effect mode, a dynamic display result mode, and a dynamic sound effect mode. The player can recognize that the dynamic display has been changed to a predetermined mode, and can attract the player's interest.

  When the dynamic display mode is continuously set to the predetermined mode, the predetermined mode may be changed for each dynamic display. For example, in the first dynamic display, the predetermined mode is a dynamic display mode, and in the second dynamic display, the predetermined mode is a dynamic display result mode. In the display, a predetermined mode is set as a dynamic sound effect mode. In this way, if the dynamic display mode is changed, the dynamic display changes in a variety of ways, and the player's interest can be more strongly attracted.

  Each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine C1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed in a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through a prize opening), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine, and the gaming machine C2. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64 First entrance (entrance)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
110 Main control device (main control means)
113 Sound lamp control device (peripheral control means)
114 Display control device (peripheral control means)
203a Reservation ball storage area (main entry information storage means)
208a First entrance switch (detection means)
223j Prize information memory (first peripheral storage means)
223k acquisition standby command memory (second peripheral storage means)
S306 Dynamic display instruction means S654 Entrance information acquisition means S655 Entrance information transmission means S1110, S1207 Continuous production control means S1110, S1605 Dynamic display execution means S1110, S1804 to S1807 Aspect setting means S1202 Storage determination means S1202, S1208 Second Storage control means S1203, S1208 First storage control means S1205 Third storage control means S1207 Production availability determination means S1219 Reception order entry information acquisition means S1530 Entrance information reception means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, pachinko machines have been known in which a display effect such as a liquid crystal display device or the like is used to produce a fluctuating effect (dynamic display) or the like to improve the interest of the game. The fluctuating effect (dynamic display) is an effect that starts when a game ball enters (wins) at the entrance (starting entrance), for example, 3 provided in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. A total of nine symbols and the like are displayed in a × 3 cell. For example, when a game ball wins a starting opening, the scrolling of symbols and the like is started, and then the symbols being scrolled are sequentially stopped and a total of nine symbols and the like (stop symbols) are stopped and displayed. In such variation effect, beneficial gaming state for the player (e.g., those Tari) to transition to running pre suggestive effect, devised to have expectations to the player have been made.

In this type of pachinko machine, for example, as an effect that suggests in advance that the game state is advantageous to the player, the display of chances and the like is not limited to one variation effect, but continuously over a plurality of variation effects. There are games that are configured to be performed periodically or intermittently, or those that perform the same or different performance multiple times continuously or intermittently with display or sound effects (hereinafter referred to as “continuous performance”), and advantageous games The game has been further improved in interest, such as giving players a sense of expectation of the state .

Japanese Utility Model Publication No. 7-24383

However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of entertainment.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve the object, detecting a display means for displaying the identification information, and playing ball ball entrance capable ball entrance opening, a ball entrance of game ball of the input spheres port detection means for the peripheral control unit causes run a dynamic display of the identification information on the display means if the input spheres game ball is detected by the detection means, to control the peripheral control unit, regarding the game Main control means for performing a main control, and the main control means, when the detection means detects the entrance of a game ball , obtains entrance information associated with the entrance. storing a sphere information acquisition means, a ball entrance information transmitting means for transmitting information based on the acquired ball entrance information by the ball entrance information acquisition unit to the peripheral control unit, a ball entrance information acquired by the entering sphere information acquiring means and inlet ball information storage means for, the ball entrance information storage When starting the dynamic display of the identification information based on the ball entrance information stored in the means, and the dynamic display time determining means for determining the dynamic display time, before stored in the ball entrance information storage means and a dynamic display instructing means for instructing said peripheral control unit to execute said dynamic display based on the entry ball information, the peripheral control unit, based on an instruction of the dynamic display instruction unit, the identification information a dynamic display execution means for executing a dynamic display, when a new ball entrance information is acquired by the entering sphere information acquiring unit, already aspects of dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display execution means running and determining change determination means for determining possible changes in the predetermined manner in the dynamic display time said determined when it is determined to be changed by the change determination means, by already said dynamic display execution means dynamic display that is A first changing means for changing the mode to a Jo Tokoro aspect, based on a new ball entrance information is acquired by the entering sphere information acquisition means is stored in the already pre-filled bulb information storage means ball entrance With respect to dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means for at least one piece of information, new entry information has been acquired by the setting means for setting to the predetermined mode and the entry information acquisition means In this case, the entry information discriminating means for discriminating based on the new entry information, and the entry that has obtained the predetermined discrimination result when the entrance information discriminating means obtains the predetermined discrimination result. A number of times suppressing means for suppressing the number of times that the dynamic display of the predetermined mode is continuously executed to a specific number of times or less before the dynamic display is started by the dynamic display executing means based on the information. .

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, further comprising launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player .

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of various counters, a reservation ball storage area, and a reservation ball execution area. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the content of the changeable period memory of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus, (b) is the schematic which shows an example of the content of RAM of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. . (A) is a schematic diagram showing an actual screen and effective line settings when the display screen is scrolled horizontally, and (b) shows an actual screen and effective line settings when the display screen is vertically scrolled. It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a miss chance eye, (b) is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a reach chance eye. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation ball | bowl storage area sequential advance process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation start process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process of the main controller and the payout controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous chance eye determination process of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display process of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the change execution time update process of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process of an audio | voice line control apparatus. It is a table | surface which shows an example of the content of the change production in case a new winning is "probability big hit" and the reception timing of a winning information command is in the period which can change a stop symbol. It is a table | surface which shows an example of the content of the fluctuating effect in case a new winning is "normal jackpot" and the receiving timing of a winning information command is in the period which can change a stop symbol. It is a table | surface which shows an example of the content of the fluctuating effect in case a new winning is a "probable big jackpot" or a "normal jackpot" and the receiving timing of a winning information command is a period during which the stop symbol cannot be changed. It is a table | surface which shows an example of the content of the fluctuating effect when a new winning is "front / rear miss reach" or "miss chance" (it does not matter the receiving timing of a winning information command). It is a flowchart which shows the main process of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the change production process of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the external interruption process of a display control apparatus.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16. On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the effect pattern of the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or changing the effect content at the reach effect.

  In addition, the front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot.

  Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs. In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. A touch sensor (not shown) for pressing, a push button type stop switch (not shown) for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by electric resistance. And a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the change of the signal. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor (not shown) is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor (not shown) changes corresponding to the operation amount. A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes according to the amount of rotation of the handle 51, and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. It is. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor (not shown) and the stop switch (not shown) are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the second ball entrance 67 (through gate), the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. In FIG. 2, a part of a nail, a metal fitting, or the like is deleted and illustrated for easy understanding of the reference numerals. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Below, the structure of the game board 13 is demonstrated.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Falling area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launching unit 112a to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  A first symbol display device 37 for mainly displaying the first symbol is disposed in the upper right portion of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right portion of FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37 is provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b.

  The LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, and the gaming state of whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a probable change, in a short time, or in a normal state is lit. , Indicating whether it is changing or not by lighting state, corresponding to the first symbol corresponding to “probability big hit” described later, the first symbol corresponding to “normal big hit”, and “out” The first symbol is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In this pachinko machine 10, three lottery results are provided as “probable big hit” of the first symbol, “normal jackpot” of the first symbol, and “miss” of the first symbol as the jackpot lottery results. . Then, when winning the first entrance 64, whether the first symbol is “probable big hit”, the first symbol “ordinary jackpot”, or the first symbol “out” A lottery will be held.

  As a result of the lottery, when the pachinko machine 10 has a “probable big hit” of the first symbol, the jackpot probability of the first symbol is increased, and the game state is easily shifted to the special gaming state. The probability of hitting the second symbol increases, and the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 (see FIG. 2) is opened for a predetermined time, so that the ball can easily enter the first entrance 64. It becomes a game state. Hereinafter, this state is referred to as “probability change (probability change state)”.

  In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 becomes the “normal jackpot” of the first symbol, the jackpot probability of the first symbol becomes a normal state, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the first entrance entrance The electric accessory attached to 64 is in an open state for a predetermined time, so that the ball is easy to enter the first entrance 64. Hereinafter, this state will be referred to as a short time (short time state), and a state other than the probability change (short time state) and the short time (short time state) will be referred to as a normal state (normal state).

  It should be noted that during the probability change or during the short time, instead of changing the winning probability of the second symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time for opening the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that an electric accessory opens | releases around the time.

  In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is “disconnected” in the first symbol, the state of the game that is neither probabilistic nor short in time (the state where neither the first symbol jackpot probability nor the second symbol hit probability is up) Become.

  In the present embodiment, the “probability jackpot” of the first symbol is a jackpot whose maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds, and then the jackpot of the first symbol (probable jackpot or normal jackpot). The interval is a jackpot (16R probability variation jackpot) in which the jackpot probability of the first symbol shifts to a high probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than usual) and the hit probability of the second symbol also increases.

  In addition, the “normal jackpot” of the 1st symbol means that after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds, the jackpot probability of the 1st symbol shifts to a low probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is normal), and a predetermined fluctuation The jackpot (16R normal jackpot) in which only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased only for the number of times (for example, 100 fluctuations).

  In the present embodiment, when the “normal big hit” of the first symbol is achieved, the hit probability of the second symbol is increased for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). However, instead, it may be configured to continue increasing the winning probability of the second symbol until the next lottery result of the first symbol is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the first symbol “probability big hit” or the first symbol “ordinary big hit” is set, the maximum number of rounds is 16 rounds, but the number of rounds is an arbitrary number (for example, , 8 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.). Further, the number of rounds may be different between the “probability big hit” of the first symbol and the “normal jackpot” of the first symbol. For example, the maximum number of rounds may be 16 rounds in the case of “probability big hit” of the first symbol, and the maximum number of rounds may be eight rounds in the case of “normal jackpot” of the first symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the “probability big hit” of the first symbol is reached, the probability of winning the second symbol is increased until the lottery result of the big jackpot of the next first symbol is determined. However, instead of this, the probability of hitting the second symbol may be increased only for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

  From now on, the “probable big jackpot” of the first symbol is simply referred to as “probable big jackpot”, the “ordinary jackpot” of the first symbol is simply referred to as “normal jackpot”, and “Out” is simply referred to as “out”.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a third symbol display device 81 configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “LCD”) that displays the third symbol in a variable manner with a winning at the first entrance 64 as a trigger. , Passing through the second entrance 67 (through gate), the second symbol display portion 83 composed of LEDs that display the second symbol in a variable manner triggered by the passage of the ball at the second entrance 67 (through gate), and the second entrance 67 (through gate) A second symbol holding lamp 84 indicating the number of balls held is provided.

  The display content of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, and for example, three symbol sequences of left, middle, and right are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are scrolled vertically or horizontally for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 7). Further, in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the variable display device unit 80 surrounds the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81 so as to surround the center frame. 86 is arranged. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 displays the first symbol indicating the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 and the lottery result of the jackpot. A decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display device 37 is performed on the third symbol display device 81. Instead of the LCD, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  In addition, in the first symbol display device 37, a ball is displayed until a stop symbol (any one of the first symbol indicating a probable big hit, the first symbol indicating a normal jackpot, or the first symbol indicating a loss) is displayed. , When winning (entering) the first entrance 64, the number of winning (entering) is suspended up to 4 times, and the number of suspensions is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, and the special figure is suspended. The number of lamps 85 that are turned on is also shown. Hereinafter, the number of suspensions for the first entrance 64 is referred to as the special figure reservation ball number N. Four special figure holding lamps 85 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holding times, and are arranged on the upper left side of the third symbol display device 81.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured so that the winning at the first entrance 64 is held up to 4 times, but the maximum holding number is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less, Or you may set to the frequency | count (for example, 8 times) of 5 times or more. Also, the special figure holding lamp 85 is deleted, and the variable display holding number based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is numerically displayed on a part of the third symbol display device 81 or divided into four areas. May be displayed in a different form (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the number of times of holding. Further, the number of suspensions may be displayed on the first symbol display device 37. In this case, the special figure hold lamp 85 may not perform the lighting display.

  Each time the sphere passes through the second entrance 67 (through gate), the second symbol display unit 83 alternates between the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as the display symbol (second symbol). The variable display to light is performed. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the variation display on the second symbol display unit 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “◯”), the electric accessory associated with the first entrance 64 is kept for a predetermined time. Only in the open state, the sphere is configured to enter the first entrance 64 easily.

  The number of passes through the second entrance 67 (through gate) of the ball is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of hold times is lit and displayed on the second symbol hold lamp 84. The second symbol variation display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display unit 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the number of times the ball is held for the second entrance 67 (through gate) is not limited to the maximum number of 4 as in the case of the first entrance 64, but is 3 times or less, or 5 You may set to the frequency | count (for example, 8 times) more than times. Moreover, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entrance switch 208a (see FIG. 4) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch 208a is turned on. Then, the main control device 110 performs a lottery lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37.

  The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball enters the general winning slot 63 are the same. However, the number may be different. For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 may be 20.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol, A stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a and a large opening opening solenoid (solenoid 209 (FIG. 4)). The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is easy to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is lit in a manner corresponding to the jackpot, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 110 controls the operation of the entire pachinko machine 10, and sends various commands to sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113, thereby controlling the operation of the sub-control device. It is something to control. Various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction. Although details will be described later, various commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 are also transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 only in one direction.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203, counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, CINI1 to CINI2 described later, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. A specific configuration of each of the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The RAM 203 stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and the work area (work area for storing various flags and counters, I / O values, etc. Area). The RAM 203 further has a reserved ball storage area 203a, a reserved ball execution area 203b, a special figure reserved ball counter 203c, and a work area 203d. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 10), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 9) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 16) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  The reserved ball storage area 203a includes a first per-random number counter C1 (see FIG. 5) and a first per-type counter C2 in accordance with the winning timing when a ball wins (enters) the first entrance 64. (See FIG. 5) and a memory for storing each value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 (see FIG. 5). In the reserved ball storage area 203a, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) corresponding to one winning to the first entrance 64 is stored (held) up to four times. The specific configuration of the reserved ball storage area 203a will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Although details will be described later, when the values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored (held) in the reserved ball storage area 203a (that is, the special figure reserved ball number N at the time of winning is less than 4). In this case, a winning information command indicating each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 stops the stop symbol based on the number N of special figure reservation balls and the values of the counters C1 to C3 indicated by the winning information command. Is continuously performed in the third symbol display device 81 (hereinafter referred to as “continuous chance eye effect”). ) Is determined. A specific example of “chance” will be described later with reference to FIGS. 8A and 8B.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment can change the stop symbol of the variable effect that has not yet started the effect to “chance”, and further, the stop symbol during the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, It is configured to be able to change to “chance eyes” during the fluctuating performance. Therefore, compared to the configuration in which only the stop symbol of the variable effect that has not yet started the production is changed to “chance eye”, the amount that the stop symbol in the variable effect can be changed to “chance eye”, that is, once more Opportunities can be displayed.

  In addition, since the stop symbol can be changed to “chance eyes” in the middle of the variation effect, when the winning information command is received, if the variation effect is being performed, a continuous chance effect can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of performing the chance chance continuous, rather than changing only the stop pattern of the fluctuation production that has not yet started the production to “chance eye”, so that the player's expectation is improved. Can do. Further, by making the stop symbol “chance eyes”, it is possible to make the player recognize that the continuous chance eyes are being produced, so that the player's interest can be attracted. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to participate in the game.

  The reserved ball execution area 203b is a memory in which data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) referred to when executing processing such as determination of jackpot or setting of display of the first symbol display device 37 is stored.

  When processing such as jackpot determination or display setting of the first symbol display device 37 is executed, the data corresponding to each winning (stored in each of the counters C1 to C3) stored in the holding ball storage area 203a described above. Of each value) is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203b. Note that the shift in this embodiment means that the data is moved from the area where the data is stored to another area. The specific configuration of the reserved ball execution area 203b will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The special figure holding ball counter 203c is a counter that counts the number of times that the first drawing hole 64 is held, that is, the number N of special figure holding balls. The special figure holding ball counter 203c has a maximum value of “4”, and is initialized to “0” when the RAM is initially set (see S113 in FIG. 9).

  In the above-described special figure holding lamp 85 (see FIG. 2), the same number of lamps as the special figure holding ball number N are turned on. More specifically, when the value of the special figure holding ball counter 203c (the number N of special figure holding balls) changes, the special figure holding after the counter value changes from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113. A hold number command indicating the value of the number N of balls is transmitted. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special lamp hold lamp 85 turns on the same number of lamps as the special figure hold ball number N indicated by the hold number command. Let

  The work area 203d is an area for storing data related to the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 (for example, counter values). The counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 are provided in the work area 203d, and the value of each counter is appropriately stored in a counter buffer provided in the work area 203d.

  Here, referring to FIG. 5, the reserved ball storage area 203a, the reserved ball execution area 203b, the counter buffer, and the counters C1 to C4 and CS1 to CS3 provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. , CINI1 to CINI2 etc. will be described. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters, the reserved ball storage area 203a, and the reserved ball execution area 203b.

  The reserved ball storage area 203a, the reserved ball execution area 203b, the counter buffer, the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, CINI1 to CINI2, and the like are used for jackpot determination and display setting of the first symbol display device 37, It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a lottery of the display result of the second symbol display unit 83 and the like.

  For the jackpot lottery or display setting of the first symbol display device 37, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the first hit type symbol counter C2 used for the jackpot symbol selection, and the stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 used for variation pattern selection are used. The second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display unit 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated (returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value).

  Each of these counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 is at an interval of 4 ms, which is an execution interval of the main process (see FIG. 10), or at an interval of 2 ms, which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer provided in the work area 203 d of the RAM 203. When executing the various control programs, when the values of the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 are referred to, the values of the counters stored in the counter buffer are referred to. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the RAM 203 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 203a and a reserved ball execution area 203b. As described above, the reserved ball storage area 203a stores each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 in accordance with the winning timing when the ball wins (enters) the first entrance 64. It is memory.

  The reserved ball storage area 203a is composed of four reserved areas (a reserved first area to a reserved fourth area). The four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the holding ball storage area 203a include a first per-random number counter storage area 203a1, a first per-type counter storage area 203a2, and a stop pattern selection counter. A storage area 203a3 is provided. The values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the storage areas 203a1 to 203a3.

  In the present embodiment, a first per-random number counter storage area 203a1, a first per-type counter storage area 203a2, and a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203a3 are provided in the reserved ball storage area 203a. The three areas 203a1, 203a2, and 203a3 are not necessarily provided in the reserved ball storage area 203a. For example, a new storage area is provided separately from the reserved ball storage area 203a, and a part of the three areas 203a1, 203a2, 203a3 is provided in the reserved ball storage area 203a, and the rest are newly stored. It may be provided in the area.

  As described above, in the reserved ball storage area 203a, data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 is stored up to four times. In that case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the reserved first area.

  On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203b is composed of only one area. The reserved ball execution area 203b is provided with a first per-random number counter storage area 203b1, a first per-type counter storage area 203b2, and a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 11, when the big win lottery is started, the stored balls are stored in the reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area 203a by the forward holding ball storage area forward process (see FIG. 12). Data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) is shifted to each area 203b1 to 203b3 of the reserved ball execution area 203b. Then, the data shifted to the holding ball execution area 203b is referred to in the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 13), and the lottery winning result is determined based on the reference data, and the fluctuation display and stop corresponding to the lottery result are performed. The display is performed on the first symbol display device 37 or the like.

  More specifically, when the big hit lottery is started, the random number value in the first per-random number counter storage area 203a1 in the holding first area is transferred to the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1 in the holding ball execution area 203b. Shifted. Similarly, the random number value in the first hit type counter storage area 203a2 is shifted to the first hit type counter storage area 203b2, and the random number value in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203a3 is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3. The

  When the shift of the data to the reserved ball execution area 203b is completed, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that each area of the reserved ball storage area 203a is obtained by a reserved ball storage area forward feed process (see FIG. 12) described later. Shift processing is performed in which data stored (suspended) in (second to fourth) is packed into an area (first to third) having a smaller area number. In the present embodiment, data is shifted only in the reserved area (second to fourth) in which data is stored (held) in the reserved ball storage area 203a.

  Here, the data shift in the reserved ball storage area 203a will be described. For example, it is assumed that the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 203c is “4” and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the reservation ball storage area 203a. In this state, the data in the reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203b, and when the reserved first area becomes empty, the data in the other areas (second to fourth) are each assigned the area number 1. It is shifted to a small area (first to third). That is, the data in the reserved second area is shifted to the reserved first area, the data in the reserved third area is shifted to the reserved second area, and the data in the reserved fourth area is shifted to the reserved third area. .

  For example, if the value of the special figure holding ball counter 203c is “2”, only the data in the holding second area is shifted to the holding first area, and the data shift is thus completed. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the data shift process is not performed for the reserved areas (second to fourth) in which data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

  In addition, you may comprise so that each data of a reservation area (2nd-4th) may be shifted to the area where an area number is one smaller irrespective of the presence or absence of data, respectively. In that case, since it is not necessary to determine whether data is stored (held) in the holding area (second to fourth), the number of steps of the program can be reduced. Therefore, since the capacity of the program can be reduced, the free capacity of the ROM 202 can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, the number of data (holding number) stored in the holding ball storage area 203a is counted by the special figure holding number counter 203c, and a new winning is made at the first entrance 64. If it occurs, data corresponding to the new winning is stored in the holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) according to the value (special figure holding ball number N) indicated by the special figure holding number counter 203c. doing.

  Therefore, in the reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the new winning is not overwritten on the data stored (held) in the reserved area, so that data is transferred from the shift source area to the shift destination area. After shifting, the data of the shift source area can be left as it is without being cleared. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden as compared with the case of clearing the data of the shift source area after the data shift. Note that the data in the shift source area may be cleared after the data is shifted from the shift source area to the shift destination area.

  Next, each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is configured so that, for example, 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 738, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 738), it returns to 0. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first per-random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 738), and executes timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14). It is updated once every time and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 10).

  The value of the first per-random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the stored ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a. There are two types of random numbers to be jackpots: low probability (normal hit probability is normal) and high probability (high hit probability is higher than normal). Low probability (big hit probability) There are two types of random number values that are jackpots in the normal state), the values are “373,727”, and the random number values that are jackpots at the time of high probability (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than normal) are 13 The type is “59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 367, 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 733”. It should be noted that a table (not shown) storing random number values for determining whether or not a big hit is obtained from the value of the first random number counter C1 (random number value) is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113. Are provided in the ROM 222.

  In the present embodiment, each value of each counter C1 to C3 is transmitted by transmitting a winning information command from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, but each value of each counter C1 to C3 is transmitted. Instead, a lottery result based on each value of each counter C1 to C3 may be transmitted. More specifically, when each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired, the lottery based on each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is completed in the main controller 110, and the lottery result (for example, “probability big hit”, “normal” A winning information command indicating a “hit”, “normally missed”, “missed reach”, “missed super reach”, etc.) is transmitted. With this configuration, since it is not necessary to determine whether or not the jackpot is in the sound lamp control device 113, a table (not shown) storing random numbers for determining whether or not the jackpot is not stored in the ROM 222. It is possible to increase the free space of the ROM 222.

  Further, since it is not necessary to output each value (random number value) of each counter C1 to C3 from the main controller 110, a signal output from the main controller 110 is illegally stolen and each counter C1 to C3 Each value (random value) can be prevented from being analyzed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an analysis of an important random number value such as a random number value for determining whether or not a big hit is made from a signal output from the main controller 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the type of jackpot (whether it is a promiscuous jackpot or a normal jackpot), and in the present embodiment, one is added in order within a range of 0 to 4. Then, after reaching the maximum value (that is, 4), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interruption process in this embodiment), and the stored ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the area 203a. The value of the random number that becomes “high probability state (probability variation jackpot) after the jackpot end” is “1, 2, 3”, and the value of the random number that becomes “low probability state (normal jackpot) after the jackpot end” is “0,4 And two types of hits are determined. Therefore, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 includes a display mode corresponding to two types of jackpots, “probable big jackpot” and “normal jackpot”, and one type corresponding to a loss. Any one of the three display modes in total with the display mode is selected.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that “big hit” and “high probability state (probability change big hit) after the big hit” based on the data acquired at the timing when the ball has won the first entrance 64 Is “probable jackpot”, and “normal jackpot” is determined when it is determined as “big jackpot” and “low probability state after normal jackpot (normal jackpot)”. In addition, a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether it is a normal big hit or a probable big hit from the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 and the sound lamp control. They are provided in the ROM 222 of the device 113, respectively.

  As described above, if the winning information command indicating the lottery result is transmitted instead of each value of each of the counters C1 to C3, the audio lamp control device 113 does not determine whether it is a normal big hit or a probable big hit. Therefore, it is not necessary to store in the ROM 222 a table (not shown) that stores random numbers for determining whether it is a normal jackpot or a probabilistic jackpot, and the free space of the ROM 222 can be increased.

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the effect pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reaching, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. “Stop before and after detachment reach” (for example, a range of 0 to 8), and “Leach other than detachment before and after detachment” (for example, a range of 9 to 38) where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach design after reach has occurred “No chance to miss (one of misses)” (for example, 39 to 49) when three identical symbols are displayed, but no reach, but “completely missed” (for example, 39 to 49) 4 stop (effect) patterns (modes of dynamic display results) are selected.

  Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 8, in the present embodiment, as the stop symbol of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in addition to “the chance to miss”, “reach chance” “Eye” has a chance eye. As described above, the “disappearance chance” is a stop symbol in which no reach occurs but three identical symbols are displayed and stopped. The “reach chance eyes” is a stop symbol that is displayed when an out-of-bounds reach occurs in a variable effect when a continuous chance eye effect is being performed. It is a stop symbol to stop. In the following description, when both “off chance chance” and “reach chance eye” are indicated, or only one of them is indicated, it is simply described as “chance eye”.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once every timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. 203a.

  A table (not shown) referred to for selecting a stop pattern from the value (random value) of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 and in the ROM 222 of the sound lamp controller 113. The stop pattern is selected based on this table and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Note that such a table is provided with a plurality of tables so that the range of values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 that can take one stop pattern is different. This is because the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than normal), a low probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is normal), a special figure pending number counter This is because the selection ratio of each stop pattern is changed according to the value of 203c (number of special figure reservation balls N) or the like.

  For example, in a high-probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than normal), it is easy to generate a jackpot, and the range of random number values corresponding to the stop pattern “completely out” is 14 so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. A table as wide as ˜238 is selected, and “completely out” is easily selected. In this table, the range of random values for “front / rear out of reach” is narrowed to 0-5, the range of random values for “non-front / rear out of reach” is also narrowed to 6-9, The range of random values of “one of the above” is also narrowed to 10 to 13, and “rear out of front / rear reach”, “reach other than out of front / rear out”, and “miss chance” are difficult to select.

  In addition, when each random value is not stored (held) in the reserved ball storage area 203a in a low probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is normal), the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 is secured. For this reason, a table having a narrow random value range of 61 to 238 corresponding to the stop pattern of “completely out” is selected, and it is difficult to select “completely out”. In this table, the range of random values of “rear out of front / rear” is 0 to 8, the range of random values of “reach other than out of front / rear” is as wide as 9 to 50, and the range of random values of “off chance”. Are 51 to 61, and it is easy to select “reach other than front / rear disengagement”. Therefore, in the low probability state (the state where the big hit probability is normal), it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64, and therefore, the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is easily performed continuously. .

  Next, the three variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 will be described. First, the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2 will be described. One variation type counter CS1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. The other variation type counter CS2 Within the range of 0 to 240, 1 is added in order, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 240), it returns to 0. In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as “first variation type counter”, and CS2 is also referred to as “second variation type counter”.

  Rough display modes (variation effect patterns) such as so-called normal reach (20-second effect), super reach (30-second effect), premium reach (60-second effect), and the like are determined by the first variation type counter CS1. . Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. In addition, the second variation type counter CS2 determines the variation time (in other words, the symbol (medium symbol) of the middle symbol row Z2 or the middle symbol row Z2 ′ in this embodiment) after the reach has occurred until it stops. The number of variable symbols) is determined. Then, based on the variation time determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, the display control device 114 determines the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode.

  Therefore, a variety of variation patterns can be easily realized by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2. The values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 10) described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. In the present embodiment, the symbol variation mode is determined by the combination of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2. However, the symbol variation mode is determined only by the first variation type counter CS1, or the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol are determined. It is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode in the same way.

  Here, a table (not shown) in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is associated with the type of display mode is provided in the ROM 202, and the type of display mode is determined from the value of the variation type counter CS1. When selecting (variation effect pattern), such a table is referred to. Similarly, a table (not shown) for selecting a change time (number of change symbols) from the value of the change type counter CS2 (random number value) until the last stop symbol stops is also provided in the ROM 202.

  Next, the variation type counter CS3 will be described. For example, the value of the variation type counter CS3 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 162, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 162). In the following description, CS3 is also referred to as a “third variation type counter”. The 3rd symbol display device 81 of this Embodiment performs the decorative production according to the display mode of the 1st symbol display device 37, and can slide the symbol which is changing in addition to the variation of a symbol. A notice effect such as passing a notice character for notifying the occurrence of the reach effect is performed. The effect pattern of the notice effect is selected by the variation type counter CS3.

  Specifically, the time required for the notice effect is added to the fluctuation time (for example, +1 second, +2 seconds, etc.), and conversely, the fluctuation time is subtracted in order to shorten the fluctuation display time (for example, − 1 second) or an effect pattern that does not add or subtract the fluctuation time.

  As in the case of the stop pattern selection counter C3 described above, the variation type counter CS3 also has a plurality of stop patterns selected with respect to the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS3. The table is provided. That is, whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than normal), a low probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is normal), a special figure holding number counter 203c Depending on the value (number of special figure reservation balls N) and the like, tables with different selection ratios of each effect pattern are provided. Such a table (not shown) is provided in the ROM 202 similarly to the variation type counters CS1 and CS2.

  As described above, the variation time of the symbol variation is determined by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, and the time to be added to or subtracted from the variation time is determined by the variation type counter CS3. Therefore, the final fluctuation time until the final stop symbol stops is determined by the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and the second entrance 67 (through gate) on either the left or right side of the ball is updated. Acquired when it is detected that the image has passed. There are 149 types of random numbers to be selected, and the range is “5 to 153”. Note that a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether or not to win from the value of the second random number counter C4 (random number value) is provided in the ROM 202.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second per-random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14). In addition to being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 10).

  Here, returning to FIG. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display unit 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and the like. A variety of switches 208 and a solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a as an axis, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the like are connected.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up.

  As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 16) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, on the condition that the touch sensor (not shown) detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated), The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 sets the sound output in the sound output device (speaker not shown) 226, the setting of the number of lamps to be lit in the special figure holding lamp 85, the lamps in the lighting units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, and the like. It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as setting of turning on and off, changing effect and jackpot effect. These controls are executed based on various commands transmitted from the main controller 110. For example, the control regarding the lighting and extinguishing of the lamp in the special figure hold lamp 85 is executed based on the hold number command transmitted from the main control device 110.

  The sound lamp control device 113 is equipped with an MPU 221 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 221 incorporates various circuits such as a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory. An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the special figure holding lamp 85, the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, and the like.

  The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 has a changeable period memory 222a. The changeable period memory 222a stores a period (hereinafter, referred to as “changeable period”) in which the change symbol of the variation effect started to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 can be changed.

  Here, the changeable period memory 222a of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the contents of the changeable period memory 222a of the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. The changeable period memory 222a is a memory in which the changeable period of the changing effect started to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 is stored.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, for example, as a variation effect pattern, for example, a variation effect for detachment (11 seconds), a variation effect for normal reach (20 seconds), a variation effect for super reach (30 seconds), Fluctuation effects (60 seconds) for premium reach are provided. Note that the overall time of the variation effect differs for each variation effect pattern, but the time until the first and second symbol sequences are stopped is common (10 seconds).

  For example, in the variation effect for 11 seconds for detachment, as soon as the effect is started, the three symbol strings (Z1 to Z3 or Z1 ′ to Z3 ′, see FIG. 7) each change at high speed, and 1 The first symbol sequence stops after 9 seconds, the second symbol sequence stops after 10 seconds, and the last symbol sequence stops after 11 seconds. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the changeable period memory 222a stores the changeable period as 8 seconds from the start of the change in which the first symbol sequence is still changing at high speed.

  In addition, among the 11-second variation effects for detachment, the first symbol from 8 seconds to 9 seconds is switched from high-speed variation to medium-speed variation, and then controlled by switching to low-speed variation and stopping. This is a margin period provided for reliably executing (following) the processing. Therefore, depending on the content of the control process (for example, when the control burden is small), the changeable period may be close to 9 seconds. In that case, since the changeable period can be secured for a long time, it is possible to further increase the chances of performing the continuous chance effect.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when an execution variation effect (11 seconds) is started while the continuous chance effect is being performed, “Early chance” is displayed. Specifically, the first symbol row, the second symbol row, and the third symbol row stop in order, and “disappearance chance” is displayed after 11 seconds. Similarly, when the off-stage variation effect (11 seconds) is being executed and the continuous chance eye effect is started when the change-over period is within the changeable period, The “Exit chance” is displayed.

  On the other hand, when a continuous production for a normal reach (20 seconds), a super reach (30 seconds), or a premium reach (60 seconds) is started while a continuous chance eye effect is being performed The display is performed according to the stop symbol pattern of the variation effect. Specifically, if the stop pattern pattern of the variation effect is out of reach (“rear out of front / rear reach” or “reach other than out of front / rear out”), the “reach chance” is displayed in the change effect.

  For example, first, the first symbol sequence, the second symbol sequence stop in turn, reach occurs 10 seconds later, and then reach effect is performed at a time corresponding to each variation effect pattern, Finally, the third symbol row stops and “reach chance” is displayed. That is, the “reach chance” is displayed after the reach effect of each variation effect. In addition, if the stop pattern pattern of the variation effect is a hit (“probable big hit” or “ordinary big hit”), the “off chance chance (or reach chance eye)” is displayed in the first 11 seconds of the fluctuation effect. Then, the development effect is performed, and the stop symbol corresponding to “probable big jackpot” or “normal jackpot” is displayed.

  In addition, when each variation effect (for normal reach, for super reach, for premium reach) is being executed and within the changeable period, the variation chance effect is similarly started. Display is performed in accordance with the stop symbol pattern. Specifically, if the stop pattern pattern of the variation effect is out of reach (“rear out of front / rear reach” or “reach other than out of front / rear out”), the “reach chance” is displayed in the change effect. That is, the “reach chance” is displayed after the reach effect of each variation effect being executed. In addition, if the stop pattern pattern of the variation effect is a hit (“probable big hit” or “ordinary big hit”), the “off chance chance (or reach chance eye)” is displayed in the first 11 seconds of the fluctuation effect. Then, the development effect is performed, and the stop symbol corresponding to “probable big jackpot” or “normal jackpot” is displayed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the changeable periods are all set to the same time (8 seconds) regardless of the variation effect pattern, but even if the changeable period is changed for each variation effect pattern. good. For example, for each variation effect pattern, the changeable period is changed for each variation effect pattern by changing the time from the start of variation until the first symbol sequence switches from high speed variation to medium speed variation. You may let them.

  Here, returning to FIG. The RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores the stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 221 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 221 are stored, and various flags, counters, and I / O values. Working area (working area). Further, the RAM 223 includes various memories, flags, counters, and the like.

  Here, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6B is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of the contents of the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  The RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 includes a special figure holding ball counter 223a, a continuous chance eye counter 223b, a high probability state flag 223c, a chance eye display skip flag 223d, a stop symbol changeable flag 223e, and a change start flag. 223f, variable time memory 223g, stop symbol pattern memory 223h, variable time timer 223i, winning information memory 223j, acquisition waiting command memory 223k, and command storage area 223l.

  The special figure holding ball counter 223a is a counter that counts the number of times the winning is held for the first entrance 64 (the number N of special figure holding balls). The special figure holding ball counter 223a has a maximum value of “4”, and is initialized to “0” when an initial value of the RAM is set (see S1011 in FIG. 19). The value of the special figure holding ball counter 223a (the number N of special figure holding balls) is determined when a winning information command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1206 in FIG. 21) or the third symbol display device. 81 is updated when the start of the variable display is instructed (see S1420 in FIG. 23).

  The continuous chance counter 223b is a counter that indicates the number of times that a variable effect with a stop symbol as a chance is performed continuously when the third symbol display device 81 executes a continuous chance effect. The continuous chance eye counter 223b is set when a continuous chance eye effect is started, and is decremented by 1 each time a variable effect with a stop symbol as an opportunity is executed. In other words, until the value of the continuous chance eye counter 223b becomes 0, the variation effect using the stop symbol as the chance eye is continuously performed.

  When analyzing the lottery result from the received winning information command, the high probability state flag 223c analyzes the winning information command as if the jackpot probability is a high probability state, or the jackpot probability is a low probability state (normal state) It is a flag indicating whether to analyze as being. When the high probability state flag 223c is on, the winning information command is analyzed assuming that the jackpot probability is high, and when the high probability state flag 223c is off, the winning information is determined that the jackpot probability is low. The command is parsed.

  In a general pachinko machine, when a jackpot lottery is performed, and the lottery result is “probable big jackpot”, the jackpot probability is high until the next big jackpot (probable big jackpot or normal jackpot). Transition to a probability state (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than usual). On the other hand, when the lottery result is “ordinary jackpot” or “off”, the jackpot probability shifts to a normal state.

  That is, the jackpot probability of the next jackpot lottery is determined by the latest jackpot lottery result. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 of the present embodiment analyzes the winning information commands in the order received, and further updates the state of the high probability state flag 223c in accordance with the analyzed lottery result.

  Thereby, the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) indicated by the received winning information command is still held in the holding ball storage area 203a in the main control device 110, and the lottery result has not yet been determined. Even if it is (each value of each counter C1-C3), the data can be analyzed based on the state of the high probability state flag 223c. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can accurately analyze the lottery result before the main control device 110.

  The chance eye display skip flag 223d is a flag indicating whether or not to skip the variation effect having the stop symbol as the chance symbol when the third symbol display device 81 executes the continuous chance eye effect. Note that, instead of skipping the variation effect itself, the stop symbol is simply changed to a stop symbol other than the chance symbol.

  When the chance eye display skip flag 223d is on, the stop effect of the changing effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 is set to a stop symbol other than the chance eye, and the flag is set to off. When the chance eye display skip flag 223d is off, the stop effect of the changing effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 is set according to the value of the continuous chance eye counter 223b.

  The chance eye display skip flag 223d is set to ON when the last variation effect in the continuous chance effect is executed. Although details will be described later, this is to prevent the continuous chance eye effect from being performed after the continuous chance eye effect is finished. In addition, when the variation effect with the stop symbol as an opportunity can be performed four times continuously, it is also set to ON when the maximum number of continuous effects is limited to three times (see S1319 in FIG. 22).

  The stop symbol changeable flag 223e is a flag indicating whether or not the stop symbol of the variation effect started to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 can be changed. While the stop symbol changeable flag 223e is on, the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 can be changed (that is, within the period during which the stop symbol can be changed). On the other hand, when the stop symbol changeable flag 223e is off, it is a case where the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed cannot be changed. Specifically, the period during which the stop symbol can be changed is exceeded or the variation effect is executed. For example, it is not done.

  The variation start flag 223f is a flag that is turned on when the main control device 110 is instructed to start the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, and is turned off when the variation effect is started. Specifically, the variation start flag 223f is set to ON when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1210 in FIG. 21), and the third symbol display device 81 produces a variation effect. When the variable display process for starting (see S1110 in FIG. 20) is started, it is set to off (see S1402 in FIG. 23).

  The variation time memory 223g is a memory in which the variation time of the variation effect to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 is stored. When the variation pattern command and the effect time addition command transmitted from the main controller 110 are received, the variation time is stored in the variation time memory 223g (see S1211 in FIG. 21).

  The variation pattern command is a command indicating a variation effect pattern to be executed (normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc.), and the effect time addition command is a notification effect pattern of the variation effect to be executed. It is a command. As described above, in this embodiment, the variation time is determined for each variation effect pattern, and the extension time and the reduction time are determined for each notification effect pattern. Therefore, the variation time memory 223g stores the total time of the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern command and the extension time (shortening time) corresponding to the effect time addition command.

  The stop symbol pattern memory 223h is a memory in which a stop symbol pattern of a variation effect to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 is stored. More specifically, in the stop symbol pattern memory 223h, “probability big hit”, “normal big hit”, “front / rear miss reach”, “reach other than front / rear miss”, “off chance chance (one of miss)”, “ One of the six stop (production) patterns of “completely off” is stored (see S1213 in FIG. 21).

  The variation time timer 223i is a memory in which an elapsed time since the execution of the variation effect is started in the third symbol display device 81 is stored. The winning information memory 223j is a memory for storing each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-kind counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 indicated by the received winning information command (see S1205 in FIG. 21). .

  The acquisition standby command memory 223k is a memory for storing the winning information commands received during the continuous chance effect production in the order of reception (see S1203 in FIG. 21). The acquisition standby command memory 223k is configured by a ring buffer, and is configured to read and write data by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. Therefore, when a winning information command is extracted (read), The process according to the winning information command is executed in the order received.

  If a winning information command is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k, the received winning information command is acquired when the winning information command is received, regardless of whether or not the consecutive chance eyes are being produced. It is stored in the standby command memory 223k (see S1202 in FIG. 21). This is to process the winning information command in the order received. Also, the winning information command processed by the MPU 221 is deleted from the acquisition standby command memory 223k.

  The command storage area 223l is an area for temporarily storing various commands transmitted from the main controller 110, including winning information commands. The command transmitted from main controller 110 is first stored in this command storage area 223l (see FIG. 25). The MPU 221 acquires commands one by one from the command storage area 223l and executes processing according to the acquired commands. Like the acquisition standby command memory 223k, this command storage area 223l is configured by a ring buffer and configured to read and write data by the FIFO method, so that processing corresponding to various commands is performed in the order of received commands. Executed.

  Note that the command processed by the MPU 221 is deleted from the command storage area 223l. Further, the command storage area 223l and the acquisition standby command memory 223k may be configured by a buffer other than the ring buffer as long as data can be read and written in the FIFO format.

  The display control device 114 controls a variation effect (variation display) and a jackpot effect of the third symbol on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and bus lines 239 and 240. have. The input side of the input port 237 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 237 is connected to the MPU 231, ROM 232, work RAM 233, and image controller 236. A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236, and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 238. Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probabilities and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is available. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common part to reduce the cost.

  The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on a display variation pattern command, a display stop symbol command, etc. output from the sound lamp control device 113. The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various programs, and includes a change start flag 233a and a change time counter 233b.

  The variation start flag 233a is a flag that is turned on when the voice lamp control device 113 instructs the start of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, the variation start flag 233a is set to ON when a variation pattern command for display instructing a variation effect or a jackpot effect set by the sound lamp control device 113 is received from the sound lamp control device 113. (Refer to S1802 in FIG. 32), when the variation effect (variation display) is started in the third symbol display device 81, it is set to off (see S1703 in FIG. 31). The variation time counter 233b is a counter that stores an elapsed time since the variation effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 235 is a memory in which data for effects such as symbols (background symbols, third symbols, and decorative symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are stored in a compressed format. The character ROM 235 stores, for example, effect data for normal reach, effect data for super reach, effect data for premium reach, a character design of the third design, a background design, a notice character design, and the like. ing.

  The character ROM 235 stores the effect data as described above in a compressed state in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In the present embodiment, the production data is composed of approximately 1024 Mbytes, and the approximately 1024 Mbytes of data is compressed to approximately 768 Mbytes and stored in the character ROM 235. Only the necessary presentation data compressed and stored in the character ROM 235 is read and decompressed, and then written in a predetermined area of the video RAM 234.

  The video RAM 234 is a memory for storing effect data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a decompressed state (a state where it can be used immediately). The video RAM 234 has a change effect storage area 234a and a stop effect storage area 234b.

  The storage area for variation effect 234a is a memory for storing variation effect data for performing a variation effect such as high-speed variation in the third symbol display device 81, and the storage region for stop effect 234b is a memory for the third symbol display device. 81 is a memory for storing stop effect data for performing a stop effect to display a stop symbol at 81;

  In the present embodiment, the variation effect for one time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is performed based on the variation effect data and the stop effect data. Although details will be described later, when the variation effect is started, first, an image corresponding to the variation effect data (variation effect) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the time. Then, an image corresponding to the stop effect data (stop effect) is displayed according to time (see S1708 and S1709 in FIG. 31).

  When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 reads the variation effect data corresponding to the received command from the character ROM 235, and this variation effect storage area 234a. (See S1803 in FIG. 32). On the other hand, when a display stop symbol command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received, stop effect data corresponding to the received command is read from the character ROM 235 and stored in the stop effect storage area 234b ( (See S1805 in FIG. 32).

  Further, when the display control device 114 receives the stop symbol change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 reads out stop effect data having the stop symbol as “chance eye” from the character ROM 235, and for this stop effect. The storage area 234b is overwritten (rewritten) (see S1807 in FIG. 32). Thereby, the stop symbol set before the start of the variation effect can be changed after the variation effect is started in the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 (that is, in the middle of the variation effect).

  The reason why the effect data is read from the character ROM 235 and stored in the change effect storage area 234a and the stop effect storage area 234b is that the processing speed of the RAM is generally higher than that of the ROM. For example, when the presentation data is displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 while being read from the character ROM 235, when the amount of data to be read is large, the reading has time, and a smooth display cannot be achieved or the image is clear. This is because the display may not be possible. This is also because the processing of the display data (for example, changing the size of the decorative design or changing the color of the background design) is easier when stored in the RAM.

  The image controller 236 adjusts the timings of the MPU 231, the video RAM 234, and the output port 238 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing to read the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, and drives various switches 208, solenoids such as a solenoid 209, motors and the like, a voltage of 12 volts, and 5 for logic. A volt voltage, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and among these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage, the voltages required by the control devices 110 to 114 are supplied to each.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 16).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data in the RAM 203 and issues a payout initialization command for causing the payout controller 111 to clear the backup data. It transmits to the payout control device 111.

  Next, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 7A is a schematic diagram showing an actual screen and effective line setting when the display screen is horizontally scrolled. FIG. 7B is a schematic diagram showing an actual screen and effective line setting when the display screen is scrolled vertically.

  The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols consisting of 10 types of character symbols corresponding to the numbers from “0” to “9”, and one type of sub symbol formed smaller than this main symbol (in this embodiment). , Shell picture). These main symbols and sub symbols constitute a symbol row by arranging main symbols in ascending or descending order of numbers and arranging sub symbols between the main symbols.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed, and a big hit occurs after the variable display is finished. It is configured as follows. When shifting to a “high probability state (probability variation jackpot) after the jackpot end”, a variable display in which main symbols corresponding to odd numbers (corresponding to “high probability symbols”) are arranged is performed. On the other hand, when shifting to the “low probability state after normal jackpot (normal jackpot)”, a variable display is performed in which main symbols corresponding to even numbers (corresponding to “low probability symbols”) are aligned.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the direction of the variable display (vertical scroll or horizontal scroll) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is the first per random number counter storage area of the reserved ball execution area 203b. It is configured to change according to the value of 203b1.

  Specifically, when the value of the first random number counter storage area 203b1 in the reserved ball execution area 203b is an even number, as shown in FIG. 7A, the main symbol and the sub-symbol are displayed for each symbol row. The display is variably displayed so as to scroll (horizontal scroll) from right to left (arrow X direction) with periodicity. As shown in FIG. 7A, at the time of such horizontal scrolling, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper, middle, and lower are displayed for each symbol row. In this case, the upper symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbol appear in ascending order. ing.

  On the other hand, when the value of the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1 in the reserved ball execution area 203b is an odd number, as shown in FIG. 7B, the main symbol and the sub-symbol are periodic for each symbol row. Is displayed so as to scroll (vertically scroll) from top to bottom (arrow Y direction). As shown in FIG. 7B, at the time of such vertical scrolling, three symbol rows Z1 ', Z2', and Z3 'are displayed for each symbol row. In this case, in the left symbol row Z1 ′, the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 ′ and the right symbol row Z1 ′, the numbers of the main symbol appear in ascending order. Is arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 7A and FIG. 7B, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 has a left, middle, and right for each symbol row (Z1 to Z3 or Z1 ′ to Z3 ′), respectively. The third symbol is displayed on the right or the top, middle, and bottom three levels. Accordingly, the third symbol display device 81 displays a total of nine third symbols of 3 rows × 3 columns.

  Here, five valid lines are set on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in both cases of vertical scrolling and horizontal scrolling. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7A, at the time of horizontal scrolling, five lines of a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right rising line L4, and a left rising line L5 are set as effective lines. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 7B, at the time of vertical scrolling, five lines of an upper line L1 ′, a middle line L2 ′, a lower line L3 ′, a right rising line L4 ′, and a left rising line L5 ′ are effective lines. Is set.

  In each game, when the combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) is aligned on one of the active lines when the variable display scrolling vertically or horizontally is stopped, the jackpot is set as the jackpot A video is displayed. In the case of horizontal scrolling (FIG. 7A), the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1, the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2, and in the case of vertical scrolling (FIG. 7B). The variable display stops in the order of left symbol row Z1 ′ → right symbol row Z3 ′ → middle symbol row Z2 ′.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 8A and 8B, the “chance eyes (missing chance eyes, reach chance eyes)” displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIGS. 8A and 8B show an example of a stop symbol when the direction of change of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is horizontally scrolled. FIG. 8A is a schematic diagram showing an example of the “miss chance” displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 8B shows the “reach” displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a "chance eye".

  First, the “off chance chance” will be described. As described above, the “miss chance” is a stop pattern in which three identical symbols are displayed but stopped without reaching. In FIG. 8A, the symbol “turtle” is displayed on the left line L1 of the upper symbol row Z1, the right line L3 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the middle line L2 of the lower symbol row Z3. Reach has not occurred in any of the five effective lines L1 to L5.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, a reach is not generated, and a stop symbol on which three identical symbols (here, “turtle”) are displayed is regarded as a “miss chance”. In the example shown in FIG. 8A, the same symbol displayed in each of the upper, middle, and lower symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 is “turtle”. A pattern (for example, “shark” or “octopus”) may be used.

  Next, the “reach chance” will be described. As described above, the “reach chance” is a stop symbol that stops after three reachable symbols are displayed after a reach has occurred. In FIG. 8B, the symbol “turtle” is displayed on the left line L1 of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle line L2 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the left line L1 of the lower symbol row Z3. Therefore, among the five effective lines L1 to L5, reach occurs in the effective line L1, but it is not a hit.

  In this embodiment, the reach is generated, but it is not a hit, and the stop symbol in which three identical symbols (here, “turtle”) are displayed is the “reach chance”. It is said. Similar to the example shown in FIG. 8A, the same symbol may be another symbol (for example, “shark” or “octopus”) as long as the symbol is the same.

  Further, the above-mentioned “disappearance chance eyes” shown in FIG. 8A and “reach chance eyes” shown in FIG. 8B are examples, and the stop positions of the same symbol are not limited thereto. For example, if the same symbol is displayed on the right line L3 of the upper symbol row Z1, the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the middle line L2 of the lower symbol row Z3, it is a “miss chance”. Further, when the same symbol is displayed on the left line L1 of the upper symbol row Z1, the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the right line L3 of the lower symbol row Z3, it is “reach chance”.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 9 to 16. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process (see FIG. 9) that is started when the power is turned on, a main process (see FIG. 10) that is executed after the startup process, and a regular (this embodiment) In the form, there are a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) activated at a cycle of 2 ms) and an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 16) activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. First, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described, and then startup processing and main processing will be described.

  First, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process of main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a process that is repeatedly executed by the MPU 201 at a cycle of 2 ms, for example. In the timer interrupt process, first, various switch reading processes are executed (S501). Here, for example, the state of various switches 208 connected to the main control device 110 is read and provided in various winning ports (general winning port 63, specific winning port 65a, first winning port 64, etc.). When a winning is detected in the switch, a winning ball command for causing the payout control device 111 to pay out the balls having the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening is set (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM 203.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S502). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the first initial value random number counter buffer provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 The updated value is stored in a second initial value random number counter buffer provided in the work area 203 d of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are updated (S503). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and those counter values are the maximum values (this embodiment In the embodiment, when it reaches 738, 4, 238, 250), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in buffers corresponding to the counters C1 to C4 provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203.

  After that, the start winning process (see FIG. 15) accompanying the winning at the first entrance 64 is executed (S504), the firing control process is executed (S505), and the timer interruption process is ended. The firing control process is performed on the condition that a stop switch (not shown) for stopping the firing is not operated by detecting that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with a touch sensor (not shown). This is a process for determining on / off of the firing of the sphere. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the start winning process (S504) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S504). The start winning process (S504) is a process for storing (holding) the data corresponding to the winning in the holding ball storage area 203a when the winning to the first winning slot 64 is detected. This is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14).

  In this start winning process (S504), first, the state (on or off) of the first entrance switch 208a is read to determine whether or not the ball has won (entered) the first entrance 64 ( S651). In the processing of S651, if it is determined that the first entrance switch 208a is off and there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S651: No), this is performed without performing anything. The start winning process (S504) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14).

  On the other hand, when the state of the first entrance switch 208a is on and it is determined that the ball has won (entered) the first entrance 64 (S651: Yes), the special figure holding ball counter It is determined whether or not the value 203c (number of special figure holding balls N) is less than a predetermined upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S652).

  In the process of S652, when the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 203c (number of special figure reservation balls N) is 4, that is, when the upper limit value has already been reached (S652: No), S653 to S657. Each process is skipped, the start winning process (S504) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14). On the other hand, if the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 203c (number N of special figure reservation balls) is less than 4 in the processing of S652 (S652: Yes), 1 is added to the special figure reservation ball counter 203c (S653).

  Next, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 updated by the processing of S503 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14) are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. Are stored in each of the storage areas 203a1 to 203a3 in the area corresponding to the number N of special figure reservation balls (S654).

  For example, when the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 203c (the number N of special figure reservation balls) updated by the processing of S653 is “1”, each storage area 203a1 to 203a3 of the hold first area has each counter Each value of C1 to C3 is stored. That is, if the special figure holding ball number N is “X”, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the storage areas 203a1 to 203a3 of the holding X area.

  Next, a winning information command indicating each stored value of each of the counters C <b> 1 to C <b> 3 is output to the sound lamp control device 113. Here, the winning information command is immediately output to the sound lamp control device 113 without waiting for the external output processing (see S201 in FIG. 10) of the main processing (S655). Since the main process is executed every 4 ms, the command can be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 at a maximum of about 4 ms if the winning information command is transmitted immediately.

  Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility of changing the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81, compared to the case where the winning information command is output at the execution timing of the next main process. In addition, since the voice lamp control device 113 can receive the winning information command and other commands (for example, the hold number command) at different timings, the processing corresponding to each command can be executed at different timings. , The control burden can be distributed. In addition, since the main control device 110 can separately transmit the ball entry information command and other commands to the sound lamp control means 113, it is possible to distribute the control burden compared to the case of transmitting at the same timing. it can.

  In this embodiment, the winning information command is output immediately. However, here, only the setting of the winning information command is performed and output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process at the execution timing of the next main process. You may comprise so that it may do.

  Then, a hold number command is set (S656). Here, a hold number command indicating the value of the special figure hold number counter 203c (special figure hold ball number N) is set. The hold number command set here is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S201 at the execution timing of the next main process (see FIG. 10). When the output hold number command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the same number of lamps as the special figure hold ball number N indicated by the hold number command are turned on in the special figure hold lamp 85.

  Next, the LED 37a in the first symbol display device 37 is turned on according to the value of the special figure holding ball counter 203c (number of special figure holding balls N), and the new holding number is indicated by the lighting state (S657). When the process of S657 is completed, the start winning process (S504) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14).

  According to the start winning process (S504) in FIG. 15 described above, when a winning to the first winning slot 64 is detected by the first winning slot switch 208a, data corresponding to the winning (each counter C1) (Each value of .about.C3) can be stored in the area with the smallest area number among the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the holding ball storage area 203a. Therefore, in the reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the older winnings can be stored in the area with the smaller area number. Therefore, the data is given with the temporal winning order (winning order). Can be remembered.

  In addition, a winning information command indicating data corresponding to winning in the first entrance 64 (each value of each counter C1 to C3) is not waited for external output processing (see S201 in FIG. 10) of the main processing. Immediately, it can be output to the sound lamp control device 113. By outputting (transmitting) the winning information command immediately, the command can be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 at a maximum of about 4 ms. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 can be changed.

  Next, an NMI interruption process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 in the payout / release control device 111 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing of the main controller 110 and the payout launch controller 111. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.

  First, an NMI interrupt process executed in main controller 110 will be described. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  Next, an NMI interrupt process executed in the payout / release control device 111 will be described. By such NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout and emission control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing start-up processing of the main controller 110. The start-up process is a process for performing various initial settings of the main controller 110, and is a process that is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on or the MPU 201 is reset.

  In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S101). Specifically, wait processing is performed in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the sub control device (the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, etc.) to become operable. (1 second in this embodiment) is executed (S102). Next, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S104). If it is turned on (S104: Yes), the process proceeds to S111. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S105), and if not stored (S105: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not been completed normally, the process proceeds to S111 also in this case.

  If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S106). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination is performed. If the value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process moves to S111 even in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in S213 of the main process (see FIG. 10). Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S111, a payout initialization command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 in order to initialize the payout control device 111 (S111). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. On the other hand, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S112, S113) of RAM 203 after transmission of the payout initialization command.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S112, S113) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S112, S113) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S112, S113), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S112), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S113). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S110.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the payout control device 111 to the gaming state when the drive power supply is shut off is transmitted to the payout control device 111 (S109), and the process proceeds to S110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213. In the process of S110, the interrupt is permitted and the process proceeds to a main process (see FIG. 10) of the main controller 110 described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing main processing of the main controller 110. The main process is a process for executing the main control of the pachinko machine 10, and is executed after the start-up process (see FIG. 9) of the main controller 110 described above, and thereafter repeatedly executed at a cycle of 4 ms. It is processing. As an outline, each process of S201 to S206 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

  In this main process, first, output data such as a command updated in the previous process is transmitted to a sub-control device (payout control device 111, voice lamp control device 113, etc.) (S201). For example, when a prize ball command is set by the process of S501 of the timer interruption process (see FIG. 14), the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111. Further, for example, the number-of-holds command set by the start winning process (see FIG. 15) described above or the change of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 set by the change starting process (see FIG. 13) described later. Various commands such as a fluctuation pattern command, a stop symbol command, a stop command, and an effect time addition command (necessary for display) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, respectively. Further, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  The transmission of output data such as commands is performed in the order in which the output data such as commands are set. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives various commands output from the main control device 110 (necessary for displaying the variation of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81), according to the received command, Display control of a display variation pattern command for instructing a variation effect and a jackpot effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a display stop symbol command for indicating a stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 To device 114.

  Next, each value of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 is updated (S202). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when these counter values reach the maximum values (198, 240, and 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS 1, CS 2, and CS 3 are stored in buffers corresponding to the counters CS 1 to CS 3 provided in the work area 203 d of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counters CS1, CS2 and CS3 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S203), and the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 is performed. A variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the three symbol display device 81 is executed (S204). Details of the variation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the end of the variation process (S204), when the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit state, a large opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed ( S205). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds).

  Next, a display control process for the second symbol (for example, the symbol “◯” or “x”) in the second symbol display unit 83 is executed (S206). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance 67 (through gate), the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the passing timing, and the second symbol display unit 83 In FIG. 2, the second symbol variation display is performed. Then, the winning determination in the second symbol is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is released for a predetermined time, and the ball Becomes easy to enter the first entrance 64.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S207: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S208). If the predetermined time has already passed (S208: Yes), the process proceeds to S201, and the above-described processes of S201 to S208 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S208: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 is repeatedly executed (S209, S210).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S209). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738, 250 in this embodiment), it is set to 0. clear. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in buffers corresponding to the counters CINI1 and CINI2 provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Next, the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S210). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when these counter values reach the maximum values (198, 240, and 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are stored in buffers corresponding to the counters CS1 to CS3 provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Since the execution time of each process of S201-S206 mentioned above changes according to the state of a game, the remaining time until it reaches the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and changes. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second per-random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S207, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207: Yes), the power failure is caused by the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 16 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S211 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S211), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to the sub-control devices (dispensing control device 111, voice lamp control device 113, etc.) (S212). ). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S213), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S214), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S207 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S201 to S206 is completed, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S209 and S210 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can start from the process of S201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S201 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shut-off, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the initial value of the startup process (see FIG. 9) can be saved without saving the stack pointer value. In the process (S101), the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), so that the process can start from the process of S201. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the fluctuation process (S204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation process (S204) of the main controller 110. The variation process (S204) is a process for starting the variation display corresponding to the data when the data corresponding to the winning is stored (suspended) in the reserved ball storage area 203a. 10).

  In this variation process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made (S301). As for the jackpot, during the jackpot game displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 and the 1st symbol display device 37 in the case of the jackpot (that is, “probability jackpot”, “normal jackpot” two), and jackpot Includes during the predetermined time after the game ends. If the result of the determination is that it is a big hit (S301: Yes), this fluctuation process (S204) is terminated without performing anything, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 10) of the main controller 110.

  If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S302: No), the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 203c (number of special figure reservation balls N) is acquired (S303).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure holding ball number N is larger than 0 (S304). If the special figure holding ball number N is 0 (S304: No) as a result of checking by the process of S304, S305 to S305. The process of S306 is skipped, the fluctuation process (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 10) of the main controller 110. On the other hand, if the special figure reservation ball number N is 1 or more (S304: Yes), the reservation ball storage area forward process for shifting the data used for the jackpot determination from the reservation ball storage area 203a to the reservation ball execution area 203b is performed. This is executed (S305), and a fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S306). Then, the fluctuation process (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 10) of the main controller 110. The reserved ball storage area progressive process will be described later with reference to FIG. 12, and the change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, since this fluctuation process (S204) is a subroutine executed in the main process, it is executed every 4 ms. However, if it is a big hit (S301: Yes), or if it is fluctuating (S302: Yes). Since the processes of S305 to S306 are skipped, the variable display is not started each time the variable process is executed, and the data corresponding to the pending winning is not consumed.

  In the process of S302, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (S307). The display time during the change of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counters CS1 and CS2 and the addition time selected by the change type counter CS3. If it has not elapsed (S307: No), this variation process (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 10) of the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed in the processing of S307 (S307: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S308). In the setting of the stop symbol, whether or not a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and in the case of a big hit, the “high probability state ( Whether the symbol becomes “probable jackpot” or the symbol that becomes “low probability state after normal jackpot (normal jackpot)” is determined.

  In the present embodiment, the red LED is turned on when “high probability state (probability big hit) after jackpot end”, and green LED when “low probability state (normal jackpot) after jackpot end”. Is turned on, and a blue LED is turned on when it is off. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  Further, in the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, for example, if the currently lit LED is red from the start of variation until the variation time elapses, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stopped symbol is set in the process of S308, the variation stop of the third symbol display device 81 is stopped to synchronize with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. A command is set (S309). When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this stop command, it transmits a display stop command to the display control device 114 and instructs the display control device 114 to stop the variable display. The third symbol display device 81 stops the variation when the variation time elapses, and receives the stop command to end one variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. Then, when the process of S309 is completed, the fluctuation process (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 10) of the main controller 110.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the reserved ball storage area progressive process (S305) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the reserved ball storage area forward process (S305) of main controller 110. The reserved ball storage area forward process (S305) is a process for shifting the data used for determining the jackpot from the reserved ball storage area 203a to the reserved ball execution area 203b, and is executed in the variation process (see FIG. 11). Process. This process is a process that is executed when the special figure reservation ball number N is 1 or more.

  In the reserved ball storage area forward process (S305), first, each data stored in the reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203b (S351). In the process of S351, specifically, the data stored in the first per-random number counter storage area 203a1 of the reserved first area is shifted to the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1 of the reserved ball execution area 203b. Similarly, the data stored in the first per category counter storage area 203a2 is transferred to the first per category counter storage area 203b2, and the data stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203a3 is converted into the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3. Shift to.

  Next, each data stored in the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area is shifted to the area (first to third area) having the smaller area number (S352). In the present embodiment, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second to fourth) in which data is stored (held). Therefore, since the data shift process is not performed for the reserved areas (second to fourth) in which data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts can be reduced and the control burden is reduced. be able to.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that each data of a holding | maintenance area (2nd-4th) may be each shifted to the area where an area number is 1 small irrespective of the presence or absence of data. In that case, since it is not necessary to determine whether data is stored (held) in the holding area (second to fourth), the number of steps of the program can be reduced. Therefore, since the capacity of the program can be reduced, the free capacity of the ROM 202 can be increased.

  Next, the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 203c (special figure reservation ball number N) is decremented by 1 (S353), and the value of the special figure reservation ball number counter 203c after the subtraction (special figure reservation ball number N) is shown. A hold number command is set (S354). The hold number command set here is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S201 at the execution timing of the next main process (see FIG. 10). When the output hold number command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the same number of lamps as the special figure hold ball number N indicated by the hold number command are turned on in the special figure hold lamp 85.

  Next, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on in accordance with the value of the special figure holding ball counter 203c (the number N of special figure holding balls), and the new holding number is displayed in the lighting state (S355). When the process of S355 is completed, the reserved ball storage area forward feed process (S305) is terminated and the process returns to the fluctuation process (see FIG. 11).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the variation start process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process (S306) of main controller 110. The variation start process (S306) determines whether the game is a big hit or miss based on the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) stored in the reserved ball execution area 203b, and according to the determination result. It is a process for starting the fluctuation display, and is a process executed in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 11).

  In this variation start process (S306), first, each counter value stored in the reserved ball execution area 203b is acquired (S401). That is, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the first random number counter storage area 203b1 of the reserved ball execution area 203b and the first per-type counter C2 stored in the first per-type counter storage area 203b2. The value and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 are acquired.

  And it is discriminate | determined based on the value of the 1st hit random number counter C1 acquired by the process of S401 (S402). Whether it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode (low probability state or high probability state) at that time. As described above, at the time of normal low probability (when the jackpot probability is normal), “373,727” is the winning value among the numerical values 0 to 738 of the first random number counter C1, and at the time of high probability (jackpot probability) Is a higher value than usual), “59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 367, 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 733” is the winning value.

  Further, when it is determined that the jackpot is, which jackpot of the two types of jackpot (“probable jackpot”, “ordinary jackpot”) based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained by the processing of S401 Whether there is a hit type is determined. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 (“0 to 4”) is “0, 4” in the case of jackpot, “low probability state (usually jackpot) after the jackpot ends” becomes “1 , 2, 3 ”,“ high probability state (probability jackpot) after jackpot ”is set.

  If it is determined in the process of S402 that the game is a big hit (S402: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired by the process of S401 is confirmed, and the display mode for the big win is set (S403). That is, in the process of S403, based on the value of the first hit type counter C2, the process shifts to “a high probability state (probability big hit) after the jackpot end” or “low probability state (normal jackpot) after the jackpot end”. Set When the transition state after the big hit is set, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set. In the present embodiment, the red LED is turned on when “high probability state (probability big hit) after jackpot end”, and green LED when “low probability state (normal jackpot) after jackpot end”. Is turned on, and a blue LED is turned on when it is off.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 set a jackpot stop symbol that is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the transition state after the jackpot end. That is, the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is set by setting the transition state after the big hit is ended by the process of S403.

  Next, based on the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S404). That is, it determines the fluctuation time of rough symbol fluctuations such as normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc. based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1, and finally stops after the occurrence of reach based on the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2. The variation time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol (medium symbol) of the middle symbol row Z2 or the middle symbol row Z2 ′) stops is determined. By determining the variation pattern by the processing of S404, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol is determined. .

  The relationship between the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 and the variation time is preset by a table or the like. The variation time can be set using only the value of the first variation type counter CS1 without using the value of the second variation type counter CS2, and can be set only by the value of the first variation type counter CS1. Whether or not to set both values of both variation type counters CS1 and CS2 may be determined as appropriate according to the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the game conditions each time.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S402 that it is not a big hit (S402: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S405). In the process of S405, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the stop pattern selection counter stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 of the reserved ball execution area 203b is set. Based on the value of C3, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is “rear out of front / rear out”, “reach other than out of front / rear out”, or “off chance (one of out)”. Or “completely off”. In the present embodiment, as described above, the high probability state (the state where the jackpot probability is higher than normal), the low probability state (the state where the jackpot probability is normal), whether the special figure pending number counter 203c The table is set so that the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 differs according to the value (number of special figure holding balls N) and the like.

  Next, based on the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer provided in the work area 203d of the RAM 203, a variation pattern at the time of detachment is determined (S406). That is, as in S404 described above, based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1, a rough change time of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc. is determined, and the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is set. Based on this, the variation time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the final stop symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol (medium symbol) in the middle symbol row Z2 or the middle symbol row Z2 ′) stops after the occurrence of reach is determined. By determining the variation pattern by the process of S406, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. .

  When the processing of S404 or the processing of S406 ends, next, the effect time to be added to or subtracted from the variation time determined by the first and second type counters CS1 and CS2 is determined (S407). At this time, the addition / subtraction of the effect time is determined based on the value of the third type counter CS3 stored in the counter buffer of the work area 203d of the RAM 203, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, The variation time of the third symbol display device 81 is set. In the present embodiment, the determination of the addition / subtraction of the production time is performed according to the value of the third variation type counter CS3 when the variation display time is not changed, when the variation display time is added for one second, and when the variation display time is increased. 4 types of addition values are determined, i.e., when 2 seconds is added, and when the variable display time is subtracted 1 second.

  In addition, when the variable display time is added or subtracted, a notice effect that increases the expected value of the jackpot on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a slip effect that causes the change time of the variable symbol to be longer than usual and is accompanied by a slip) An effect of displaying a notice character is produced, for example, an effect of making the change time of one change symbol shorter than usual and stopping it immediately). In addition, when the value of the first random number counter C1 is a big hit, the probability that an added value of 2 seconds is selected is set high, so that the player expects a big hit by confirming the notice effect. Can do.

  Next, a variation pattern command is set according to the variation pattern (variation time) determined in the process of S404 or S406 (S408), and a stop symbol command is set according to the stop symbol set in the process of S403 or S405. (S409). Then, an effect time addition command is set according to the added value of the effect time determined in the process of S407 (S410).

  After the process of S410, a change direction command is set according to the value of the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1 of the reserved ball execution area 203b (S411), the change start process (S306) is terminated, and the change process (FIG. 11) is performed. Return to Reference).

  The variable direction command set by the processing of S411 is a command that defines whether the variable display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is vertical scroll or horizontal scroll. In the present embodiment, when the value of the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1 in the reserved ball execution area 203b is an even number, a change direction command corresponding to horizontal scrolling is set, and the first per-random number counter storage area is set. When the value of 203b1 is an odd number, a change direction command corresponding to vertical scrolling is set.

  Each command set in the fluctuation start process (S306) is output to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S201 at the execution timing of the next main process (see FIG. 10). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives various commands output from the main control device 110 (necessary for displaying the variation of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81), according to the received command, Display control of a display variation pattern command for instructing a variation effect and a jackpot effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a display stop symbol command for indicating a stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 To device 114. And the display control apparatus 114 controls the display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 according to these commands.

  Here, the order of commands transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when the variable display is started in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81 will be described. As described above, in the external output process (S201) of the main process (see FIG. 10), the commands are transmitted in the order in which the commands are set. In addition, before executing the change start process (S306), the reserved ball storage area forward process (S305) is always executed.

  Therefore, the “holding number command” is set by the reserved ball storage area forward process (S305), and then the “variation pattern command”, “stop symbol command”, “calculation time addition command” by the variation start process (S306). The commands are set in the order of “change direction command”. Therefore, various commands are sent from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 in the order of “pending number command”, “variation pattern command”, “stop symbol command”, “calculation time addition command”, “variation direction command”. Sent.

  Note that the “variation direction command” may be included in the “variation pattern command” without providing the “variation direction command”. Further, the “variation pattern command” may include the information indicated by the “calculation time addition command” without providing the “calculation time addition command”. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which combined each.

  In addition, these commands may be transmitted in a different order. Further, the order of command transmission may be changed to change the order of transmission. For example, if the “variation pattern command” and the “variation direction command” are transmitted first from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, the variation display is started before other commands are transmitted. Can start quickly. This is because the “pending number command”, “stop symbol command”, “calculation time addition command” and the like do not affect the start of the variable display.

  Further, the maximum number of commands to be transmitted to the outside may be limited to a predetermined number (for example, 3) by executing the external output process (S201) once. For example, if the number of commands to be transmitted is large (for example, 6), the command is transmitted over two main processes (main process executed this time and main process executed next time). This is because if there are many commands to be transmitted at a time, it takes time to transmit and the main process may not be executed every 4 ms. When configured in this way, the command may be transmitted from a command with a high priority. Specifically, as described above, the “variation pattern command” and the “variation direction command” are transmitted first from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and thereafter, the “hold number command” and the “stop symbol command” ”,“ Calculation time addition command ”and the like are transmitted over one or more main processes. Note that the maximum number of commands to be transmitted to the outside by executing one external output process (S201) may be changed depending on the remaining time of the main process, the amount of information to be processed in each main process, and the like. good.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control apparatus 111 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 211 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 17, a startup process executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing start-up processing of the payout control device 111. The start-up process is a process for performing various initial settings of the payout control device 111, and is a process executed when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on or when the MPU 211 is reset.

  First, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S801). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, the RAM access is permitted (S802), and an external interrupt vector is set (S803).

  Thereafter, a data backup process for the RAM 213 in the MPU 211 is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 (S804). If not stored (S804: No), the backup data is not stored, so the process proceeds to S811. Transition. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 (S804: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S805). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S806: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination is performed. If the value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S811. As described later in the processing of S917 of the main processing (see FIG. 18) of the payout control device 111, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 213. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 213 is correctly stored.

  In the RAM initialization process of S811 and S812, all areas of the RAM 213 are cleared to 0 (S811), and then the initial value of the RAM 213 is set (S812). Thereafter, the peripheral devices of the MPU 211 are initialized (S809), an interrupt is permitted (S810), and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 18) of the payout control device 111.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of power interruption is set (S804: Yes) and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S806: Yes), the data backed up in the RAM 213 is retained. In addition to clearing the information on the occurrence of power interruption (S807), in order to start paying out a winning ball or a loaned ball, permission to pay out a ball is set (S808). Thereafter, the peripheral devices of the MPU 211 are initialized (S809), an interrupt is permitted (S810), and the process proceeds to a main process (see FIG. 18) of the payout control device 111 described later.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the main process of the payout control device 111. The main process is a process for executing the ball payout control, which is executed after the start-up process of the payout control device 111 described above, and is repeatedly executed thereafter.

  In this main process, first, a winning ball command, a payout return command, a payout initialization command, and the like transmitted from the main control device 110 are received, and a command determination process for determining the type of these commands is performed (S901). This command determination processing is processing for executing processing corresponding to each command in accordance with various commands received from the main control device 110. Here, for example, the payout return transmitted from the main control device 110 is used. When a command, a payout initialization command, or a prize ball command is received, the payout of prize balls or rental balls is permitted.

  When the command determination process (S901) is completed, it is determined whether or not the payout is permitted (S902). If the payout is not permitted (S902: No), the main control device 110 is not yet started up. In such a case, the command determination process (S901) is repeatedly executed until the payout is permitted in the command determination process (S901). On the other hand, if the payout is permitted in the processing of S902 (S902: Yes), the state return switch 120 is checked, and if it is determined that the state return operation is started, the state return operation is executed (S903).

  Thereafter, the setting of the lower pan full tank state or the lower pan full tank release state is executed according to the change in the state of the lower pan 50 (S904). That is, when the lower pan 50 is determined based on the detection signal of the lower pan full switch, the lower pan full state is set when the lower pan is full. , Set the lower pan full release state. Further, the setting of the tank ball absence state or the tank ball absence release state is executed according to the change in the state of the tank ball (S905). In other words, the tank ball no switch state is determined based on the detection signal of the tank ball no switch, and when there is no tank ball, the setting of the tank ball no state is executed. Perform configuration. Thereafter, the presence / absence of a notification state is determined, and when there is a notification state, notification is made by a 7-segment LED provided in the payout control device 111 (S906).

  Next, a winning ball payout process is executed by each process of S907 to S909. That is, if the total number of winning balls is not 0 (S907: No, S908: No), the winning ball control process is started to pay out winning balls (S909). . On the other hand, if the prize ball cannot be paid out (S907: Yes) or if the total number of prize balls is 0 (S908: Yes), the process proceeds to the lending and payout process.

  In the lending process of S910 to S912, if the lending is not disabled and a lending payout request from the card unit has been received (S910: No, S911: Yes), The lending control process is started (S912). On the other hand, if the rental ball cannot be dispensed (S910: Yes) or if a rental ball dispensing request has not been received (S911: No), the process proceeds to S913. Similarly, after the ball rental control process (S912) is completed, the process proceeds to S913.

  In the process of S913, the control of the vibrator 134 (vibration motor control) is executed on the condition that the ball is clogged (S913). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 (S914). If the occurrence information of power interruption is not stored (S914: No), the power failure signal SG1 is received from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. Since it is not output and the power supply is not shut off, in such a case, the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes of S901 to S913 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the process of S914 (S914: Yes), the result of the power failure is output due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. This means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 16 has been executed. Therefore, in such a case, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S915), and the command determination process is executed again in order to prevent the reception of a command transmitted from the main controller 110 (S916). ). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the RAM 213 (S917), access to the RAM 213 is prohibited (S918), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, for example, the RAM determination value is a checksum value in the stack area and the work area to be backed up in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S914, since the information on the occurrence of power interruption is confirmed at the timing when one cycle of the main process of the payout control device 111 ends, the process is started up when returning from the state before the power interruption. After the process is completed, the process can be started from S901. In other words, the main process can be started in the same manner as when initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, the contents of each register used by the MPU 211 are saved to the stack area, or the initial setting process of the payout control device 111 without saving the value of the stack pointer (S801). In (see FIG. 17), the processing can be started from S901 by setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value). Therefore, the control burden on the payout control device 111 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the payout control device 111 to malfunction or run away. In addition, since the power-off process is executed at the timing when each process is completed, the amount of information to be backed up in the RAM 213 can be reduced.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 19 to 25 and the tables shown in FIGS. 26 to 29. The process of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and various commands transmitted from the main controller 110. And command reception interrupt processing.

  For convenience of explanation, first, referring to FIG. 26 to FIG. 29, the condition for starting the continuous chance effect and the number of continuous display of “chance eyes” set when the continuous chance effect is started. An example will be described. Thereafter, the command reception interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process and the main process will be described.

  First, with reference to FIG. 26 to FIG. 29, an example of a condition for starting the continuous chance effect and the number of continuous display times of “chance eyes” set when the continuous chance effect is started will be described. . In the tables of FIG. 26 to FIG. 29, when either “off chance chance” or “reach chance eye” is acceptable, it is simply described as “chance eye”.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a new winning is detected in the main controller 110, if the number N of special figure reservation balls at the time of winning is less than 4 (maximum number of times of holding), A winning information command indicating each value of the counters C1 to C3 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the audio lamp control device 113, the audio lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to perform the continuous chance effect, and when it is determined to start the continuous chance effect. Various settings (such as how many times chance chances are displayed in succession) for starting a continuous chance eye effect are also made.

  Further, in this embodiment, whether or not to perform the continuous chance eye effect is determined when the new winning is “probable big hit”, “normal jackpot”, “front / rear out of reach”, or “out chance chance” To be done. Then, the number of times of continuous display of “chance eyes” set when starting the continuous chance effect production is the timing at which the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command and the counters C1 to C1 indicated by the received winning information command. It is determined in advance according to the combination of each value of C3 and the number N of special figure reservation balls.

  FIG. 26 shows the variation effect when the new winning is “probability jackpot” and the reception timing of the winning information command corresponding to the new winning is within the period during which the stop symbol can be changed (changeable period). It is a table | surface which shows an example of the content. FIG. 27 shows the variation effect when the new winning is “ordinary jackpot” and the reception timing of the winning information command corresponding to the new winning is within the period in which the stop symbol can be changed (changeable period). It is a table | surface which shows an example of the content.

  FIG. 28 shows a variation effect in the case where the new winning is “probable jackpot” or “ordinary jackpot” and the reception timing of the winning information command corresponding to the new winning is a period during which the stop symbol cannot be changed. It is a table | surface which shows an example of the content. FIG. 29 is a table showing an example of the contents of the fluctuating effects when the new winning is “front / rear out of reach” or “missing chance” (regardless of the reception timing of the winning information command corresponding to the new winning). is there.

  First, FIG. 26 will be described. FIG. 26 shows the variation effect when the new winning is “probability jackpot” and the reception timing of the winning information command corresponding to the new winning is within the period during which the stop symbol can be changed (changeable period). It is a table | surface which shows an example of the content. If the new winning is “probable jackpot” and the reception timing of the winning information command corresponding to the new winning is within the period during which the stop symbol can be changed (changeable period), Displayed up to 5 times continuously.

  For example, if the number N of special figure holding balls is 4 including a new winning, the stop pattern of the changing effect currently being executed is changed to “chance eye” and the changing effect for the holding excluding the new winning is also given. The stop symbols are also set to “chance points” for each of the first to third variation effects after winning a prize. On the other hand, with regard to a new winning variation effect (fourth variation effect after winning a prize), the stop symbol is set to “chance eye”, and after the “chance eye” is displayed, the development effect is performed. The stop symbol corresponding to “big hit” is set to be displayed. That is, when the number N of special figure reservation balls is 4 including a new winning, the “chance” is displayed five times in succession.

  Similarly, in the case where the number N of special figure reservation balls is 1 to 3 including a new winning, the stop symbol is changed to “chance eye” from the variation effect currently being executed. Therefore, when the special drawing reservation ball number N is 3 including the new winning, the “chance eye” is displayed four times in succession, and when the special drawing reservation ball number N is 2 including the new winning, “Chance eyes” are displayed three times in succession, and when the special figure reservation ball number N is 1 including a new winning, “chance eyes” are displayed twice in succession.

  Next, FIG. 27 will be described. FIG. 27 shows the variation effect when the new winning is “ordinary jackpot” and the reception timing of the winning information command corresponding to the new winning is within the period in which the stop symbol can be changed (changeable period). It is a table | surface which shows an example of the content. If the new winning is a “normal jackpot” and the reception timing of the winning information command corresponding to the new winning is within the period during which the stop symbol can be changed (changeable period), The display is limited to a maximum of 4 consecutive times.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum continuous number of fluctuation effects with the stop symbol as “chance” is “probable big hit (up to 5 consecutive times)” and “normal big hit (up to 4 consecutive times)”. The case is different from the case of “rearward / rearward reach or missed chance (up to three consecutive times)”. In other words, the greater the number of times of the variable effect having the stop symbol as “chance”, the more the game chance state is shifted to after the continuous chance effect is completed. Thus, the player is angry at the number of continuous fluctuation effects with the stop symbol as the “chance”, so that the player can be provided with a highly interesting game.

  For example, when the number N of special figure reservation balls is 4 including a new winning, the stop design of the changing effect currently being executed is not changed. On the other hand, with regard to the fluctuation effect for the reserved portion excluding a new winning (the first to third fluctuation effects after winning), the stop symbol is set to “chance” respectively. Furthermore, for a new winning variation effect (fourth variation effect after winning a prize), the stop symbol is set to “chance eye”, and after the “chance eye” is displayed, the development effect is performed. The stop symbol corresponding to “big hit” is set to be displayed. In other words, when the number N of special figure reservation balls is 4 including a new winning, the “chance” is displayed four times in succession.

  In addition, in the case where the number N of special figure reservation balls is 1 to 3 including a new winning, the stop symbol is changed to “chance eye” from the variation effect currently being executed. Therefore, when the special drawing reservation ball number N is 3 including the new winning, the “chance eye” is displayed four times in succession, and when the special drawing reservation ball number N is 2 including the new winning, “Chance eyes” are displayed three times in succession, and when the special figure reservation ball number N is 1 including a new winning, “chance eyes” are displayed twice in succession.

  Next, FIG. 28 will be described. FIG. 28 shows a variation effect in the case where the new winning is “probable jackpot” or “ordinary jackpot” and the reception timing of the winning information command corresponding to the new winning is a period during which the stop symbol cannot be changed. It is a table | surface which shows an example of the content. Note that the stop symbol cannot be changed even when there is no variation effect currently being executed (when there is no change effect to be executed because there is no hold, or when the change effect has not yet started even if there is a hold). In such a case, the table of FIG. 28 is a table in which the column of “Currently changing variation effect” (a column in which four “No change” is lined up in the vertical direction) is deleted.

  If the receiving timing of the winning information command corresponding to the new winning is a period during which the stop symbol cannot be changed, it is currently being executed regardless of whether the new winning is “probable big win” or “normal big hit” Since the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect cannot be changed to “chance”, the “chance” is displayed up to four times continuously.

  For example, in the case where the number N of special figure holding balls is 4 including a new winning, the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being executed is not changed (cannot be performed). On the other hand, with regard to the fluctuation effect for the reserved portion excluding a new winning (the first to third fluctuation effects after winning), the stop symbol is set to “chance” respectively. Furthermore, for the new winning variation effect (fourth variation effect after winning a prize), the stop symbol is set to “chance eye”, and after the “chance eye” is displayed, the development effect is performed. A stop symbol corresponding to “big hit” or “normal big hit” is set to be displayed. In other words, when the number N of special figure reservation balls is 4 including a new winning, the “chance” is displayed four times in succession.

  Similarly, when the number N of special figure reservation balls is 2 to 3 including a new winning, the stop symbol is changed to “chance eye” from the variation effect currently being executed. Therefore, when the special drawing reservation ball number N is 3 including the new winning, the “chance eye” is displayed three times in succession, and when the special drawing reservation ball number N is 2 including the new winning, “Chance” is displayed twice in succession. However, in the case where the special figure reservation ball number N is 1 including the new winning, the “chance eye” can be displayed only once, and the “chance eye” can be displayed continuously. No change is made. The above description is the same for the case where a winning information command is received when there is no fluctuating effect currently being executed.

  Next, FIG. 29 will be described. FIG. 29 is a table showing an example of the contents of the fluctuating effects when the new winning is “front / rear out of reach” or “missing chance” (regardless of the reception timing of the winning information command corresponding to the new winning). is there. Note that the stop symbol cannot be changed even when there is no variation effect currently being executed (when there is no change effect to be executed because there is no hold, or when the change effect has not yet started even if there is a hold). In this case, the table of FIG. 29 is a table in which the column of “currently executed variation effect” (a column in which “not changed” is described in four columns in the vertical direction) is deleted.

  If the new winning is “front / rear out of reach” or “off chance”, regardless of the timing of receiving the winning information command corresponding to the new winning, Will not be changed. Further, the display of “chance” is limited to a maximum of three consecutive times, and the development effect as described above is not performed.

  For example, when the number N of special figure reservation balls is 4 including a new winning, the stop design of the changing effect currently being executed is not changed. In addition, the change of the stop symbol is not performed for the first variation effect after winning a prize among the variation effects (the first to third variation effects after winning) excluding a new winning.

  On the other hand, for the second to third variation effects after winning a prize, the stop symbol is set to “chance” respectively. Further, for the new winning variation effect (fourth variation after winning), the stop symbol is set to “chance”. That is, when the number N of special figure reservation balls is 4 including a new winning, the “chance” is displayed three times in succession.

  In addition, in the case where the number N of special figure reservation balls is 2 to 3 including a new winning, the stop pattern of the fluctuating production for the reserved portion excluding the new winning is changed to “chance”. Therefore, when the special drawing reservation ball number N is 3 including the new winning, the “chance eye” is displayed three times in succession, and when the special drawing reservation ball number N is 2 including the new winning, “Chance” is displayed twice in succession. However, in the case where the special figure reservation ball number N is 1 including the new winning, the “chance eye” can be displayed only once, and the “chance eye” can be displayed continuously. No change is made. The above description is the same for the case where a winning information command is received when there is no fluctuating effect currently being executed.

  Next, a command reception interrupt process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing of the sound lamp control device 113. The command reception interrupt process is an interrupt process for receiving various commands transmitted from the main control device 110, and is a process executed every time various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 are received. is there.

  In this command reception interrupt process, the command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, the received command is stored in the command storage area 223l (S1530), and the process ends. If the command stored here is a winning information command, a continuous chance eye determination process (S1207) is executed in a command determination process (see FIG. 21) described later, and if a predetermined condition is satisfied. If it determines, the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 will perform a continuous chance eye effect.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113. The start-up process is a process for performing various initial settings of the sound lamp control device 113, and is a process executed when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on or when the MPU 221 is reset.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, a power-on notification process is executed (S1002).

  In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, the power-on notification process is performed to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). 33, the display lamp 34, the special figure holding lamp 85, and the like. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG.

  When the power-on notification process is completed, it is determined whether the current startup process has been executed because the MPU 221 has been reset during the power-off process (S1115 in FIG. 20) described later. It is determined based on whether or not the disconnection processing flag is on (S1003).

  As described above, when an instantaneous voltage drop (instant blackout, so-called “momentary power interruption”) occurs, main controller 110 transmits a power-off command to voice lamp controller 113 and the like. As will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 20, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command, the power-off occurrence information indicating that the power-off command has been received is stored in the RAM 223 and the power-off process is performed. (S1115 in FIG. 20) is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed.

  That is, whether or not the MPU 221 is reset during the power-off process can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag. Note that if the power supply is completely shut off during execution of the power-off process or after completion of the execution, the data in the RAM 223 is lost, so the power-off process flag is turned off.

  More specifically, the case where the power-off process in progress flag is off is a case where the current startup process is executed after any of the following three states. The first state is a state where the power supply is completely shut off. When the power is completely shut down, the data in the RAM 223 is lost, so that the power-off process in progress flag is turned off.

  As the second state, the power-off process (S1115 in FIG. 20) was executed because an instantaneous power failure occurred. However, after the power-off process was completed, This is a state where the MPU 221 is reset. In this case, since the power is not shut off, the data in the RAM 223 is retained without loss. Further, since the power-off process is completed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off.

  The third state is a state in which only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like. That is, if the MPU 221 is reset without executing the power-off process (without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110), the data in the RAM 223 is held while the power-off process flag is off. Is done.

  If the current start-up process is executed after any of the three states described above, that is, if the power-off flag is OFF (S1003: No), whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed is determined. Confirm (S1004). It should be noted that whether or not the data is destroyed is that the data in the RAM 223 is normally held when only the MPU 221 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started. This is because the control of the sound lamp control device 113 can be continued using the data.

  For example, even if only the MPU 221 is reset due to noise or the like, if the data in the RAM 223 is normally held, the data can be used to continue control related to the continuous chance eye effect. Here, when only the MPU 221 is reset due to noise or the like, if the data in the RAM 223 is always initialized, it is necessary to start again from the initial state to determine whether to start the continuous chance effect. However, in the present embodiment, if the data in the RAM 223 is normally held, it is possible to continuously determine whether to start the continuous chance effect using the data, so the continuous chance effect is performed. It is possible to prevent the opportunity from decreasing.

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1007. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1004: Yes), the process proceeds to S1005, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1004: No), the process proceeds to S1009.

  More specifically, when the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the RAM 223 is turned off when the power is turned off). Since the memory is lost), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1004: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1005. On the other hand, the power cut-off process (S1115 in FIG. 20) was executed because an instantaneous power failure occurred. However, the power was not cut off and returned to normal, and then the MPU 221 was reset after the execution of the power cut-off process was completed. When the current startup process is started or after the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like, the current startup process is started. Since the keyword “55AAh” is stored, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1004: No), and the process proceeds to S1009.

  In the process of S1003, when the power-off process flag is on (S1003: Yes), the power-off process (S1115 in FIG. 20) was executed because an instantaneous power failure occurred, but the power supply was not shut down. This is a case in which the MPU 221 is reset in the middle of executing the power-off process after returning to normal. In this case, the current storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, in such a case, it is difficult to continue the control, so the process proceeds to S1005 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the processing of S1005, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1005). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1006: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1007). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a reading / writing check abnormality is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1006: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1008), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify the RAM 223 of an abnormality.

  In the processing of S1009, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1009). The power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process (S1115 in FIG. 20) is executed, and turned off when the power is completely cut off (see S1114 in FIG. 20). Therefore, when the power-off flag is on when the startup process is executed, the power-off process was executed because an instantaneous power failure occurred. Or when the MPU 221 is reset upon completion of execution.

  Therefore, in such a case (S1009: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1010), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1011), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1012), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110. Specifically, among the memories 223a to 223l of the RAM 223 such as the special figure holding ball counter 223a, the continuous chance eye counter 223b, and the high probability state flag 223c, the memories 223a to 223k except the command storage area 223l are cleared. To do.

  On the other hand, the case where the power-off flag is off at the time of start-up processing is, for example, when power is turned on again after the power is completely shut down (data in the RAM 223 including the data of the power-off flag is lost). Or when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like, and the power-off flag is not turned on (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). This is a case where data in the RAM 223 is held.

  Therefore, in such a case (S1009: No), S1010 which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1011, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1011), and the interrupt permission is set. Then (S1012), the process proceeds to the main process.

  Note that the clearing process in S1010 is skipped when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, and the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is not cleared but saved. This is because the control of the sound lamp control device 113 can be continued. For example, even if only the MPU 221 is reset due to noise or the like, if the data in the RAM 223 is normally held, the data can be used to continue control related to the continuous chance eye effect. Here, when only the MPU 221 is reset due to noise or the like, if the data in the RAM 223 is always initialized, it is necessary to start again from the initial state to determine whether to start the continuous chance effect. However, in the present embodiment, if the data in the RAM 223 is normally held, it is possible to continuously determine whether to start the continuous chance effect using the data, so the continuous chance effect is performed. It is possible to prevent the opportunity from decreasing.

  Further, when the processes of S1005 to S1007 are executed, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1005, and therefore it is not necessary to clear the work area of the RAM 223 again.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113. The main process is a process for executing lamp display, audio output control, and the like. The main process is executed after the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 described above, and is repeatedly executed thereafter.

  In the main process, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the start of the main process (S1101). If 1 msec or more has not elapsed (S1101: No), the processes of S1102 to S1108 are performed. Without performing this, the process proceeds to S1109. The reason why it is determined in S1101 whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is that it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec) since S1102 to S1108 are processes related to display (production).

  On the other hand, in the command determination processing in S1109, processing corresponding to each command is executed in accordance with various commands received from the main control device 110, and in the variable display processing in S1110, each of the items used for setting the production mode. Update processing of a counter (not shown) or the like is executed. Furthermore, in the variable execution time update process of S1111, update process of the variable time timer 223i (see FIG. 6B) indicating the elapsed time since the start of the variable effect (variable display) in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. This is because it is preferable to execute each process of S1109 to S1111 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1109 in a short cycle, the processing according to the command transmitted from the main control device 110 can be reliably executed without omission.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the processing of S1101 (S1101: Yes), each lamp (for example, the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34 is set so that the lamp is edited in the processing of S1106 described later. Etc.) is set (S1102). Then, the customer waiting effect process of S1103 is executed, and then the hold number display update process is executed (S1104). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the hold number display update process, the number of lighting of the special figure hold lamp 85 is updated based on the hold number command stored in the command storage area 223l of the RAM 223.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1105). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. For example, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the feeling of expectation for the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production which can have, or selecting one reach production out of a plurality of reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1105 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, a lamp editing process is executed (S1106), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1107). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamps 34, and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1107, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1108), and the process proceeds to S1109. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1106 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process in S1107 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the processing of S1109, command determination processing for executing processing corresponding to each command is performed according to various commands received from the main control device 110 (S1109). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the variable display process which sets the effect aspect of the variable effect (variable display) in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is performed (S1110). In the variation display process, a display variation pattern command for instructing the set effect mode, a display stop symbol command, and the like are transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with these commands.

  After the process of S1110, a variable execution time update process for updating the execution time of the variable effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 (the elapsed time since the start of the execution of the variable effect) is executed (S1111). Details of the variable execution time update process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1111 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 223 (S1112). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1112 (S1112: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1114), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1115). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1116), and then the process loops infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output to the audio output device 226, the electrical decoration units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  In the process of S1112, if the occurrence information of power interruption is not stored (S1112: No), whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword “55AAh” stored in the RAM 223 (see the process of S1007 in FIG. 19). If the RAM 223 is not destroyed (S1113: No), the process returns to the process of S1101, and the above-described processes of S1101 to S1113 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed in the process of S1113 (S1113: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the audio output device 226, the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, the special figure holding lamp 85, or the like. good.

  Next, a command determination process (S1109) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing command determination processing of the sound lamp control device 113. The command determination process (S1109) is a process for executing a process corresponding to each command in accordance with various commands received from the main controller 110.

  In this command determination process (S1109), it is first determined whether or not a winning information command has been received (S1201). Specifically, it is determined whether a winning information command is stored in the command storage area 223l. As described above, the winning information command is a command indicating data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) corresponding to winning in the first entrance 64.

  If the winning information command has not been received in the process of S1201 (S1201: No), the process of S1202 to S1208 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1209. On the other hand, when the winning information command is received (S1201: Yes), it is determined whether the winning information command is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k (S1202).

  If a winning information command is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k in the process of S1202 (S1202: Yes), the process proceeds to S1208. On the other hand, when the winning information command is not stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k in the processing of S1202 (S1202: No), it is determined whether the value of the consecutive chance counter 223b is 0 (S1203).

  In the process of S1203, when the value of the continuous chance eye counter 223b is other than 0 (1 or more) (S1203: No), since the continuous chance eye effect is being executed, the process proceeds to S1208. By the processing of S1203, it is possible to prevent the continuous chance eye determination process (S1207) described later from being executed during execution of the continuous chance eye effect, and thus it is possible to prevent the value of the continuous chance eye counter 223b from being overwritten. , It is possible to accurately execute the continuous chance eye effect during the execution. Therefore, it is possible to accurately indicate to the player the gaming state that the gaming machine is scheduled to move to after the end of the continuous chance effect, by the number of consecutive variable effects with the stop symbol as “chance eye”. Therefore, the player is relieved according to the number of continuous fluctuation effects with “stop chance” as the stop symbol, and can provide a highly interesting game to the player.

  On the other hand, if the value of the continuous chance counter 223b is 0 in the processing of S1203 (S1203: Yes), it is determined whether the chance display skip flag 223d is on (S1204). As described above, the chance eye display skip flag 223d is a flag for setting the stop symbol of the changing effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 to a stop symbol other than the “chance eye”. When the chance eye display skip flag 223d is on (S1204: Yes), after the continuous chance eye effect has ended, the variation effect has not ended once, so the received winning information command is acquired. The information is stored in the standby command memory 223k (S1208), and the process proceeds to S1209.

  The process of S1208 is executed when a winning information command is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k. That is, when all the winning information commands received so far have not been processed, the winning information command received this time is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k. Therefore, winning information commands can be stored in the order received, and can be processed later in the order received.

  More specifically, when a winning information command is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k, if the winning information command is received, the received winning command is received regardless of whether or not the continuous chance effect is being executed. The winning information command is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k in the order received. Then, when the consecutive chance effect is completed, winning information commands stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k are acquired one by one in the order received (that is, in the order stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k). It will be processed.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, since the winning information command can always be processed in the order received, it is possible to determine whether or not to start the continuous chance eye effect in the order corresponding to the receiving order of the winning information command. . Therefore, when successive chance effects are executed in order, the transition of the gaming state of the gaming machine (the gaming state advantageous to the player) is suggested to the player exactly in the order that the gaming state transitions. be able to.

  Further, the processing of S1208 is also executed during execution of the continuous chance effect or when the variation effect has not been completed once after the continuous chance effect is completed. Here, the reason will be described.

  Although the details will be described later, the received winning information command is processed in the order received by a continuous chance eye determination process (S1207) described later. The continuous chance eye determination process is a process for determining whether or not to start a continuous chance eye effect based on the received winning information command and the value of the special figure holding ball counter 223a. If it is determined by the continuous chance eye determination process that the continuous chance eye effect is started, the continuous chance eye counter 223b is set with the number of times that the variable effect with the stop symbol “chance eye” is continuously performed.

  For example, it is assumed that a winning information command is received and a continuous chance eye determination process is executed during execution of a continuous chance eye effect. If it is determined to start the continuous chance effect, the value of the continuous chance counter 223b used in the continuous chance effect being executed is overwritten. Therefore, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the continuous chance effect, the continuous chance eye determination process is skipped, and the winning information command received during this time is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k. Therefore, since the value of the continuous chance counter 223b can be prevented from being overwritten during the execution of the continuous chance effect, the continuous chance effect can be accurately executed. Also, winning information commands can be stored in the order received, and can be processed later in the order received.

  Further, for example, after the end of the continuous chance effect (for example, “Chance Eye” is displayed three times in succession), the continuous chance effect (for example, “Chance Eye” is displayed in succession three times) is performed. Then, it seems as if the fluctuating effect with “stop chance” as the stop symbol was performed six times in succession. Therefore, in the present embodiment, after the end of the continuous chance effect, until the variation effect whose stop symbol is other than “chance eye” ends once so that the continuous chance effect is not performed, The winning chance information command received during this time is skipped in the continuous chance eye determination process, and is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the continuous chance production from being executed continuously, the maximum number of continuous productions of the variable production with the stop symbol as “chance eye” can be surely limited to the number corresponding to the lottery result. , Can perform the consecutive chance eyes production accurately. Also, winning information commands can be stored in the order received, and can be processed later in the order received.

  In the process of S1204, when the chance eye display skip flag 223d is OFF (S1204: No), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is extracted from the received winning information command and stored in the winning information memory 223j ( S1205).

  Then, 1 is added to the value of the special figure holding ball counter 223a (S1206), a continuous chance eye determination process is executed (S1207), and then the process proceeds to S1209. Details of this consecutive chance eye determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 22, but the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 223a (number of special figure hold balls N) and the value of the winning information memory 223j (the counters C1 to C1) This is a process for determining whether to start the continuous chance eye effect based on each value of C3). When it is determined that the continuous chance eye effect is to be started, various settings for starting the continuous chance eye effect are also made in the continuous chance eye determination process.

  Next, in the process of S1209, it is determined whether a variation pattern command and an effect time addition command have been received (S1209). Specifically, it is determined whether the variation pattern command and the effect time addition command are stored in the command storage area 223l. As described above, the variation pattern command is a command indicating a variation effect pattern to be executed (normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc.), and the effect time addition command is a variation effect to be executed. This is a command indicating a pattern of a notice effect.

  If the variation pattern command and the effect time addition command are not received in the processing of S1209 (S1209: No), the processing of S1210 to S1211 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1212. On the other hand, when the variation pattern command and the production time addition command are received (S1209: Yes), the variation start flag 223f is set to ON (S1210).

  Next, the fluctuation time is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command, and the addition / subtraction value (extension time and shortening time) of the production time is extracted from the production time addition command, and the total value of each time is obtained as the fluctuation time memory. It is stored in 223g (S1211). Thereby, the variation time of the variation effect to be started in the third symbol display device 81 is calculated. When the process of S1211 is completed, the process proceeds to S1212.

  Next, in the process of S1212, it is determined whether a stop symbol command has been received (S1212). Specifically, it is determined whether a stop symbol command is stored in the command storage area 223l. If the stop symbol command is not received in the process of S1212 (S1212: No), the process of S1213 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1214. On the other hand, when the stop symbol command is received (S1212: Yes), the stop symbol pattern is extracted from the received stop symbol command, and the content is stored in the stop symbol pattern memory 223h (S1213). Transition to processing. Specifically, in the stop symbol pattern memory 223h, “probability big hit”, “normal big hit”, “front / rear miss reach”, “reach other than front / rear miss”, “miss chance (one of miss)” , Any one of the six complete (stopping) stop (production) patterns is stored.

  Next, in the process of S1214, it is determined whether a stop command has been received (S1214). Specifically, it is determined whether a stop command is stored in the command storage area 223l. As described above, the stop command is a command indicating the end of the changing effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  If the stop command is not received in the process of S1214 (S1214: No), the process of S1215 to S1219, S1205 to S1207 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1220. On the other hand, if a stop command has been received (S1214: Yes), a display stop command is transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1215). The display control device 114 waits in a state where the variation effect is stopped after the variation time has elapsed after starting the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. Then, when the display stop command is received, the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is ended. When the processing of S1215 is completed, it is next determined whether or not a winning information command is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k (S1216).

  In the processing of S1216, if no winning information command is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k (S1216: No), there is no winning information command to be processed, so the processing of S1217 to S1219, S1205 to S1207 is skipped. Thus, the process proceeds to S1220. On the other hand, if a winning information command is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k in the processing of S1216 (S1216: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the consecutive chance counter 223b is 0 (S1217).

  In the process of S1217, when the value of the continuous chance eye counter 223b is other than 0 (1 or more) (S1217: No), the continuous chance eye effect is being produced. As described above, since the value of the continuous chance counter 223b may be overwritten, the processing of S1218 to S1219, S1205 to S1207 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S1220.

  The processing in S1217 can prevent the continuous chance eye determination process (S1207), which will be described later, from being executed during execution of the continuous chance eye effect, so that the value of the continuous chance eye counter 223b can be prevented from being overwritten. , It is possible to accurately execute the continuous chance eye effect during the execution. Therefore, it is possible to accurately indicate to the player the gaming state that the gaming machine is scheduled to move to after the end of the continuous chance effect, by the number of consecutive variable effects with the stop symbol as “chance eye”. Therefore, the player is relieved according to the number of continuous fluctuation effects with “stop chance” as the stop symbol, and can provide a highly interesting game to the player.

  On the other hand, when the value of the continuous chance eye counter 223b is 0 (S1217: Yes), it is determined whether the chance eye display skip flag 223d is on (S1218).

  In the processing of S1218, when the chance eye display skip flag 223d is on (S1218: Yes), after the continuous chance eye effect ends, the variation effect whose stop symbol is other than “chance eye” ends once. If the continuous chance eye determination process subsequent to this process is executed, as described above, there is a possibility that the continuous chance eye effect may be continuously executed. Therefore, the processes of S1219, S1205 to S1207 are skipped. The process proceeds to S1220.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1218, when the chance eye display skip flag 223d is off (S1218: No), the winning information command is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k, and the continuous chance eye effect is not executed. This is a case where the fluctuating effect is executed once after the continuous chance effect is finished.

  In this case, one winning information command stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k is acquired in the stored order (the order received) (S1219). Then, the processing of S1205 to S1207 is executed, the processing returns to S1216, and while the winning information command is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k, the processing of S1216 to S1219 and S1205 to S1207 is repeated, in the order received. Process winning information commands one by one.

  Note that when the stop command is received, the winning information commands stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k are processed together because the timing at which the stop command is received is the timing at which the variation process is terminated. This is because the process executed at this timing does not affect the execution of the variation effect. Here, even if there is the next variation effect, since the execution has not yet started, the execution of the variation effect is not affected. Moreover, the timing which complete | finishes a fluctuation | variation process is the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 for the image corresponding to fluctuation effect data (variation effects, such as high-speed fluctuation), and the image corresponding to stop effect data (stop effect which displays a stop symbol). This is the timing when the image processing to be displayed on the screen ends. Therefore, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured as an integrated device (for example, an effect control device), at the timing when the control burden is reduced in the effect control device. In addition, since the winning information commands can be processed together, the control burden of the effect control device can be distributed.

  Further, the RAM 223 can be used efficiently by collectively processing the winning information commands stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k. In other words, when the memory area of the acquisition standby command memory 223k is dynamically secured and released from the RAM 223, the winning information command stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k is processed periodically or intermittently. Rather than the case, the period in which the winning information command is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k can be shortened by collectively processing. Therefore, since the memory area secured from the RAM 223 can be released more quickly, the RAM 233 can be used efficiently together with other programs and other memory areas that are dynamically secured.

  Next, in the process of S1220, it is determined whether another command has been received (S1220). Specifically, it is determined whether other commands are stored in the command storage area 223l. If no other command is received in the process of S1220 (S1220: No), the process of S1221 is skipped and the command determination process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the other command is received (S1220: Yes), the process according to the other command is executed (S1221). For example, when a power-off command is received, the power-off occurrence information is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 223. Further, for example, if a hold number command is received, when the hold number display update process (see S1104 in FIG. 20) is executed, the same number of lamps as the special figure hold ball number N indicated by the received hold number command are displayed. Is a process of setting the special figure hold lamp 85 to be lit.

  According to the command determination process (S1109) in FIG. 21 described above, when a winning information command is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k, the received winning information command is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k. The winning information commands can be stored in the order received, and can be processed later in the order received.

  Further, during the execution of the continuous chance effect, the continuous chance determination process is skipped, and during this time, the received winning information command is stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the value of the continuous chance eye counter 223b from being overwritten during execution of the continuous chance eye effect, and to execute the continuous chance eye effect accurately. Therefore, it is possible to accurately indicate to the player the gaming state that the gaming machine is scheduled to move to after the end of the continuous chance effect, by the number of consecutive variable effects with the stop symbol as “chance eye”. Therefore, the player will be anxious according to the continuous number of the fluctuating effects with the stop symbol as the “chance”, and can provide a highly interesting game to the player. Also, winning information commands can be stored in the order received, and can be processed later in the order received.

  Also, after the end of the continuous chance effect, the continuous chance eye determination process is skipped until the variation effect whose stop symbol is other than “chance eye” ends once, during which the received winning information command is acquired. It is stored in the standby command memory 223k. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the continuous chance production from being executed continuously, the maximum number of continuous productions of the variable production with the stop symbol as “chance eye” can be surely limited to the number corresponding to the lottery result. , Can perform the consecutive chance eyes production accurately. Also, winning information commands can be stored in the order received, and can be processed later in the order received.

  Further, when the stop command is received, the winning information command stored in the acquisition standby command memory 223k is processed, so that the winning information command can be processed without affecting the execution of the variation effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the continuous chance eye determination process (S1207) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the continuous chance eye determination process of the audio lamp control device 113. The continuous chance eye determination process (S1207) is based on the value of the special figure holding ball counter 223a (number of special figure holding balls N) and the value of the winning information memory 223j (each value of each counter C1 to C3). This is a process for determining whether or not to start a chance eye effect, and is a process executed in the above-described command determination process (see FIG. 21).

  In this continuous chance eye determination process (S1207), first, the value of the winning information memory 223j of the RAM 223 (each value of each counter C1 to C3) and the state of the high probability state flag 223c are acquired, and based on these conditions. Then, a lottery result of a new winning (a winning corresponding to the received winning information command) is acquired (S1301). Specifically, if the high probability state flag 223c is on, it is determined that the jackpot probability is a high probability state, and the values of the winning information memory 223j (each value of each counter C1 to C3) are analyzed to obtain the lottery result. To do. On the other hand, if the high-probability state flag 223c is off, the value of the winning information memory 223j is analyzed and the lottery result is acquired by assuming that the jackpot probability is the low-probability state.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the new winning lottery result obtained by analysis is a “hit” (S1302). If the new winning lottery result is “hit” (S1302: Yes), the lottery result is determined. Is “probable big hit” (S1303).

  In the process of S1303, when the lottery result is “probable big hit” (S1303: Yes), the high probability state flag 223c is set to ON (S1306), and the process proceeds to S1307. In the processing of S1306, the big probability of the next big hit lottery is set by setting the high probability state flag 223c to ON. As described above, since the jackpot probability of the next jackpot lottery is determined by the latest jackpot lottery result, here, the status of the jackpot probability is updated for the next lottery.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1303, when the lottery result is “normal jackpot” (S1303: No), the high probability state flag 223c is set to OFF (S1304), and the value of the special figure holding ball counter 223a is 4. It is determined whether or not there is (S1305). In the process of S1304, the value of the high probability state flag 223c is updated for the same reason as in the process of S1306 described above.

  In the process of S1305, when the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 223a is 4 (S1305: Yes), the process of S1307 to S1310 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1311. Here, the reason for skipping the processing of S1307 to S1310 is that, in the case of “ordinary big hit”, the variation effect with the stop symbol as “the chance chance” is limited to a maximum of four consecutive times.

  In the case of “probable big hit”, since the number of continuous fluctuation effects with the stop symbol as “chance” is not limited, it is executed five times at maximum. In addition, in the case of “front / rear miss reach” or “miss chance”, the variation effect with the stop symbol as “chance” is limited to a maximum of three consecutive times. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of consecutive fluctuation effects with the stop symbol as “chance” is different for “probable big hit”, “normal big hit”, and “out-of-front reach”. Therefore, the player is relieved according to the number of continuous fluctuation effects with the stop symbol as “chance”, and can provide a highly interesting game to the player.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1305, when the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 223a is less than 4 (S1305: No), it is determined whether or not the stop symbol changeable flag 223e is on (S1307). As described above, the stop symbol change possible flag 223e is a flag indicating whether or not the stop symbol of the variation effect started to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 can be changed. It should be noted that while the stop symbol changeable flag 223e is on, it is within a period in which the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, and when it is off, the stop symbol of the variable effect being executed is being stopped. Cannot be changed.

  In the process of S1307, when the stop symbol changeable flag 223e is on (S1307: Yes), the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 is set to “chance eye” (S1308), A stop symbol change command corresponding to the setting is immediately output to the display control device 114 (S1309). As a result, the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 is changed to “chance eye”.

  Therefore, compared to changing only the stop symbol of the variable effect that has not yet started the production to “chance eyes”, the amount of change of the stop symbol during the variable effect to “chance eyes”, that is, one more time Can display “opportunity”. Therefore, since the chance of performing the continuous chance eye effect can be increased, the player's expectation can be improved. Further, by outputting the stop symbol change command to the display control device 114 immediately as in the process of S1309, it is possible to reliably change the stop symbol during the fluctuating effect to the “chance”. Then, when the process of S1309 ends, the process proceeds to S1311.

  In the processing of S1308, for example, if the pattern of the stop effect of the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 is reach (“rear out of front / rear” or “reach other than front / rear out”), the stop symbol is “ It is set to be “reach chance”, and if the pattern of the stop symbol is other than reach, it is set to be “miss chance”. In this way, it is possible to change the displayed “chance eyes” in the continuous chance eye production, so that the player can avoid having a monotonous impression on the game, and has high interest. It becomes possible to provide the game which has. Alternatively, all may be set to be “miss chance chances”, or all may be set to be “reach chance eyes”.

  In the present embodiment, when the stop symbol changeable flag 223e is ON, the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 is set to “chance eye”. If the stop pattern pattern of the variation effect is reach (“rear out of front / rear reach” or “reach other than front / rear out”), the reach is displayed as it is in the stop design, and the stop pattern pattern of the current variation effect is displayed. If is other than reach, the stop symbol may be set to be “chance”. In general, reach is more valuable than “chance eyes”. Therefore, in this way, since it is possible to preferentially perform a variation effect with a high game value, the player is glad and can provide a highly interesting game to the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the stop symbol changeable flag 223e is on, the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 is set to “chance eye”. If the variation effect pattern is a pattern with a high gaming value (for example, super reach or premium reach), the variation effect being executed is performed as it is, and the variation effect pattern being executed is the game value. If the pattern is low (for example, normal reach), the stop symbol may be set to be a “chance”. In this way, since it is possible to preferentially perform a variation effect with a high game value, the player will be anxious and can provide a highly entertaining game to the player.

  On the other hand, if the stop symbol change enable flag 223e is OFF in the processing of S1307 (S1307: No), the stop symbol of the running variation effect being executed cannot be changed, so the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 223a is 2 or more. It is determined whether or not there is (S1310). In the process of S1310, when the value of the special figure holding ball counter 223a is 2 or more (S1310: Yes), a continuous chance effect (variable effect with the stop symbol as “chance eye” can be continuously performed). Since this is possible, the process proceeds to S1311.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1310, when the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 223a is less than 2 (S1310: No), the current special figure reservation ball number N including the new winnings is 1, and the continuous Since the chance eye effect cannot be performed, this continuous chance eye determination process is terminated without doing anything. As a result, the fluctuating effect with the stop symbol as the “chance” is continuously executed at least twice or more. That is, since single execution can be prohibited, it is possible to increase the value of the continuous chance effect.

  In the process of S1302, if the lottery result of the new winning is “dismiss” (S1302: No), it is determined whether the lottery result is “rear out of front / rear reach” (S1312). In the process of S1312, when the lottery result is “front / rear out of reach” (S1312: Yes), the process proceeds to S1314. If the lottery result is out of the range other than “front / rear out of reach” (S1312: No), it is determined whether the lottery result of the new winning is “out chance (out of one)” (S1313).

  In the process of S1313, if the lottery result of the new winning is out of the range other than “No chance to miss” (S1313: No), the lottery result of the new winning is a lottery result that is not related to the continuous chance eye effect. Since there is, this continuous chance eye determination process is terminated without doing anything. On the other hand, in the process of S1313, when the lottery result of the new winning is “miss chance” (S1313: Yes), the process proceeds to S1314.

  In the present embodiment, if a new winning lottery result happens to be “miss chance”, the continuous chance effect is executed based on the value of the special figure holding ball counter 223a. . Thereby, since the opportunity to perform a continuous chance eye effect can be increased, a player's expectation can be improved.

  In the process of S1314, it is determined whether the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 223a is 2 (S1314). When the value of the special figure holding ball counter 223a is 2 (S1314: Yes), 2 is stored in the continuous chance counter 223b (S1315), and this continuous chance eye determination process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S1314, it is determined whether the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 223a is 3 or more (S1316). Since the process of S1316 is executed when S1314: No, the process is executed when the value of the special figure holding ball counter 223a is 1 or 3 or more.

  In the process of S1316, when the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 223a is less than 3 (S1316: No), that is, when the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 223a is 1, the continuous chance eye effect cannot be performed. This continuous chance eye determination process is terminated without doing anything. As a result, the fluctuating effect with the stop symbol as the “chance” is continuously executed at least twice or more. That is, since single execution can be prohibited, it is possible to increase the value of the continuous chance effect.

  On the other hand, when the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 223a is 3 or more in the processing of S1316 (S1316: Yes), 3 is stored in the continuous chance counter 223b (S1317). This is because, as described above, in the case of “front / rear miss reach” or “miss chance”, the variation effect with the stop symbol as “chance” is limited to a maximum of three consecutive times. Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 223a is 4 (S1318). If the value of the special figure reservation ball counter 223a is 4 (S1318: Yes), the chance eye display skip flag 223d is turned on. (S1319), the continuous chance eye determination process is terminated.

  Here, the reason why the chance eye display skip flag 223d is set to ON will be described. When the value of the special figure holding ball counter 223a is 4, the fluctuating effect will be performed four times from now on. However, in the case of “front / rear out of reach” or “off chance”, the stop symbol is set to “chance”. The fluctuating effect of “Eye” is limited to a maximum of 3 consecutive times. Therefore, the chance eye display skip flag 223d is set to ON so that the stop symbol of the variation effect executed first is a stop symbol other than the “chance eye” (see S1417 in FIG. 23).

  On the other hand, if the value of the special figure holding ball counter 223a is other than 4 (that is, 3) in the process of S1318 (S1318: No), the process of S1319 is skipped and the continuous chance eye determination process is terminated. .

  According to the continuous chance eye determination process (S1207) of FIG. 22 described above, if the new winning is “probable big hit” or “normal big hit” and the stop symbol changeable flag 223e is on, the third win In the symbol display device 81, the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed can be changed. Therefore, compared to the configuration in which only the stop symbol of the variable effect that has not yet started the production is changed to “chance eye”, the amount that the stop symbol in the variable effect can be changed to “chance eye”, that is, once more Can display “opportunity”. Therefore, since the chance of performing the continuous chance eye effect can be increased, the player's expectation can be improved.

  In addition, in the case of “probability big hit”, the number of continuous variation effects with the stop symbol as “chance eyes” can be made up to 5 consecutive times, because the stop symbol during the variation effects can be changed to “chance eyes”. On the other hand, in the case of “ordinary jackpot”, the number of consecutive fluctuation effects with the stop symbol as “chance eyes” can be limited to a maximum of 4 consecutive times. In the case of “rear out of reach reach” or “off chance eyes” , It can be limited to a maximum of 3 consecutive times, and “chance eyes” display in a single shot (only once) can be prohibited. Therefore, the player will be anxious according to the continuous number of fluctuating effects with “stop chance” as the stop symbol, and can provide a highly interesting game to the player. In addition, since the “chance eyes” display in a single shot (only once) is prohibited, the value of the continuous chance eyes production can be increased.

  Also, by chance, if the result of the new winning lottery is “miss chance (one of miss)”, the continuous chance effect can be executed based on the value of the special figure holding ball counter 223a. . Therefore, since the opportunity to perform a continuous chance eye effect can be increased, a player's expectation can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the fluctuation display process (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation display process of the audio lamp control device 113. The variable display process (S1110) is a process for setting the effect mode of the variable effect (variable display) in the third symbol display device 81, and is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 20). is there.

  In this variation display process (S1110), it is first determined whether or not the variation start flag 223f of the RAM 223 is on (S1401). As described above, the variation start flag 223f is a flag that is turned on when the main control device 110 is instructed to start the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, the variation start flag 223f is from the main control device 110. This flag is set to ON when a transmitted variation pattern command is received (see S1210 in FIG. 21).

  If the variation start flag 223f is off in the processing of S1401 (S1401: No), since the start of the variation effect is not instructed, this variation display processing is terminated without doing anything. On the other hand, when the fluctuation start flag 223f is on (S1401: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223f is set to off (S1402), and the stop symbol pattern stored in the stop symbol pattern memory 223h of the RAM 223 is acquired. At the same time, the fluctuation time stored in the fluctuation time memory 223g is acquired (S1403).

  As described above, the stop symbol pattern memory 223h is a memory in which the stop symbol pattern of the variation effect to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 is stored, and is “probability big hit”, “normal big hit”, “front / rear out of reach reach”. ”,“ Reach other than front / rear out ”,“ off chance chance (one of out) ”, and“ complete out ”are stored (see S1213 in FIG. 21). ). The variation time memory 223g is a memory in which the variation time of the variation effect to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 is stored.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the chance eye display skip flag 223d of the RAM 223 is on (S1404). As described above, the chance eye display skip flag 223d is a flag that is set on to prevent the continuous chance eye effect from being performed after the continuous chance eye effect ends (see S1411). Alternatively, this flag is also set to ON when the effect of changing the stop symbol as “chance” can be performed four times continuously and limited to a maximum of three times (see S1319 in FIG. 22).

  In the process of S1404, when the chance eye display skip flag 223d is on (S1404: Yes), the stop symbol of the changing effect is a stop symbol other than the “chance eye”. In this case, the chance eye display skip flag 223d is set to OFF (S1415), the process of S1409 described later is executed, and the process proceeds to S1416.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1404, when the chance eye display skip flag 223d is off (S1404: No), the processing proceeds to S1405. In the process of S1405, it is determined whether or not the value of the consecutive chance counter 223b is 1 (S1405). As described above, the continuous chance eye counter 223b is a counter that indicates the number of times that the variation effect with the stop symbol as “chance eye” is continuously performed, and the stop symbol is displayed until the value of the continuous chance eye counter 223b becomes zero. Fluctuating effects are continuously performed as “opportunities”.

  In the process of S1405, when the value of the continuous chance eye counter 223b is 1 (S1405: Yes), it is a case where the last variation effect is performed in the continuous chance eye effect. In this case, it is determined whether the result of the variation effect is a big hit based on the stop symbol pattern acquired in the process of S1403 (S1406). In the process of S1406, if the result of the fluctuating effect is a big hit (S1406: Yes), that is, if the acquired stop symbol pattern is “probable big hit” or “ordinary big hit”, the fluctuation acquired in the process of S1403 Within the time, the stop symbol is displayed as a “chance eye”, and thereafter, a changing production that develops is set (S1407).

  Then, the stop symbol pattern of the variation effect that is started to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 is set to the stop symbol pattern (“probable big hit” or “normal jackpot”) acquired in the process of S1403 (S1408), The process proceeds to S1411.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1406, when the result of the variation effect is “displacement” (S1406: No), that is, the stop pattern of the acquired stop symbol is “rearward / rearward reach” or “disappearance chance (one of the distractions). In the case of “)”, a variation effect according to the variation time acquired in the process of S1403 is set (S1409).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation time is determined for each variation effect pattern (disappearance, normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc.) and for each notification effect pattern. Therefore, in the process of S1409, for example, if the variation time acquired in the process of S1403 is 11 seconds ± 2 seconds, a variation effect for losing is set, and if it is 20 seconds ± 2 seconds, a variation effect for normal reach is set. Further, for example, if the acquired variation time is 30 seconds ± 2 seconds, a super-reaching variation effect is set, and if the acquired variation time is 60 seconds ± 2 seconds, a premium reach variation effect is set. Then, the variable design stop symbol pattern to be executed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to “chance” (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1411.

  For example, in the process of S1410, if the stop symbol pattern of the variation effect to be executed is reach (“rear out of front / rear” or “reach other than front / rear out”), the stop symbol pattern is set to “reach chance”. If the stop symbol pattern is “miss chance” (finally, it is not “completely missed”. In the first place, it is not a continuous chance effect), the stop symbol pattern is set to “miss chance”. In this way, it is possible to change the displayed “chance eyes” in the continuous chance eye production, so that the player can avoid having a monotonous impression on the game, and has high interest. It becomes possible to provide the game which has. Alternatively, all may be set to be “miss chance chances”, or all may be set to be “reach chance eyes”.

  In the process of S1411, the chance eye display skip flag 223d is set to ON (S1411), and the process proceeds to S1414. Here, the reason why the chance eye display skip flag 223d is set to ON is to prevent the continuous chance eye effect from being continuously executed as described above.

  In the process of S1405, when the value of the continuous chance eye counter 223b is other than 1 (0 or 2 or more) (S1405: No), the process of S1409 is executed, and then the value of the continuous chance eye counter 223b is 2 or more. Is determined (S1412). Since the process of S1412 is executed when S1405: No, the process is executed when the value of the continuous chance counter 223b is 0 or 2 or more.

  In the process of S1412, when the value of the continuous chance eye counter 223b is 2 or more (S1412: Yes), the pattern pattern of the changing effect to be started on the third symbol display device 81 is set to “chance eye”. (S1413), and the process proceeds to S1414.

  For example, in the process of S1413, if the stop symbol pattern of the variation effect to be executed is reach (“rear out of front / rear” or “reach other than front / rear out”), the stop symbol pattern is set to “reach chance”. If the stop symbol pattern is other than reach (“miss chance” or “completely miss”), the stop symbol pattern is set to “miss chance”. In this way, it is possible to change the displayed “chance eyes” in the continuous chance eye production, so that the player can avoid having a monotonous impression on the game, and has high interest. It becomes possible to provide the game which has. Alternatively, all may be set to be “miss chance chances”, or all may be set to be “reach chance eyes”.

  In the process of S1414, 1 is subtracted from the value of the continuous chance counter 223b (S1414), and the process proceeds to S1419. If the value of the consecutive chance counter 223b is 0 in the process of S1412 (S1412: No), it is determined whether the pattern of the stop symbol acquired in the process of S1403 is a “miss chance chance” (S1416).

  In the process of S1416, when the pattern of the stop symbol acquired in the process of S1403 is “miss chance” (S1416: Yes), when the number N of special figure reservation balls is 0, a new winning is happened by chance. This is a case where the lottery result of “No chance to miss”. This is because, when the special figure holding ball number N is 1 or more, if the chance result of the new winning lottery is “miss chance”, the value of the consecutive chance counter 223b is set to 1 or more. Because it should be done. Therefore, in this case, in order to prohibit the variation effect having the stop symbol as “chance eye” from being executed in a single shot, the stop symbol pattern of the variation effect to be started in the third symbol display device 81 is expressed as “ A pattern other than “chance” is set (S1417).

  Specifically, the stop symbol pattern is set to any one of “front / rear detachment reach”, “reach other than front / rear detachment”, or “complete detachment”. As a result, it is possible to prevent the fluctuating effect having the stop symbol “the chance to miss” from being executed by chance, so that the value of the continuous chance effect can be increased. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S1419.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1416, when the pattern of the stop symbol acquired in the process of S1403 is other than “miss chance” (S1416: No), that is, the pattern of the stop symbol is “probable big hit”, “normal big hit” , “Front / rear out of reach”, “reach out of front / rear out of reach”, and “completely out”, the processing of S1403 is performed as the pattern of the stop effect of the variation effect to be executed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop symbol pattern acquired in step S1418 is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to S1419.

  In the process of S1419, the display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation effect set in the process of S1407 or S1409, the process of S1408, the process of S1410, the process of S1413, the process of S1417, or S1418. A display stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern set in the above process is transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1419).

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the special figure holding ball counter 223a (S1420), and the stop symbol changeable flag 223e is set to ON (S1421). Then, the value of the variation time timer 223i in the RAM 223 is initialized to 0, measurement of the variation effect execution time is started (S1422), and this variation display process is terminated.

  The above-described variation display process (S1110) in FIG. 23 can set the effect mode of the variation effect (variation display) in the third symbol display device 81. Further, when the special figure holding ball number N is 0, when the lottery result of a new winning is accidentally “off chance (one of miss)”, the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to set a stop pattern pattern of the variation effect to be executed to a disconnect pattern other than “disappearance chance”. Therefore, since the fluctuating effect with the stop symbol as “chance eyes” can be prohibited from being executed by chance, the value of the continuous chance effect can be increased.

  In this embodiment, when the chance eye display skip flag 223d is ON, the display of “chance eye” is skipped. For example, a counter indicating the number of skips is provided, Set the number of times to skip "eyes". Each time the display of “chance” is skipped, the number of counters may be decremented by 1, and the display may be repeated until the number of counters becomes 0, thereby skipping the display of “chance”. By configuring in this way, it is possible to skip the display of multiple “chance eyes”, so the fluctuation that makes the stop symbol “chance eyes” regardless of the maximum number of holdings (even if the maximum number of holdings is 5 or more). The number of continuous productions can be limited to a certain number. In other words, even if the maximum number of holds is 8, if it is “probable big hit”, it can be limited to a maximum of 5 consecutive times, and if it is “normal jackpot”, it can be limited to a maximum of 4 consecutive times. ”Or“ outgoing reach ”, it can be limited to a maximum of 3 consecutive times.

  Next, the variable execution time update process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the variable execution time update process of the sound lamp control device 113. The variable execution time update process (S1111) is a process for updating the execution time of the variable effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 (the elapsed time since the execution of the variable effect is started). This is a process executed in the process (see FIG. 20).

  In this variable execution time update process (S1111), it is first determined whether or not the stop symbol change enable flag 223e of the RAM 223 is on (S1501). As described above, the stop symbol change possible flag 223e is a flag indicating whether or not the stop symbol of the variation effect started to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 can be changed. It should be noted that while the stop symbol changeable flag 223e is on, it is within a period in which the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81 can be changed, and when it is off, the stop symbol of the variable effect being executed is being stopped. Cannot be changed.

  In the process of S1501, if the stop symbol changeable flag 223e is on (S1501: Yes), the value of the variable time timer 223i (the execution time of the variable effect) in the RAM 223 is updated (S1502). On the other hand, in the process of S1501, when the stop symbol changeable flag 223e is off (S1501: No), the stop symbol cannot be changed and there is no need to update the time, so S1502 to S1504 are skipped. The variable execution time update process is terminated.

  Then, it is determined whether the value of the variation time timer 223i exceeds the value of the changeable period memory 222a (S1503). As described above, the changeable period memory 222a is a memory in which the changeable changeable period (period in which the stop symbol can be changed) started to be executed in the third symbol display device 81 is stored (FIG. 6A). )reference).

  In the process of S1503, when the value of the variable time timer 223i exceeds the value of the changeable period memory 222a (S1503: Yes), the stop symbol can be changed so far, This is a case where the stop symbol cannot be changed. In this case, the stop symbol change possible flag 223e is set to OFF (S1504), and this variable execution time update process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1503, when the value of the variable time timer 223i does not exceed the value of the changeable period memory 222a (S1503: No), the stop symbol can be changed this time as well, so the process of S1504 The process is skipped, and the variable execution time update process is terminated.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 32. The MPU 231 is roughly classified into a main process that is repeatedly executed after power-on and an external interrupt process that is executed when a command is received. For convenience of explanation, the external interrupt process is described first, and then The main process will be described.

  First, an external interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing external interrupt processing of the display control device 114. This external interrupt process is an interrupt process for receiving various commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and is executed every time various commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 are received. It is.

  In this external interrupt process, first, it is determined whether a display variation pattern command has been received (S1801). As described above, the display variation pattern command is a command indicating a variation effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (variation effect pattern) and a jackpot effect. If the display variation pattern command is received in the processing of S1801 (S1801: Yes), the variation start flag 233a of the work RAM 233 is set to ON (S1802).

  Then, the variation time is extracted from the received variation pattern command for display, and variation effect data corresponding to the variation time is read from the character ROM 235 and stored in the variation effect storage area 234a of the video RAM 234 (S1803). As described above, the fluctuation effect data is data for performing a fluctuation effect such as high-speed fluctuation in the third symbol display device 81. The stop data is data for performing a stop effect for displaying the stop symbol on the third symbol display device 81.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to S1804. On the other hand, if the display variation pattern command is not received in the process of S1801 (S1801: No), the process of S1802 to S1803 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1804.

  In the processing of S1804, it is determined whether or not a display stop symbol command has been received (S1804). As described above, the display stop symbol command is a command indicating the stop symbol of the changing effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the process of S1804, when a display stop symbol command is received (S1804: Yes), a stop symbol pattern (“probable big hit”, “normal jackpot”, “front / rear out of reach”, from the received display stop symbol command, “One of the six of“ reach other than front / rear out of reach ”,“ miss chance (one of out) ”, and“ complete out ”) is extracted, and the stop effect data according to the pattern of the stop symbol is extracted. The data is read from the ROM 235 and stored in the stop effect storage area 234b of the video RAM 234 (S1805). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S1806. On the other hand, if the display stop symbol command is not received in the process of S1804 (S1804: No), the process of S1805 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1806.

  In the process of S1806, it is determined whether a stop symbol change command has been received (S1806). As described above, the stop symbol change command is a command for changing the stop symbol of the variation effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81 to “chance”. When the stop symbol change command is received in the processing of S1806 (S1806: Yes), stop effect data having the stop symbol as “chance” is read from the character ROM 235 and stored in the stop effect storage area 234b ( S1807).

  That is, the stop effect data set before the start of the change effect is rewritten (overwritten) with the stop effect data whose stop symbol is “chance”. As a result, the stop symbol can be changed after the variation effect is started on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) (that is, in the middle of the variation effect). When the process of S1807 is completed, the process proceeds to S1808. On the other hand, if the stop symbol change command has not been received in the process of S1806 (S1806: No), the process of S1807 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1808.

  In the processing of S1808, it is determined whether another command has been received (S1808). If another command has been received (S1808: Yes), processing according to the received command is performed (S1809). For example, if the received command is a display stop command, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process of stopping the changing effect that is being executed or has been executed. Then, when the processing of S1809 ends, this external interrupt processing ends. On the other hand, if no other command is received in the processing of S1808 (S1808: No), the processing of S1809 is skipped and the external interrupt processing is terminated.

  With the above-described external interrupt process of FIG. 32, various commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 can be received, and a process according to the received command can be executed. When the stop symbol change command is received, the stop effect data set (stored) in the stop effect storage area 234b is rewritten to stop effect data having the stop symbol as “chance eye” before the start of the variable effect ( Can be overwritten). Therefore, after the variation effect is started on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) (that is, in the middle of the variation effect), the stop symbol can be changed.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing main processing of the display control apparatus 114. The main process is started when the power is turned on, and is repeatedly executed thereafter.

  In the main process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1601). Specifically, processing for initializing the MPU 231 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 234 is performed. Thereafter, when the power is turned on, an initial screen indicating that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD). Data is read from the character ROM 235 and stored in a predetermined area in the video RAM 234 (S1602). Then, using the effect data stored in the process of S1602, an initial screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) (S1603).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the fluctuating effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81 is a jackpot effect (that is, whether or not the jackpot is being hit) (S1604). If it is not a jackpot (S1604: No) Fluctuation effect processing for displaying an image corresponding to the variation effect or stop effect is executed on the third symbol display device 81 (S1605), and the process proceeds to S1607. The details of the variation effect process (S1605) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot is in the process of S1604 (S1604: Yes), the jackpot effect process is executed (S1606). In the jackpot presentation process, the number of rounds is updated, the number of winning balls is updated, the background image is updated for each round (for example, the presentation data is read from the character ROM 235 for each round, and the predetermined number in the video RAM 234 is set. Write to the area). After the big hit effect process (S1606) is completed, the process proceeds to S1607.

  In the process of S1607, the process of S1605 or the process of S1606 is started in order to execute the process (S1605 process or S1606 process) of performing an effect in the third symbol display device 81 every 20 milliseconds. It is confirmed whether or not 20 milliseconds or more have elapsed since the first time (S1607). In the process of S1607, when 20 msec or more has not elapsed since the process of S1605 or S1606 was started (S1607: No), the process waits until 20 msec elapses, and returns to the process of S1604. The processes of S1604 to S1607 are repeated.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1607, when 20 msec or more has elapsed since the process of S1605 or S1606 was started (S1607: Yes), the process returns to S1604, and the processes of S1604 to S1607 described above are performed. repeat. Note that the processing of S1604 to S1607 described above is repeatedly executed until the power is turned off (or shut off).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the change effect process (S1605) executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the variation effect process of the display control device 114. This variation effect process (S1605) is a process for displaying an image corresponding to the variation effect and the stop effect on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD), and in the main process (see FIG. 30) described above. It is a process to be executed.

  In the variable display process (S1605), first, it is determined whether or not the variable effect is being executed (changed) in the third symbol display device 81 (S1701). It is determined whether the fluctuation start flag 233a of the RAM 233 is on (S1702). As described above, the variation start flag 233a is a flag that is turned on when the sound lamp control device 113 instructs the start of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, the flag is set to ON when a display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received (see S1802 in FIG. 32).

  If the variation start flag 233a is off in the processing of S1702 (S1702: No), other display processing is executed (S1711), and the variation display processing is terminated. The other display process is, for example, a display process such as an effect of waiting for a customer to be executed when a predetermined time has elapsed when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player.

  On the other hand, if the variation start flag 233a is on (S1702: Yes) in the processing of S1702, the variation start flag 233a is turned off (S1703), and the variation time counter 233b of the work RAM 233 is reset (set to 0). (S1704), the process proceeds to S1706. As described above, the fluctuation time counter 233b is a counter that stores an elapsed time after the fluctuation effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1701, when the variation effect is being executed (changed) in the third symbol display device 81 (S1701: Yes), the value of the variation time counter 233b is updated (S1705), and the process of S1706 is performed. Migrate to The update of the fluctuation time counter 233b is to add 20 milliseconds to the value of the fluctuation time counter 233b.

  In the process of S1706, it is determined whether or not the display stop command for display transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 has been received, so that it is within the variation effect time (S1706). For example, it is determined that it is within the variation effect time from the start of the variation effect until the display stop command is received.

  In the process of S1706, if it is determined that the time is within the variation effect time (S1706: Yes), it is determined whether it is time to execute the stop effect (S1707). For example, it is determined whether the elapsed time of the fluctuation time counter 233b exceeds the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation presentation data (variation presentation such as high-speed fluctuation) stored in the fluctuation presentation storage area 234a. Determines that it is time to execute a stop effect for displaying a stop symbol.

  In the processing of S1707, if it is not yet time to execute the stop effect (S1707: No), the third symbol display device 81 (No.) is used using the change effect data stored in the change effect storage area 234a of the video RAM 234. An image corresponding to the fluctuation effect data (fluctuation effect such as high-speed fluctuation) is displayed on the LCD) (S1708). As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation effect for one time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 includes variation effect data for performing a variation effect such as high-speed variation, and a stop effect for displaying a stop symbol. It is performed based on stop effect data for performing. And this variation production process is complete | finished.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1707, when it is time to execute the stop effect (S1707: Yes), the stop effect data stored in the stop effect storage area 234b of the video RAM 234 is used to display the third symbol display device. An image corresponding to stop effect data (stop effect for displaying stop symbols) is displayed on 81 (LCD) (S1709). And this variation production process is complete | finished.

  In the processing of S1706, when it is not within the variation effect time (S1706: No), that is, when the variation effect time is over, the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) is stopped (S1710). The variation effect process is terminated. In the process of S1710, for example, the display of a new image on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) is stopped. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD), the displayed image continues to be displayed as it is. When the process of S1710 is completed, the variation effect process is terminated.

  31 can display an image corresponding to the variation effect or the stop effect on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD). In addition, a variation effect for one time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) can be performed based on the variation effect data and the stop effect data. Specifically, when the variation effect is started, first, the variation effect data stored in the variation effect storage area 234a is read, and an image corresponding to the variation effect data (variation effect such as high-speed fluctuation) is displayed as the third pattern. It is displayed on the display device 81. When all the images are displayed, the stop effect data stored in the stop effect storage area 234b is read out, and an image corresponding to the stop effect data (stop effect for displaying the stop symbol) is displayed.

  That is, since the data used for one variation effect is stored in different storage areas 234a and 234b and read out as necessary, execution of the stop effect is started within the variation effect time. If it is before, the stop effect data set (stored) before the start of the variable effect can be rewritten (overwritten) with another stop effect data. Therefore, after the variation effect is started on the third symbol display device 81 (LCD) (that is, in the middle of the variation effect), the stop symbol can be changed to “chance”.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to change the stop symbol of the variable effect that has not yet started the effect to the “chance eye”, and furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81 The stop symbol during the fluctuating production can be changed to “chance” during the fluctuating production. Therefore, compared to the configuration in which only the stop symbol of the variable effect that has not yet started the production is changed to “chance eye”, the amount that the stop symbol in the variable effect can be changed to “chance eye”, that is, once more Can display “opportunity”.

  In addition, since the stop symbol can be changed to “chance” in the middle of the variation effect, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, is there a variation effect being executed (the stop symbol can be changed)? Alternatively, if the number N of special figure reservation balls is at least 1, a continuous chance effect can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of performing the chance chance continuous, rather than changing only the stop pattern of the fluctuation production that has not yet started the production to “chance eye”, so that the player's expectation is improved. Can do.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be easily guessed.

  For example, in the above embodiment, the audio lamp control device 113 determines whether or not to perform a continuous chance eye effect, but instead determines whether or not to perform a continuous chance eye effect in the main control device 110. It is good also as a structure which performs this determination. In the main control device 110, when it is determined whether or not to perform a continuous chance effect, it is not necessary to transmit / receive a winning information command, so the number of command transmissions in the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 It is possible to reduce the number of times the command is received. Therefore, both the control burdens of the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113 can be reduced.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the stop symbol change command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received by the display control device 114, the stop symbol that is in the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 is changed to the change effect. However, the stop symbol after the change is not limited to the “chance eye” but may be changed to another stop symbol. For example, if information indicating the type of stop symbol is included in the stop symbol change command, the stop symbol during the variation effect can be changed to an arbitrary stop symbol during the variation effect.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the maximum number of continuous fluctuation effects with “stop chance” as the stop symbol is 5 continuous, but 5 continuous or more may be displayed. For example, if the variation effect is performed four times in succession, “chance eyes” are displayed a plurality of times within the period of each variation effect. Since the fluctuating effect for displaying the chance eye is 11 seconds, especially if the fluctuating effect is premium reach (60 seconds), the fluctuation time is relatively long, so that the “chance eye” can be easily displayed a plurality of times. Can do. In this way, the number of “chance eyes” can be increased without changing the number of fluctuating effects, and the player's expectation can also be improved.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the last variation effect in the continuous chance effect is ended with “probable big hit” or “normal jackpot”, when the last change effect is started, the “chance eye” is displayed first. Then, the stop effect corresponding to “probable big jackpot” or “ordinary jackpot” is displayed. However, in the last change effect, the “chance eyes” display and the development effect are not performed. Alternatively, a stop symbol corresponding to “probability big hit” or “normal big hit” may be displayed.

  Also, in the above embodiment, when the new winning is “ordinary jackpot” and the reception timing of the winning information command corresponding to the new winning is within the period during which the stop symbol can be changed (changeable period) In addition, if the number N of special figure holding balls including a new winning is 4, the display of “chance eyes” is limited to a maximum of four consecutive times, and the stop pattern of the currently running variation effect is not changed. . Instead of this, the stop pattern of the variation effect currently being executed is changed to “chance eye”, and thereafter, the stop symbols of the variable effect from the first to the third time after winning are also changed to “chance eye”. However, the stop pattern of the 4th variation production after winning a prize, which is the last variation production, does not display the “chance” but simply displays the stop symbol corresponding to “normal jackpot” The display of “eyes” may be limited to a maximum of four consecutive times.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although all the changeable periods are made into the same time (8 second), in the stop timing of the 3rd symbol of each symbol row (Z1-Z3 or Z1'-Z3 '), and a stop symbol Based on this, the changeable period may be determined. For example, it is configured so that a stop symbol can be set (designated) for each symbol row (Z1 to Z3 or Z1 ′ to Z3 ′), and each symbol row (Z1 to Z3 or Z1) before the change effect. The stop symbols to be displayed in 'to Z3') are set and stored for each symbol row. As described above, if the variation direction of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is horizontal scrolling (see FIG. 7A), the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol. The variable display stops in the order of column Z2. That is, even if the third symbol is stopped in the upper symbol row Z1, the stopped symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 and the middle symbol row Z2 are changed until the third symbol is stopped in the lower symbol row Z3 (that is, the upper symbol row Z3). Since the “chance eye” can be displayed by changing to the stop symbol of the symbol row Z1, the changeable period is set. Even if the third symbol is stopped in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, if the same third symbol is stopped, the stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is changed (the same third symbol). Since the “chance” can be displayed by changing to a symbol), the changeable period is set. In the case of vertical scrolling (see FIG. 7B), the upper symbol row Z1 becomes the left symbol row Z1 ′, the lower symbol row Z3 becomes the right symbol row Z3 ′, and the middle symbol row Z2 ′ becomes the middle symbol row. The same is true only with Z2 ′.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the continuous chance eye effect is not continuously performed after the end of the continuous chance eye effect, but the continuous chance eye effect may be continuously performed. For example, in the case of continuously performing the chance chance effect, the total number of times of the variation effect having the stop symbol as “chance eye” does not exceed the maximum number of consecutive times according to the lottery result. Specifically, if the lottery result of the subsequent consecutive chance stage production is “probable big hit”, the maximum number of consecutive fluctuation productions with “stop chance” as the stop symbol is up to 5 consecutive times, and up to 4 if “normal big prize”. Up to 3 consecutive times, and “up / down reach or missed chance” up to 3 consecutive times. As a result, the number of continuous variation effects with the stop symbol as “chance” increases, so that the player's expectation can be improved.

  In addition, in the continuous chance eye effect of the above-described embodiment, the fluctuating effect is continuously performed with the “stop chance symbol (displacement chance eye, reach chance eye)” as the stop symbol, but the stop symbol is “chance eye”. Instead, the sound effect during the changing effect (the mode of the sound effect of the dynamic display, for example, the stop sound of the third pattern, etc.) may be changed to a sound effect different from that during the normal changing effect. This sound effect allows the player to recognize that the continuous chance stage production is being performed, so that the player's interest can be attracted. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to participate in the game.

  In addition, in the continuous chance eye production of the above embodiment, a variable production with the stop symbol as “chance eye (miss chance chance, reach chance eye)” is performed continuously, but instead, a special special different from normal It is also possible to perform various fluctuation effects continuously. For example, the same variation effect (the aspect of the dynamic display effect is the same) may be performed continuously, or different variation effects may be performed successively in a predetermined order. By this special variation effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the continuous chance effect is being produced, so that it is possible to attract the player's interest. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to participate in the game.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 and the display control apparatus 114 are provided separately, you may provide each apparatus 113,114 integrally as one apparatus instead.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although it was set as the structure where the 1st entrance 64 was provided as an entrance where a jackpot determination is started, this 1st entrance may be two or more. . And it may be configured to change the effect mode of the continuous chance eye effect (for example, change the scroll direction (vertical and horizontal) of the effect) in accordance with the first entrance where the game ball has won.

  In the above embodiment, the stop pattern is determined when determining the effect pattern (rear-front / rear reach, reach other than front-rear, reach chance (one off), complete disengagement) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is determined based on the counter value of the selection counter C3, but without providing the stop pattern selection counter C3, other counters (the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the variation type counters CS1 to CS1) You may comprise so that it may determine based on the counter value of CS3). The effect pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81 includes one counter value of the variation type counters CS1 to CS3, a counter value of the first random number counter C1, and a counter of the first type counter C2. Or the counter value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the counter value of the first per-type counter C2. May be determined.

  Further, in the first random number counter C1 in the above embodiment, the numerical value in the range of 0 to 738 is counted, but the range to be counted may be determined as appropriate. Here, in order to count a numerical value in a range of 0 to 738, an area of at least 1 byte (a range that can be counted by 1 byte is 0 to 255) is required. For example, if the first random number counter C1 is composed of 2 bytes, a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 that is the maximum range that can be counted by 2 bytes may be counted, or 0 to 32768 (the most significant bit) Only a bit value of “1” and other bits may be counted in the range of bit value “0”).

  Similarly, the first hit type counter C2 in the above embodiment counts a value in the range of 0 to 4, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 counts a value in the range of 0 to 238. The range may be determined as appropriate. Here, in order to count values in the range of 0 to 4 and in the range of 0 to 238, an area of at least 2 bytes (the range that can be counted by 2 bytes is 0 to 65535) is required. For example, if the first hit type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are composed of 1 byte, numerical values in the range of 0 to 255, which is the maximum range that can be counted by 1 byte, may be counted. , 0 to 128 (only the most significant bit has a bit value of “1” and other bits have a bit value of “0”) may be counted.

  Here, when the probability is calculated using the maximum value of the range to be counted as the denominator and the one count value as the numerator, the wider the range to be counted, the easier it is to provide various probabilities. For example, if the denominator is 100, the probability can be set only for every 1%, but if the denominator is 1000, the probability can be set for every 0.1%. That is, the wider the counting range, the easier the fine adjustment of the probability. In pachinko machines, it is common to produce models with the same variation effect and jackpot effect but different jackpot probabilities, so by configuring the pachinko machine so that you can easily fine-tune the probability, Fine adjustment of the jackpot probability can be easily made for each model, and the design burden can be reduced.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although comprised so that the pending | holding number command may be transmitted from the main control apparatus 110 to the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113, you may comprise so that a pending | holding number command may not be transmitted. That is, in the voice lamp control device 113, the special figure holding ball number N is stored in the special figure holding ball counter 223a of the RAM 223, so that the special figure holding ball number N can be obtained without receiving the holding number command. . That is, in this case, the same number of lamps as the value of the special figure holding ball counter 223a are configured to be lit in the special figure holding lamp 85. As a result, the number of command transmissions in the main control device 110 and the number of command receptions in the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced, so both the control burdens on the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 are reduced. can do.

  In the above embodiment, the “variable direction command” is provided. However, the present invention may be implemented by a pachinko machine or the like not provided with the “variable direction command”. In the above embodiment, the “calculation time addition command” is provided, but the present invention may be implemented by a pachinko machine or the like that is not provided with the “calculation time addition command”.

  In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 determines the changing effect and the notice effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Instead of the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 is used. The variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the notice effect may be determined. For example, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a holding number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the special figure holding ball number N based on the received holding number command, and based on the extracted special figure holding ball number N, The variation effect displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81 and the notice effect are determined. When the sound lamp control device 113 determines a variation effect or a notice effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the extracted special figure reservation ball number N, the special figure reservation lamp 85 The number of reservations for the first entrance 64 may or may not be displayed. As a result, the number of pending command transmissions in the main controller 110 can be reduced, so that the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the special figure reservation ball number N is notified by turning on the special figure reservation lamp 85. However, without providing the special figure reservation lamp 85, the special figure reservation ball number N is displayed in the third symbol. You may comprise so that it may display on the apparatus 81. FIG. In addition, the display is performed so that the number of holdings is visually distinguishable (for example, a number or a four-divided area is displayed as a mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) that is different by the number of holdings). To do. In addition, the special figure reservation ball number N may be notified by turning on the special figure reservation lamp 85, and the special figure reservation ball number N may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although it was comprised so that a prize to the 1st entrance 64 could be held at a maximum of 4 times, respectively, the maximum hold frequency is not limited to 4 times and is 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  In the above embodiment, the special figure reservation ball counter 203c is provided as a counter for counting the special figure reservation ball number N of the first entrance 64. However, the counter 203c is not provided and the counter 203c is provided as necessary. (For example, at the start of a change), the contents of the reserved ball storage area 203a are confirmed (the number of areas with data is counted) so as to obtain the special figure reserved ball number N of the first entrance 64. You may comprise. In this case, the data of the shift source area is cleared after the data is shifted from the shift source area to the shift destination area.

  In the above embodiment, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured as separate devices, but the sound lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device.

  Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information vertically or horizontally on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Instead, it may be performed by moving and displaying symbols along a predetermined route such as an L-shape. Moreover, you may scroll diagonally. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in various manners together with the symbol or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although it was comprised so that passage of the 2nd entrance 67 might be suspended up to 4 times each, the maximum number of times of suspension is not limited to 4 times, and it is 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 are configured as separate devices, but instead, the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 are integrated. , May be configured as a single device. For example, in this case, each time a new winning is detected and each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a, it is based on the contents of the reserved ball storage area 203a and the reserved ball execution area 203b. Thus, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute a continuous chance eye effect. Further, when a new winning is detected and the continuous chance effect is being executed, the values of the counters C1 to C3 corresponding to the new winning are temporarily stored in a memory area of a queue format (FIFO format). In addition, after the end of the continuous chance effect, the values of the counters C1 to C3 corresponding to the winnings are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a in the order stored in the memory area of the queue format (FIFO format). You may move them one by one. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the value of the continuous chance eye counter from being overwritten during execution of the continuous chance eye effect, and it is possible to accurately execute the continuous chance eye effect. Therefore, it is possible to accurately indicate to the player the gaming state that the gaming machine is scheduled to move to after the end of the continuous chance effect, by the number of consecutive variable effects with the stop symbol as “chance eye”. Therefore, the player is relieved according to the number of continuous fluctuation effects with “stop chance” as the stop symbol, and can provide a highly interesting game to the player.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the gaming machine is configured to change the stop symbol of the variable effect being executed or the stop symbol of the variable effect that is being executed to “chance”, but the execution is suspended. The gaming machine may be configured so as to change only the stop symbol of the variation effect that has been made to “chance”.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the stop symbol in which three same 3 symbols are stopped-displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is set as "chance eyes", three predetermined 3rd symbols are the 1st symbols. The stop symbol that is stopped and displayed on the three symbol display device 81 may be a “chance eye”.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, the present invention may be applied to a so-called second type pachinko gaming machine having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as another game machine such as an alepacchi or a sparrow ball.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information is specific, and in this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the various embodiments described above are shown. Display means for displaying the identification information, a entrance for entering the game medium, a detection means for detecting the entrance of the game medium into the entrance, and the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means In a gaming machine provided with dynamic display executing means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information in the event that a game medium has been entered by the detecting means, The entrance information acquisition means for acquiring the entrance information, the entrance information storage means for storing the entrance information acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, and the dynamic display execution means are stored in the entrance information storage means. The dynamic display of the identification information is executed based on the contents, and when the entrance information is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, the dynamic display is executed based on the contents of the entrance information storage means. State of dynamic display being executed by execution means A change possibility determination unit that determines whether or not the change can be changed to a predetermined mode, and a dynamic display mode executed by the dynamic display execution unit when the change determination unit determines that the change is possible First changing means for changing to the mode of the dynamic display, and dynamic display executed next to the dynamic display whose mode has been changed by the first changing unit, wherein the mode of the dynamic display before the execution is the predetermined The game machine A1 is provided with a second changing means for changing to the above aspect.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means, the entrance information associated with the entrance is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, and the entrance information is stored in the entrance information storage means. Remembered. Then, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information based on the contents of the ball entry information storage means. Further, when the entry information is acquired by the entry information acquisition means, it is determined by the changeability determination means whether the dynamic display mode executed by the dynamic display execution means can be changed to a predetermined mode. If it is determined that the change is possible, the dynamic display mode executed by the dynamic display execution unit is changed to a predetermined mode by the first change unit. Furthermore, the dynamic display is executed next to the dynamic display whose mode has been changed, and the mode of the dynamic display before the execution is changed to a predetermined mode by the second changing unit.

  Since the dynamic display executing means executes dynamic display based on the contents of the incoming ball information storage means, the mode of dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means is determined before the start of the execution. However, since the mode of dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display executing means can be changed to a predetermined mode by the first changing means, the mode of dynamic display determined before the start of execution is changed to the dynamic display. Can be changed to a predetermined mode during execution. In addition, since the dynamic display is executed next to the dynamic display whose mode is changed by the first changing unit, the mode of the dynamic display before the execution can be changed to a predetermined mode by the second changing unit. The mode of the continuous dynamic display of the dynamic display being executed and the dynamic display to be executed next can be changed to a predetermined mode. Therefore, when the dynamic display mode is continuously set to the predetermined mode, the dynamic display mode that is already being executed can be changed to the predetermined mode. The dynamic display mode can be changed to the predetermined mode once more than the predetermined mode from the target display mode. Therefore, the opportunity to change the dynamic display mode to a predetermined mode continuously can be increased.

  Display means for displaying the identification information, a entrance for entering the game medium, a detection means for detecting the entrance of the game medium into the entrance, and the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means In a gaming machine comprising: peripheral control means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information in the event that the display means is in control; and main control means for controlling the peripheral control means and performing main control relating to the game. The control means, when the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means, the entrance information acquisition means for acquiring entrance information associated with the entrance, and the entrance information acquired by the entrance information acquisition means Based on the contents of the main entrance information storage means, the main entrance information storage means for storing the entrance information acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, and the main entrance information storage means. Execution of the dynamic display in the periphery Dynamic display instruction means for instructing the control means, and the peripheral control means includes dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means in the display means, , An incoming ball information receiving unit for receiving the incoming ball information transmitted by the incoming ball information transmitting unit of the main control unit, and a peripheral incoming ball information storing unit for storing the incoming ball information received by the incoming ball information receiving unit; When the incoming information is received by the incoming information receiving means, the dynamic display mode executed by the dynamic display executing means is a predetermined mode based on the contents of the peripheral incoming information storage means. Changeable determination means for determining whether the display can be changed, and when the changeability determination means determines that the change is possible, the dynamic display mode executed by the dynamic display execution means is changed to a predetermined mode. First And a dynamic display executed next to the dynamic display whose mode has been changed by the first changing unit, wherein the second dynamic display mode is changed to the predetermined mode. A gaming machine A2 comprising a changing means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in the main control means, when the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means, the entrance information accompanying the entrance is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, and the entrance information is It is transmitted to the control means by the entrance information transmission means. Further, when the entrance information is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, the entrance information is stored in the main entrance information storage means, and the dynamic display is executed based on the contents of the main entrance information storage means. The peripheral display means is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means. On the other hand, in the peripheral control means, the dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means is executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means. Further, when the entrance information transmitted by the entrance information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the entrance information receiving means, the received entrance information is stored in the peripheral entrance information storage means and the peripheral entrance information is stored. Based on the content of the sphere information storage means, it is determined by the changeability determination means whether the dynamic display mode executed by the dynamic display execution means can be changed to a predetermined mode. If it is determined that the change is possible, the dynamic display mode executed by the dynamic display execution unit is changed to a predetermined mode by the first change unit. Furthermore, the dynamic display is executed next to the dynamic display whose mode has been changed, and the mode of the dynamic display before the execution is changed to a predetermined mode by the second changing unit.

  Since the dynamic display execution means of the peripheral control means executes the dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means, the dynamic display mode executed by the dynamic display execution means of the peripheral control means Is determined before the execution starts. In the peripheral control means, the mode of dynamic display being executed by the dynamic display executing means can be changed to the predetermined mode by the first changing means, so the mode of dynamic display determined before the start of execution is It is possible to change to a predetermined mode during execution of dynamic display. In addition, since the dynamic display is executed next to the dynamic display whose mode is changed by the first changing unit, the mode of the dynamic display before the execution can be changed to a predetermined mode by the second changing unit. The mode of the continuous dynamic display of the dynamic display being executed and the dynamic display to be executed next can be changed to a predetermined mode. Therefore, when the dynamic display mode is continuously set to the predetermined mode, the dynamic display mode that is already being executed can be changed to the predetermined mode. The dynamic display mode can be changed to the predetermined mode once more than the predetermined mode from the automatic display mode. Therefore, the opportunity to change the dynamic display mode to a predetermined mode continuously can be increased.

  In the gaming machine A2, the main control means controls the peripheral control information related to the number of pieces of entry information stored in the main entry information storage means separately from the entry information transmitted by the entry information transmission means. A game machine A3, characterized in that the game machine A3 is provided with a pitch information transmission means for sending to the means.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in the main control means, apart from the entrance information transmitted by the entrance information transmission means, information related to the number of entry information stored in the main entrance information storage means is sent to the peripheral control means. It is transmitted by the number-of-entry information transmission means. Therefore, since the peripheral control means can separately receive the entry information and the information related to the number of entry information stored in the main entry information storage means, the processing for each information can be executed at different timings. And control burden can be distributed. Further, the main control means can separately transmit the entrance information and the information related to the number of entrance information stored in the main entrance information storage means to the peripheral control means, so that it is compared with the case of transmitting at the same timing. Thus, the control burden can be distributed.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the predetermined mode changed by the first change unit and the second change unit includes a dynamic display effect mode, a dynamic display result mode, and a dynamic display mode. A gaming machine A4 including at least one of the displayed sound effect modes.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the predetermined mode changed by the first change unit and the second change unit includes a dynamic display effect mode, a dynamic display result mode, and a dynamic display sound effect. Since at least one of the modes is included, it is possible to make the player recognize that the dynamic display has been changed to a predetermined mode, and to attract the player's interest.

  When the dynamic display mode is continuously set to the predetermined mode, the predetermined mode may be changed for each dynamic display. For example, in the first dynamic display, the predetermined mode is a dynamic display mode, and in the second dynamic display, the predetermined mode is a dynamic display result mode. In the display, a predetermined mode is set as a dynamic sound effect mode. In this way, if the dynamic display mode is changed, the dynamic display changes in a variety of ways, and the player's interest can be more strongly attracted.

  Display means for displaying the identification information, a entrance for entering the game medium, a detection means for detecting the entrance of the game medium into the entrance, and the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means In a gaming machine comprising: peripheral control means for performing dynamic display of identification information in the display means; and main control means for controlling the peripheral control means and performing main control relating to games. The control means includes an entrance information acquisition means for acquiring entrance information associated with the entrance when the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means, and an entrance acquired by the entrance information acquisition means The contents of the incoming ball information transmitting means for transmitting information to the peripheral control means, the incoming ball information storing means for storing the incoming ball information acquired by the incoming ball information acquiring means, and the contents of the main incoming ball information storage means Based on the execution of the dynamic display Dynamic display instruction means for instructing the peripheral control means, wherein the peripheral control means executes the dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means in the display means Execution means, mode setting means for setting the dynamic display mode executed by the dynamic display execution means to a predetermined mode or a mode different from the predetermined mode, and entrance information of the main control unit Incoming information receiving means for receiving incoming information transmitted by the transmitting means, first peripheral storage means for storing incoming information received by the incoming information receiving means, and new in the first peripheral storage means When dynamic entry information is stored, based on the contents of the first peripheral storage means, the dynamic display is executed in order by the dynamic display execution means, and the dynamic order is continuously executed. Each display mode An effect availability determination unit that determines whether or not a continuous effect to be executed in a predetermined mode can be executed, and is executed by the dynamic display execution unit when the effect determination unit determines that the continuous effect can be executed. The continuous effect control means for controlling the dynamic display modes in the execution order to be the predetermined mode, and the input after the continuous effect is determined to be executable by the effect availability determination means. A first storage control means for storing the incoming information received by the ball information receiving means in a second peripheral storage means different from the first peripheral storage means instead of the first peripheral storage means; A gaming machine B1 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B1, when the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means in the main control means, the entrance information accompanying the entrance is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, and the acquired entrance Information is transmitted to the peripheral control means by the entrance information transmitting means. Further, when the entrance information is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, the entrance information is stored in the main entrance information storage means, and the dynamic display is executed based on the contents of the main entrance information storage means. The peripheral display means is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means. On the other hand, in the peripheral control means, the dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means is executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means, and the dynamic display mode to be executed is predetermined. Or an aspect different from the predetermined aspect is set by the aspect setting means. Further, when the entrance information transmitted by the entrance information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the entrance information receiving means, the received entrance information is stored in the first peripheral storage means. And when new entrance information is memorize | stored in the 1st periphery memory | storage means, based on the content of the 1st periphery memory | storage means, it performs in the dynamic display performed in order by the dynamic display execution means It is determined by the effect availability determination means whether or not a continuous effect for executing the dynamic display modes that are in sequence in a predetermined manner can be executed. Here, if it is determined that execution is possible, the continuous presentation control unit controls the dynamic display modes in the execution order executed by the dynamic display execution unit to be in a predetermined mode, and the determination of whether or not presentation is possible. Entry information received by the entry information receiving means after it is determined to be executable by the means is stored in the second peripheral storage means different from the first peripheral storage means in place of the first peripheral storage means. Stored by the control means. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent new entry information from being stored in the first peripheral storage means after it is determined that the performance availability determination means can execute, the dynamic display mode is set to a predetermined mode by the continuous performance control unit. In the middle of being controlled so that the control is performed again, it is determined that the performance determination unit can execute again, and as a result, the execution of the control by the continuous performance control unit different from the control during the execution is started. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of dynamic displays controlled so as to be in a predetermined mode by the continuous performance control means from being changed during the control, so that it is advantageous for the player when the continuous performance is executed. It is possible to accurately suggest to the player the possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

  For example, the continuous production control means may be configured to control only the dynamic display mode before being executed by the dynamic display execution means so as to be a predetermined mode, or executed by the dynamic display execution means. It is good also as a structure which controls so that the aspect of the dynamic display currently performed and the aspect of the dynamic display before being performed by the dynamic display execution means may become a predetermined | prescribed aspect, respectively.

  In the gaming machine B1, the first storage control means receives the entry information receiving means from when it is determined that the continuous effect can be executed by the effect availability determining means until the control by the continuous effect control means ends. Entry information is stored in the second peripheral storage means in association with the reception order of the incoming information instead of the first peripheral storage means, and the peripheral control means is stored in the second peripheral storage means. Storage determination means for determining whether the entry information is stored, and when the entry information is received by the entry information receiving means, if the entry information is determined to be stored by the storage determination means, Second storage control means for storing the incoming ball information received by the incoming ball information receiving means in the second peripheral memory means in association with the receiving order of the incoming ball information instead of the first peripheral memory means; A reception order entry information acquisition means for obtaining the entry information stored in the second peripheral storage means in the order in which the entry information was received after the control by the control means is completed, and the reception order entry information; A gaming machine B2 comprising: third storage control means for storing the entrance information acquired by the acquisition means one by one in the acquired order in the first peripheral storage means.

  According to the gaming machine B2, the entrance information received by the entrance information receiving means from when it is determined that the effect can be executed by the effect availability determination means until the end of the control by the effect control means is the first peripheral memory. Instead of the means, the first storage control means stores the information in the second peripheral storage means in association with the reception order of the entry information. In the peripheral control means, when the incoming information is received by the incoming information receiving means, if it is determined by the storage determining means that the incoming information is stored in the second peripheral storage means, the incoming information is received. The incoming information received by the means is stored in the second peripheral storage means by the second storage control means in association with the reception order of the incoming information in place of the first peripheral storage means. Further, when the control by the continuous effect control means is finished, the entrance information stored in the second peripheral storage means is acquired by the reception order entry information acquisition means in the order in which the entrance information is received, and the acquisition is performed. The third storage control means stores the entry information in the first peripheral storage means one by one in the order of acquisition. Therefore, after the control by the continuous production control means is completed, the entrance information stored in the second peripheral storage means can be stored in the first peripheral storage means one by one in the order in which the entrance information is received. it can. Further, even after the control by the continuous effect control means is completed, the entry information received by the entry information receiving means is stored in the first peripheral storage means while the entry information is stored in the second peripheral storage means. Instead, it can be stored in the second peripheral storage means in association with the reception order of the entrance information. Therefore, since the order of the entry information stored in the first peripheral storage means can be the order in which the entry information is received, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect can be executed by the effect availability determination means. This can be done in an order corresponding to the order in which the information was received. Therefore, the possibility of shifting to a gaming state advantageous to the player can be suggested to the player accurately in the order in which the possibility is shifted.

  The acquisition of the entry information by the reception order entry information acquisition means is, for example, after reading the entry information stored in the second peripheral storage means, the read entry information is stored in the second peripheral storage means. Indicates to be removed from

  In the gaming machine B2, the continuous production control means, when the production availability determination means determines that the continuous production can be executed, the dynamic order execution means executed by the dynamic display execution means are continuous. Each of the display modes is set to the predetermined mode by the mode setting unit, and the reception order entry information acquisition unit is controlled by the continuous performance control unit and the mode of the execution order set to the predetermined mode is set. When the dynamic display whose execution order is the last among the continuous dynamic displays is completed, the entrance information stored in the second peripheral storage means is acquired in the order in which the entrance information is received. A gaming machine B3 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming machine B3, when it is determined by the effect availability determination means that the continuous effect can be executed, the continuous effect control means causes the dynamic display modes executed by the dynamic display execution means to be continuously displayed. A predetermined mode is set by the mode setting means. In addition, when the dynamic display having the last execution order in the continuous dynamic display in which the execution order is controlled by the continuous production control means and the aspect is set to the predetermined aspect is completed, the second peripheral storage means The stored entry information is acquired by the reception order entry information acquisition means in the order in which the entry information is received. Therefore, when the execution of the last variation display in the continuous performance is finished and the control burden on the peripheral control means is reduced, the order in which the entrance information is received from the entrance information stored in the second peripheral storage means Can be obtained by the reception order entry information acquisition means. Therefore, the control burden on the peripheral control means can be distributed.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, the peripheral control means determines that the entry information is stored in the second peripheral storage means by the storage determination means after the control by the continuous performance control means is completed. The reception order entry information acquisition means, the second storage control means, and the effect availability determination means are repeatedly executed until it is determined that the continuous effect can be executed during or newly by the effect availability determination means. A gaming machine B4 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine B4, after the control by the continuous effect control means is completed in the peripheral control means, while it is determined by the storage determination means that the entry information is stored in the second peripheral storage means or newly The reception order entry information acquisition means, the second storage control means, and the effect availability determination means are repeatedly executed until it is determined by the effect availability determination means that the continuous effect can be executed. Therefore, after the control by the continuous production control means is completed, the input stored in the second peripheral storage means is determined while the storage determining means determines that the entry information is stored in the second peripheral storage means. The process of storing the sphere information in the first peripheral storage means and the process of determining whether or not the continuous effect can be executed based on the contents of the first peripheral storage means can be repeatedly executed. Therefore, the process of storing the entry information stored in the second peripheral storage unit in the first peripheral storage unit and the process of determining whether the continuous effect can be executed based on the contents of the first peripheral storage unit are periodically performed. Compared with the case where the execution is performed intermittently or intermittently, it is possible to shorten the period during which the incoming ball information is stored in the second peripheral storage means. Therefore, the storage means can be used efficiently when the second peripheral storage means is shared with other storage means, programs for executing other processes, and the like.

  Further, the process of storing the entry information stored in the second peripheral storage means in the first peripheral storage means and the process of determining whether or not the continuous effect can be executed based on the contents of the first peripheral storage means are: This is executed until it is determined by the means for determining whether or not the continuous effect can be executed. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent new entry information from being stored in the first peripheral storage means after it is determined that the performance availability determination means can execute, the dynamic display mode is set to a predetermined mode by the continuous performance control unit. In the middle of being controlled so that the control is performed again, it is determined that the performance determination unit can execute again, and as a result, the execution of the control by the continuous performance control unit different from the control during the execution is started. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of dynamic displays controlled so as to be in a predetermined mode by the continuous performance control means from being changed during the control, so that it is advantageous for the player when the continuous performance is executed. The possibility of shifting to the gaming state can be suggested to the player more accurately.

  Display means for displaying the identification information, a entrance for entering the game medium, a detection means for detecting the entrance of the game medium into the entrance, and the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means A dynamic display executing means for performing dynamic display of identification information in the display means, and a mode of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means as a predetermined mode or the predetermined mode. In a gaming machine provided with a mode setting means for setting in another mode, a pitch information acquisition means for acquiring pitch information associated with the pitch when a ball entering the game medium is detected by the detection means; The first entry information storage means for storing the entry information acquired by the entry information acquisition means, and the dynamic display execution means are based on the contents of the first entry information storage means. Display, and information on the entry When the entry information is acquired by the means, the execution order continues in the dynamic display executed in order by the dynamic display execution means based on the contents of the first entry information storage means. When it is determined that the continuous effect can be executed by the effect availability determination unit that determines whether it is possible to execute a continuous effect that causes each of the dynamic display modes to be executed in the predetermined mode, The continuous production control means for controlling the dynamic display modes in the execution order executed by the dynamic display execution means to be the predetermined modes, and the continuous performance is executed by the production availability determination unit. Second entry information storage means different from the first entry information storage means in place of the first entry information storage means instead of the entry information acquired by the entry information acquisition means after it is determined to be possible Gaming machine B5, characterized in that a storage control means for storing for.

  According to the gaming machine B5, when the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means, the entrance information associated with the entrance is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, and the entrance information is stored in the first entrance information storage. Stored in the means. Then, based on the contents of the first incoming information storing means, dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the dynamic display executing means in the display means. Further, when the entrance information is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, the execution order of the dynamic display executed in order by the dynamic display execution means is based on the contents of the first entrance information storage means. Whether or not a continuous effect that allows continuous dynamic display to be executed in a predetermined manner can be executed is determined by the effect determination unit. Here, if it is determined that execution is possible, the continuous presentation control unit controls the dynamic display modes in the execution order executed by the dynamic display execution unit to be in a predetermined mode, and the determination of whether or not presentation is possible. The second entry information that is different from the first entry information storage means instead of the first entry information storage means is the entry information acquired by the entry information acquisition means after the means is determined to be executable. It is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent new entry information from being stored in the first entry information storage unit after it has been determined that the effect availability determination unit can execute, the dynamic display mode is predetermined by the continuous effect control unit. In the middle of being controlled so as to be the mode of the above, it is determined again by the effect availability determination means that execution is possible, and as a result, execution of the control by the continuous effect control means different from the control being executed is started. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of dynamic displays controlled so as to be in a predetermined mode by the continuous performance control means from being changed during the control, so that it is advantageous for the player when the continuous performance is executed. It is possible to accurately suggest to the player the possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

  For example, the continuous production control means may be configured to control only the dynamic display mode before being executed by the dynamic display execution means so as to be a predetermined mode, or executed by the dynamic display execution means. It is good also as a structure which controls so that the aspect of the dynamic display currently performed and the aspect of the dynamic display before being performed by the dynamic display execution means may become a predetermined | prescribed aspect, respectively.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B5, the predetermined mode includes at least one of the dynamic display effect mode, the dynamic display display result mode, and the dynamic display sound effect mode. A gaming machine B6 characterized in that one is included.

  According to the gaming machine B6, the predetermined mode includes at least one of a dynamic display effect mode, a dynamic display result mode, and a dynamic sound effect mode. The player can recognize that the dynamic display has been changed to a predetermined mode, and can attract the player's interest.

  When the dynamic display mode is continuously set to the predetermined mode, the predetermined mode may be changed for each dynamic display. For example, in the first dynamic display, the predetermined mode is a dynamic display mode, and in the second dynamic display, the predetermined mode is a dynamic display result mode. In the display, a predetermined mode is set as a dynamic sound effect mode. In this way, if the dynamic display mode is changed, the dynamic display changes in a variety of ways, and the player's interest can be more strongly attracted.

  Each of the gaming machines is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine C1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed in a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through a prize opening), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine, and the gaming machine C2. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

Each of the gaming machines is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, pachinko machines have been known in which a display effect such as a liquid crystal display device is used to produce fluctuating effects (dynamic display) and the like to improve the interest of the game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 7-24383). ). The fluctuating effect (dynamic display) is an effect that starts when a game ball enters (wins) at the entrance (starting entrance), for example, 3 provided in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. A total of nine symbols and the like are displayed in a × 3 cell. More specifically, when a game ball wins a start opening, scrolling of symbols and the like is started, and then the symbols being scrolled are sequentially stopped and a total of nine symbols (stop symbols) are stopped and displayed. To do. In such a variation effect, a device is devised to give the player a sense of expectation by executing an effect that suggests in advance that the game state (for example, jackpot) is advantageous for the player.
In this type of pachinko machine, for example, as an effect that suggests in advance that the game state is advantageous to the player, the display of chances and the like is not limited to one variation effect, but continuously over a plurality of variation effects. There are games that are configured to be performed periodically or intermittently, or those that perform the same or different performance multiple times continuously or intermittently with display or sound effects (hereinafter referred to as “continuous performance”), and advantageous games The game has been further improved in interest, such as giving players a sense of expectation of the state. Note that the chance eyes are, for example, stop symbols other than winning, and stop symbols (display results) including predetermined symbols (for example, symbols such as “3”, “4”, and “1”), respectively. Aspect). For example, if a plurality of variation effects to be started are held when a game ball wins a start opening, this continuous effect is performed continuously for the plurality of variation effects that are held. This indicates to the player that the greater the number of times of changing effects, the higher the possibility of shifting to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.
However, there may be a case where a continuous performance is executed that does not correspond to the number of continuously performed variable performances and the high possibility of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player, and the transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player may occur. There was a problem that the wrong thing was suggested to the player as a possibility.
This technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and provides a gaming machine that can accurately suggest the possibility of shifting to a gaming state advantageous to the player The purpose is to do.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 detects display means for displaying identification information, a entrance into which a game medium enters, and an entrance of the game medium into the entrance. A detection means, a peripheral control means for executing dynamic display of identification information in the display means when the detection means detects a ball entering a game medium, and controls the peripheral control means, Main control means for performing control, and the main control means, when the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means, the entrance information for acquiring the entrance information associated with the entrance An entry means, an entry information transmission means for sending the entry information acquired by the entry information acquisition means to the peripheral control means, and a main entry for storing the entry information acquired by the entry information acquisition means. Sphere information storage means and its main entry information Dynamic display instruction means for instructing the peripheral control means to execute the dynamic display based on the contents of the memory means, the peripheral control means being instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means The dynamic display execution means for executing the dynamic display in the display means, and the dynamic display mode executed by the dynamic display execution means is set to a predetermined mode or a mode different from the predetermined mode A mode setting means, a pitch information receiving means for receiving the pitch information transmitted by the pitch information transmitting means of the main control means, and a pitch information for receiving the pitch information received by the pitch information receiving means. When the new entry information is stored in one peripheral storage means and the first peripheral storage means, the dynamic display execution means sequentially executes the information based on the contents of the first peripheral storage means. Real in dynamic display It is determined that the continuous effects can be executed by the effect availability determination means for determining whether or not the continuous effects for executing the dynamic display modes that are in sequence are executed in the predetermined mode, and the effect availability determination means. The continuous display control means for controlling the dynamic display modes of the execution order executed by the dynamic display execution means to be the predetermined modes, and the effect availability determination means. The entry information received by the entry information receiving means after it is determined that the continuous effect can be executed is stored in a second peripheral storage means different from the first peripheral storage means instead of the first peripheral storage means. First storage control means.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the first storage control means determines that the continuous effect can be executed by the effect availability determination means and then the continuous effect control means The entrance information received by the entrance information receiving means until the end of the control is stored in the second peripheral storage means in association with the reception order of the entrance information instead of the first peripheral storage means, The control means is a storage judging means for judging whether or not the entrance information is stored in the second peripheral storage means, and when the entrance information is received by the entrance information receiving means, the storage judging means If it is determined that the information is stored, the incoming information received by the incoming information receiving means is replaced with the second peripheral storage means in place of the first peripheral storage means in the order of receiving the incoming information. Associate The second storage control means, and after the control by the continuous production control means is completed, the reception order entry that acquires the entry information stored in the second peripheral storage means in the order in which the entry information was received. Information acquisition means, and third storage control means for storing in the first peripheral storage means one by one in the order in which the pieces of entry information acquired by the reception order entry information acquisition means are acquired.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, wherein the continuous production control unit performs the dynamic display execution when the production effect determination unit judges that the continuous production can be executed. The dynamic display modes of the execution order executed by the means are respectively set to the predetermined modes by the mode setting unit, and the reception order entry information acquisition unit is controlled by the continuous effect control unit. The input stored in the second peripheral storage means when the dynamic display having the last execution order in the continuous dynamic display of the execution order set to the predetermined aspect is completed. The ball information is acquired in the order in which the ball entry information is received.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the technical ideas 1 to 3, wherein the predetermined mode includes the dynamic display effect mode and the dynamic display result mode. In addition, at least one of the sound effect modes of the dynamic display is included.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, in the main control unit, when the detection unit detects the entrance of the game medium, the entrance information associated with the entrance is acquired by the entrance information acquisition unit. The acquired entry information is transmitted to the peripheral control means by the entry information transmission means. Further, when the entrance information is acquired by the entrance information acquisition means, the entrance information is stored in the main entrance information storage means, and the dynamic display is executed based on the contents of the main entrance information storage means. The peripheral display means is instructed by the dynamic display instruction means. On the other hand, in the peripheral control means, the dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means is executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means, and the dynamic display mode to be executed is predetermined. Or an aspect different from the predetermined aspect is set by the aspect setting means. Further, when the entrance information transmitted by the entrance information transmitting means of the main control means is received by the entrance information receiving means, the received entrance information is stored in the first peripheral storage means. And when new entrance information is memorize | stored in the 1st periphery memory | storage means, based on the content of the 1st periphery memory | storage means, it performs in the dynamic display performed in order by the dynamic display execution means It is determined by the effect availability determination means whether or not a continuous effect for executing the dynamic display modes that are in sequence in a predetermined manner can be executed. Here, if it is determined that execution is possible, the continuous presentation control unit controls the dynamic display modes in the execution order executed by the dynamic display execution unit to be in a predetermined mode, and the determination of whether or not presentation is possible. Entry information received by the entry information receiving means after it is determined to be executable by the means is stored in the second peripheral storage means different from the first peripheral storage means in place of the first peripheral storage means. Stored by the control means. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent new entry information from being stored in the first peripheral storage means after it is determined that the performance availability determination means can execute, the dynamic display mode is set to a predetermined mode by the continuous performance control unit. In the middle of being controlled so that the control is performed again, it is determined that the performance determination unit can execute again, and as a result, the execution of the control by the continuous performance control unit different from the control during the execution is started. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of dynamic displays controlled so as to be in a predetermined mode by the continuous performance control means from being changed during the control, so that it is advantageous for the player when the continuous performance is executed. There is an effect that it is possible to accurately suggest to the player the possibility of shifting to the gaming state.
For example, the continuous production control means may be configured to control only the dynamic display mode before being executed by the dynamic display execution means so as to be a predetermined mode, or executed by the dynamic display execution means. It is good also as a structure which controls so that the aspect of the dynamic display currently performed and the aspect of the dynamic display before being performed by the dynamic display execution means may become a predetermined | prescribed aspect, respectively.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the control by the continuous production control unit is terminated after it is determined that the continuous production can be executed by the production availability determination unit. The entrance information received by the entrance information receiving means is stored by the first storage control means in association with the reception order of the entrance information in the second periphery storage means instead of the first periphery storage means. In the peripheral control means, when the incoming information is received by the incoming information receiving means, if it is determined by the storage determining means that the incoming information is stored in the second peripheral storage means, the incoming information is received. The incoming information received by the means is stored in the second peripheral storage means by the second storage control means in association with the reception order of the incoming information in place of the first peripheral storage means. Further, when the control by the continuous effect control means is finished, the entrance information stored in the second peripheral storage means is acquired by the reception order entry information acquisition means in the order in which the entrance information is received, and the acquisition is performed. The third storage control means stores the entry information in the first peripheral storage means one by one in the order of acquisition. Therefore, after the control by the continuous production control means is completed, the entrance information stored in the second peripheral storage means can be stored in the first peripheral storage means one by one in the order in which the entrance information is received. it can. Further, even after the control by the continuous effect control means is completed, the entry information received by the entry information receiving means is stored in the first peripheral storage means while the entry information is stored in the second peripheral storage means. Instead, it can be stored in the second peripheral storage means in association with the reception order of the entrance information. Therefore, since the order of the entry information stored in the first peripheral storage means can be the order in which the entry information is received, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect can be executed by the effect availability determination means. This can be done in an order corresponding to the order in which the information was received. Therefore, when continuous performances are executed in order, it is possible to accurately suggest to the player the possibility of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player in the order in which the possibility transitions. There is.
The acquisition of the entry information by the reception order entry information acquisition means is, for example, after reading the entry information stored in the second peripheral storage means, the read entry information is stored in the second peripheral storage means. Indicates to be removed from
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, when the continuous production control unit determines that the continuous production can be executed, A dynamic display mode in which the execution order is executed by the display execution unit is set to a predetermined mode by the mode setting unit. In addition, when the dynamic display having the last execution order in the continuous dynamic display in which the execution order is controlled by the continuous production control means and the aspect is set to the predetermined aspect is completed, the second peripheral storage means The stored entry information is acquired by the reception order entry information acquisition means in the order in which the entry information is received. Therefore, when the execution of the last variation display in the continuous performance is finished and the control burden on the peripheral control means is reduced, the order in which the entrance information is received from the entrance information stored in the second peripheral storage means Can be obtained by the reception order entry information acquisition means. Accordingly, there is an effect that the control burden on the peripheral control means can be distributed.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in any of the technical ideas 1 to 3, the predetermined mode includes a dynamic display effect mode, a dynamic display mode Since at least one of the display result mode and the dynamic display sound effect mode is included, the player can recognize that the dynamic display has been changed to a predetermined mode. It has the effect of attracting interest.
When the dynamic display mode is continuously set to the predetermined mode, the predetermined mode may be changed for each dynamic display. For example, in the first dynamic display, the predetermined mode is the dynamic display effect mode, and in the second dynamic display, the predetermined mode is the dynamic display result mode. In the display, a predetermined mode is set as a dynamic sound effect mode. As described above, if the dynamic display mode is changed, the dynamic display changes in a variety of ways, so that the player's interest can be more strongly attracted.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
64 First entrance (entrance)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
110 Main control device (main control means)
112 Firing control device (firing means)
113 Sound lamp control device (peripheral control means)
114 Display control device (peripheral control means)
203a hold ball storage area (input bulb information storage means)
208a First entrance switch (detection means)
S306 Dynamic display instruction means S654 Entrance information acquisition means S655 Entrance information transmission means
S404, S406 Dynamic display time determination means S1110, S1605 Dynamic display execution means S1207 Change possibility determination means
S1302, S1312 Entry information discrimination means
S1308, S1309, S1806, S1807 First changing means
S1311, S1315, S1317 Setting means
S1316, S1317 Number of times suppression means

Claims (4)

Display means for displaying the identification information, a entrance for entering the game medium, a detection means for detecting the entrance of the game medium into the entrance, and the entrance of the game medium is detected by the detection means In a gaming machine comprising peripheral control means for performing dynamic display of identification information in the display means, and main control means for controlling the peripheral control means and performing main control relating to the game,
The main control means includes
When the detection means detects a game medium entry, the entry information acquisition means for acquiring entry information associated with the entry;
Entry information transmission means for transmitting the entry information acquired by the entry information acquisition means to the peripheral control means,
Main entry information storage means for storing entry information acquired by the entry information acquisition means;
Dynamic display instruction means for instructing the peripheral control means to execute the dynamic display based on the contents of the main entrance information storage means;
The peripheral control means includes
Dynamic display execution means for executing in the display means the dynamic display instructed by the dynamic display instruction means of the main control means;
A mode setting unit that sets the mode of the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution unit to a predetermined mode or a mode different from the predetermined mode;
Entry information receiving means for receiving the entry information transmitted by the entry information transmission means of the main control means,
First peripheral storage means for storing the incoming information received by the incoming information receiving means;
In the dynamic display sequentially executed by the dynamic display execution means based on the contents of the first peripheral storage means when new entry information is stored in the first peripheral storage means. Effect availability determination means for determining whether it is possible to execute a continuous effect that causes each of the dynamic display modes in the execution order to be executed in the predetermined mode;
In the case where it is determined by the effect availability determination unit that the continuous effect can be executed, the dynamic display modes in which the execution order executed by the dynamic display execution unit continues are respectively the predetermined modes. Continuous production control means to control,
Different from the first peripheral storage means instead of the first peripheral storage means, the incoming information received by the incoming information receiving means after it is determined that the continuous effect can be executed by the effect availability determination means. A gaming machine comprising first storage control means for storing in second peripheral storage means. The first storage control means
The entrance information received by the entrance information receiving means until the end of the control by the continuous effect control means after the success / failure judging means determines that the continuous effect can be executed is stored in the first peripheral storage means. Instead, it is stored in the second peripheral storage means in association with the reception order of the entrance information,
The peripheral control means includes
Storage determination means for determining whether or not entry information is stored in the second peripheral storage means;
If the entry information is received by the entry information receiving means, and if the entry information is determined to be stored by the storage judging means, the entry information received by the entry information receiving means is Second storage control means for storing the second peripheral storage means in association with the reception order of the incoming ball information instead of the first peripheral storage means;
A reception order entry information acquisition means for acquiring the entry information stored in the second peripheral storage means in the order in which the entry information is received after the control by the continuous effect control means is completed;
3. A third storage control means for storing the entrance information acquired by the reception order entrance information acquisition means one by one in the order of acquisition in the first peripheral storage means. The gaming machine according to 1. The continuous production control means includes
In the case where it is determined that the continuous effect can be executed by the effect availability determining unit, the dynamic display modes executed by the dynamic display executing unit are continuously displayed in the predetermined order by the mode setting unit. Set to the aspect of
The reception order entry information acquisition means includes:
When the dynamic display with the execution order last in the continuous dynamic display of the execution order set by the continuous production control means and set to the predetermined aspect is the second peripheral 3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the entrance information stored in the storage means is acquired in the order in which the entrance information is received.   The predetermined mode includes at least one of a dynamic display effect mode, a dynamic display result mode, and a dynamic sound effect mode. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3.

Images